Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Reference Guide
May 2009
Contents
1. Introduction to Mastercam X....................................................... 1
Mastercam Startup and Resources ....................................................... 1
Mastercam’s Event Logging..................................................................... 3
Learning about HASP and NetHASP ....................................................... 3
Getting Help .............................................................................................. 4
Using Mastercam Help ............................................................................ 4
Mastercam X Documentation ................................................................. 7
Additional Training.................................................................................. 9
Mastercam Support and Services .......................................................... 10
The Mastercam Workspace .................................................................11
Interface Elements and Concepts ......................................................... 12
Graphics Window ............................................................................. 13
Status Bar .......................................................................................... 13
Operations Manager ......................................................................... 14
Toolbars ............................................................................................ 20
Interactive Prompts .......................................................................... 20
Dialog Boxes ..................................................................................... 21
Ribbon Bars .......................................................................................23
Tool Tips ........................................................................................... 27
Learning Mode .................................................................................. 27
Right–Click Menus ............................................................................27
Shortcut Keys .................................................................................... 29
Mastercam’s Calculator .................................................................... 29
Function Interruption ......................................................................32
Drawing Elements and Concepts .......................................................... 33
AutoCursor ........................................................................................ 33
General Selection Ribbon Bar ...........................................................34
Chaining ............................................................................................ 34
IV • REFERENCE GUIDE
Sketcher .............................................................................................34
Machining Elements and Concepts.......................................................35
Toolpaths ..........................................................................................35
Machine Definition/Control Definition Managers ..........................36
Libraries (operations, tools, materials) .............................................37
Mastercam Menus ................................................................................39
File Menu ...............................................................................................40
Edit Menu...............................................................................................41
View Menu .............................................................................................42
Analyze Menu ........................................................................................43
Create Menu...........................................................................................44
Solids Menu ...........................................................................................45
Xform Menu ...........................................................................................46
Machine Type Menu ..............................................................................47
Toolpaths Menu.....................................................................................48
Screen Menu ..........................................................................................49
Art Menu ................................................................................................50
Settings Menu ........................................................................................51
Help Menu .............................................................................................52
The Role of Machine and Control Definitions ......................................53
Toolpath Defaults ..................................................................................55
Working with Post Processors................................................................56
Opening and Translating Files ..............................................................56
Changing Units of Measure (Metric/Inch) ............................................57
Saving Files.............................................................................................58
Sharing Files with the Zip2Go Utility.....................................................59
Opening Files with Other Applications .................................................60
Project Manager.....................................................................................61
Printing and Plotting ..............................................................................65
File Tracking ...........................................................................................67
Checking the Current File ......................................................................68
Check All Tracked Files ..........................................................................69
Tracking Options ...................................................................................69
V
Tool .................................................................................................791
Linear ..............................................................................................793
Arc ...................................................................................................794
Rotary ..............................................................................................795
Feed .................................................................................................796
Cutter Compensation .....................................................................797
Machine Cycles ...............................................................................798
Drill Cycles ......................................................................................799
Subprograms ...................................................................................802
Operation Defaults ..........................................................................803
Text ..................................................................................................804
Note: This document does not include information on Mastercam Wire and
Mastercam Art. For more information, see the PDF documents in the
\Documentation directory of your Mastercam installation, or contact your
Authorized Mastercam Reseller.
To start Mastercam:
1 Double–click the Mastercam icon on your Windows®
Desktop.
Or, select Mastercam from the Windows Program menu. By
default, Mastercam starts up in the Design application.
2 To open a machine-specific Mastercam product, such as
Mill, Router, Lathe, or Wire, select a machine definition from the Machine
Type menu.
Note: You can also switch between Mastercam products by choosing certain
functions from the drop-down menus or toolbars, or by selecting an operation
from the Toolpath Manager.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Startup and Resources • 3
By default, Mastercam directs error messages to both the screen (in the form of
message dialogs) and to the event log. To avoid having Mastercam functions
interrupted by error dialogs, set the Report toolpaths error messages option to Log
file only. You can find this option on the Screen page of the System Configuration
dialog box.
Note: Toolpath Batch mode handles logs using the Log file only option,
regardless of the configuration setting.
Mastercam stores event-log contents in the Event logs directory of your Mastercam
installation. These data files are in XML format.
The event logger can track multiple concurrent Mastercam instances. If for some
reason an instance of the event logger does not close properly, you can close it
manually with the Exit option. To do this, right-click the event logger's icon in your
Windows Taskbar Tray, and choose Exit from the menu that displays.
receive the following message when starting Mastercam, this component is either
missing or not configured properly:
Refer to the Mastercam X4 Installation Guide or contact your local
Reseller for assistance.
Getting Help
Mastercam includes several sources of documentation and support to help you put it
to use quickly and effectively. Because Mastercam is so widely used in manufacturing,
additional resources are available through your Reseller and on the Internet. Topics in
this section include:
Using Mastercam Help (page 4)
Mastercam X Documentation (page 7)
Additional Training (page 9)
Mastercam Support and Services (page 10)
Tabbed dialogs deliver help on dialog boxes and ribbon bars. The “About this...” tab
provides an overview of the function and may include guidelines for its use. This tab
also lists any shortcut keys you can use and offers links to related topics.
1
Click the How do I get here? link to display drop-down text that provides
navigational information.
Figure 1-1: Example: Compressed How do I get here?
TIP: Click any green text in Help topics to display additional information.
6 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Click the See field/button definitions tab to access definitions for all of the dialog box
fields or ribbon bar buttons.
Note: When you move the cursor over the tab the color changes to red indicating
that you can click it to access more information.
The definitions tab provides links to pop-up topics of all of the dialog box or ribbon
bar controls. Click a link to display the selected field/ribbon bar definition.
Many topics include links to videos you run to learn more about a function.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Getting Help • 7
The Help topic Mastercam video tips includes a link to all videos included in Help.
1
Most topics provide drop-down menus of related topics. Hover the mouse over the
menu to view the links. Then click to select a topic.
At the bottom of every topic, we provide an e-mail link you can use to contact CNC
Software Technical Documentation for feedback on our product documentation.
Use this link to tell us about the kind of information you need, and about your
experiences with using our Help and print documentation. We look forward to
hearing from you!
Mastercam X Documentation
The \Documentation folder in your Mastercam installation includes a suite of
documentation tools, training videos, and other resources you can use to make the
most of your Mastercam experience. These publications and videos are designed to
get you up and running quickly, and to provide ongoing education and support as you
work with basic and advanced features.
In addition to a PDF version of the document you are currently reading, here are just
some of the materials you will find your Mastercam X \Documentation folder.
What’s New in Mastercam X4 (printed document and PDF): Outlines the
new features in each product level of Mastercam X4. Also includes short
tutorials to let you try out some of the new functionality
8 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• You must install Adobe® Reader® (version 6.0 or higher) before you can view
or print PDF documentation.
• All PDF documents are available from the Mastercam \Documentation
directory.
TIP: For quick access to the Mastercam X4 Reference Guide, choose Help,
Reference Guide from the Mastercam menu.
1
You can view PDF documents in different page layouts. This affects how some Reader
functions work, and also affects links in the PDF document. To change the layout,
choose View, Page Layout and one of the following options:
Single Page—Displays all the text on a page of the PDF document (with the exception
of graphics or text that is part of a graphic).
Continuous—Arranges the pages in a continuous vertical column.
Facing—Arranges pages side by side in a one or two page layout.
Continuous-Facing—Arranges the pages side by side, with the first page displayed on
the right.
PDF Guidelines
Embedded links in the document are indicated when the hand icon
changes to a pointer as you move the cursor over text that contains a
link.
You can expand and collapse the Bookmark list. To expand a
bookmark (show subtopics), click on its plus symbol (+). To collapse it (hide
subtopics), click the minus symbol (–).
If the Reader toolbar does not appear, press the [F8] key to display it.
To search for a word or phrase, click the binocular icon to begin a
search.
Note: For more information on working with PDFs, refer to the Reader Help.
Additional Training
Additional Mastercam training is available from a variety of sources, including your
Mastercam Reseller and CNC Software, Inc. Two options are listed below:
Mastercam University: CNC Software sponsors Mastercam University, an
affordable online learning platform that gives you 24/7 access to Mastercam
training materials. Take advantage of more than 180 videos to master your
skills at your own pace and help prepare yourself for Mastercam
Certification. For more information on Mastercam University, please contact
your Authorized Mastercam Reseller, visit www.mastercam.com, or email
training@mastercam.com.
10 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Getting Started Tutorial Series: The Getting Started Tutorial Series is a set of
books and videos designed to introduce new users to Mastercam. The
tutorials are best used in sequence, but they can also be used independently.
For more information, please contact your Authorized Mastercam Reseller.
For assistance with installing Mastercam, its SIM HASP or NetHASP, or to obtain more
information on using Mastercam, contact your local Mastercam Reseller. If your
Reseller is unavailable, you can call CNC Technical Support Services Monday through
Friday, 8:00 a.m.–5:30 p.m., USA Eastern Standard Time.
When calling CNC Software for technical support, please follow these guidelines:
Be sure you have already tried to contact your Mastercam Reseller.
Provide the serial number of your SIM HASP or NetHASP.
Be ready to describe the problem in detail. Write down what happened,
particularly if you cannot call immediately after the problem occurs.
Be in front of your computer when you call.
If possible, try to duplicate the problem before calling. Our Support Services
technician may require you to duplicate the problem while you are on the
phone.
When you call, have ready a complete description of your hardware,
including your operating system (OS), central processing unit (CPU),
graphics card and settings, and memory.
You can also leave a message for CNC Support Services twenty-four hours a day, seven
days a week via our email or website addresses. When sending email, please include:
The serial number of your SIM HASP or NetHASP
Telephone number and contact information where you can be reached
Files required to reproduce an issue, such as .MCX and post files
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 11
TIP: Use Mastercam’s Zip2Go utility to gather Mastercam part data into a
compressed .Z2G file. This utility makes it easy to provide your Reseller or
1
CNC Support Services with a file attachment that contains the information they
need. Zip2Go scans the machine groups in your current part file and captures
information such as your Mastercam configuration, machine definition, and
post files. For more information on using Zip2Go, please refer to the
Mastercam Help.
email support@mastercam.com
Prompt area Toolpath, Solids, and Art Managers Status bar Vertically docked tool bar and most
(Operations Manager pane) recently used (MRU) function bar
Status Bar
The Status bar appears along the bottom of the Mastercam window. You use its
functions to edit the current settings for entity colors, attributes, levels, and groups,
and to define the view and orientation of entities in the graphics window.
14 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: You can also access Status bar functions from various Mastercam menus
and toolbars.
To customize the Status bar by changing the order in which the fields appear or by
removing options, click the Status bar configure option (!) to open the Customize
Status bar dialog box.
TIP: Unless you select entities prior to making changes, changing attributes,
views, and planes applies only to the entities and toolpaths you create;
existing entities and toolpaths retain the attributes that were effective when
they were created. Use the Status bar right–click menu and Analyze menu
functions to change attributes associated with existing entities. For more
information, see “Changing Entity Attributes” on page 278.
Operations Manager
The Operations Manager (shown below) houses the Toolpath Manager, Solids
Manager, and Art Manager. Its default position is to the left of the graphics window.
Toolpath Manager—The Toolpaths tab is where you define setup parameters, such as
file defaults, tool settings, stock setup, and safety zones. You also use this tab to view,
organize, and edit machine groups, toolpath groups, and operations. A toolpath
operation consolidates all the information needed to create a particular toolpath. For
more information, see “Managing Toolpath Operations” on page 422.
Solids Manager—If Mastercam Solids is installed, when you work with a solid model,
the Solids tab lists each solid in the current file. You can expand the tree structure of a
solid to view its history (a list of the operations that were performed to construct the
solid) and its toolpaths. For more information, see “Solids Manager” on page 345.
Art Manager—If your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Art, the Art tab
displays a history tree—a hierarchical representation of the Art base surface and
surface operation elements that make up your Art model. It lists all Art base surfaces
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 15
in the Art model and, for each Art base surface, lists all Art operations and their
current status (clean, dirty, deleted). 1
TIPS:
• Select Help in the Operations Manager drop-down menu to access Help
specific to the active tab (Toolpath Manager, Solids Manager, or Art
Manager).
• Use standard Windows methods to resize the Operations Manager pane,
the graphics window, or the entire Mastercam window, as necessary.
Note: When the mouse is over the Operations Manager, the Operations Manager
becomes active. Moving the mouse to the graphics window activates that
window and de-activates the Operations Manager.
You can also undock the Operations Manager, “float” (move) it around on your screen,
place it wherever you want to, and re-size it. To re-locate the Operations Manager,
click its title bar, drag it to the location you want, and drop it.
Relocating the Operations Manager is especially useful if you are working with a dual-
monitor setup. Move the Operations Manager to the second monitor. This
configuration leaves the entire graphics window free for drawing. Enlarge your
Mastercam and Operations Manager windows for greater visibility.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 17
Below is an example of what the Operations Manager looks like when it has been
undocked and re-sized. 1
You can close the Operations Manager by clicking the Close button in the upper right
corner.
- Close button on docked Operations Manager
- Close button on undocked Operations Manager
You can do this by clicking the Options button (shown to the left) and using the
Options drop-down menu as shown below:
Choose Background color to open the Windows Color dialog box where you can
select a color as your new Operations Manager background color.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 19
Choose Line color to open the Windows Color dialog box where you can select a
different color for the branch lines in the tree hierarchy. 1
Choose Font to open the Windows Font dialog box where you can change the font, its
size, color, and style of the text in the Operations Manager.
Select Restore Default Attributes from the drop-down menu to restore the
Operations Manager to its default display.
20 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Toolbars
Toolbars are collections of functions represented by icons. Drop-down arrows in the
toolbar expand a list submenu of functions you can choose from.
Choose a function in the toolbar by clicking it. Mastercam provides a set of default
toolbars to help you get started, but you can customize them to meet your unique
needs. In the Settings, Customize function, you can choose to show, hide, or redefine
toolbars, create completely new ones, and define a personalized right-mouse button
menu that contains the functions you use most often. For more information, see
“Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences” on page 836.
Interactive Prompts
Some functions use interactive prompts. Prompts appear as small text boxes in the
graphics window after you select a function. They guide you through the necessary
actions required to complete the function.
For example, the following prompt appears when you choose
the Endpoint function from the Create, Line menu:
After you select an endpoint in the graphics window, the first
prompt is replaced with another instruction:
In this example, as you create additional lines, the prompts continue to appear in
succession until you choose to exit the function.
TIPS:
• Drag a prompt to any position in the Mastercam window. Subsequent
prompts appear in the new position.
• Change the size of the interactive prompt by scaling it up or down. To do
this, position the cursor in the prompt, right–click, and choose Small,
Medium, or Large.
• Change the color of the prompt’s text or background. Choose Text color or
Background color from the prompt’s right–click menu. Then select a new
color from the Colors dialog box.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 21
Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes appear when you must enter information to complete a selected
1
function. Many dialog boxes allow you to interact with the graphics window. For
example, you can enter values in the dialog box fields by temporarily returning to the
graphics window and selecting a position, entity, or toolpath.
Choose Cancel to exit the dialog box and function without saving
parameters.
Tree Style Dialog Boxes
Most Mastercam toolpath dialog boxes offer a tree style interface made up of three
distinct areas: Tree View, Properties Page, and Quick View Settings.
Figure 1-6: Tree style dialog box
Tree View area Properties page area
Ribbon Bars
Ribbon bars function like dialog boxes but look similar to toolbars. Ribbon bars open
when you activate many Mastercam functions. You use them to create, position, and
modify geometry.
Figure 1-9: Ribbon bar
TIP: When you create geometry with ribbon bars and dialog boxes, you can
edit an entity as long as it remains live. You will learn more about entity states
later in “Phantom, Live, and Fixed Entities” on page 166.
In the Mastercam workspace, a blank Ribbon Bar displays just above the graphics
window to indicate the default ribbon bar position.
When you choose a function that uses a ribbon bar, the function ribbon bar replaces
the blank Ribbon Bar placeholder. You can change the default position, and dock or
undock the ribbon bar. If you undock the blank Ribbon Bar, it is removed from the
Mastercam window until you choose a function that uses a ribbon bar. Then the
ribbon bar displays in the last undocked ribbon bar position.
24 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: Some ribbon bar buttons and fields may be unavailable (appear inactive)
depending on the options you choose.
Click the chevron to display a drop-down list of additional options you can choose.
Note: You can change your screen resolution so that the ribbon bars display all
options. For resolutions less than 1280 pixels in width, use 96 dpi with Normal
sized fonts. See your IT administrator for assistance.
Notes:
• You can dock ribbon bars only in a horizontal position. This differs from
toolbars, which can be docked horizontally or vertically.
• If you undock and then close a ribbon bar (by clicking the x in the upper right
corner), it is removed from the Mastercam window. This does not cause a
problem; it will display the next time it is required by the function.
see “Screen” on page 858.) By default, the modality option in this configuration page
is selected.
Figure 1-10: Settings, Configuration, Screen
When selected, this option allows ribbon bars and most dialog boxes to retain many
of their previous settings, saving you from having to reenter data, or reselect function
buttons, or options in a drop-down list. The settings remain in their “last used” state
for the remainder of the Mastercam session or until you change them.
For example, if you lock down width and height values in the Rectangle ribbon bar,
those values stay locked even after you close and reopen the ribbon bar.
Note: Action buttons such as OK, Apply, Chain, or Select are not modal and are
unaffected by the configuration settings.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 27
Tool Tips
Tool tips display when you hover the mouse over a function icon or a button in a
1
dialog box or ribbon bar. They help you to identify the function or option.
Figure 1-11: Tool tips
Button Ribbon bar icon
Learning Mode
Learning mode is similar to a tool tip, but applies only to ribbon bars. It provides
information on the ribbon bar and its functions, including the default shortcut keys.
When Learning mode is active, it appears when you place the cursor in any ribbon bar
button or field.
Figure 1-12: Learning mode
Right–Click Menus
Mastercam provides a number of right–click menus. For example, in the Toolpath
Manager tab, right–click to access an extensive list of functions and submenus for
working with machine groups, toolpath groups, toolpaths, operations, setup sheets
and more. Here are just a few of the places where you can use right–click menus:
Levels Manager View Manager
Toolpath Manager tab Solids Manager tab
Tool parameters page/tab Art Manager tab
(Mill/Router/Lathe)
Tool Manager Chain Manager
28 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Two special types of right–click menus include the customized right-mouse button
menu (you configure this menu for quick access to your favorite functions when
working in the graphics window), and the data entry shortcut menu, available in many
numeric ribbon bar and dialog box fields.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 29
Shortcut Keys
Mastercam provides special keyboard assignments you use, instead of clicking icons,
1
to access ribbon bar and dialog box options. These are referred to as shortcut keys. For
example, you can use the following shortcut keys when working with the Create Point
Segment ribbon bar function:
[D] - Defines the distance between the points
[N] - Sets number of points
[P] - Applies changes and remains in the function
[O] - OK (fixes live entity and exits function)
You can view shortcut keys using tool tips and by activating Learning mode.
Mastercam Help topics also list all available shortcut keys for a specific function,
ribbon bar, and dialog box.
Another type of shortcut key is associated with every Mastercam function that
appears in a menu or toolbar. You use this type of shortcut to choose a function,
instead of using the mouse to select it from the menu or toolbar. Typically, function
shortcuts are associated with function keys [F1-F12], or combinations of [Shift], [Ctrl],
or [Alt] keys and another alphanumeric character.
Mastercam’s Calculator
Fields that take number values have a built-in calculator; you can enter simple
formulas directly in the field. For example, type 9/32 in a field and Mastercam
displays the value 0.28125.
By default, fields in which the calculator is active have a yellow background. You can
change this color on the Colors page of the System Configuration dialog box.
With the calculator, you can:
use a full set of arithmetic operators
use parentheses to create more complicated expressions
enter formulas using algebraic notation
specify units of measure, such as degrees or feet
call mathematical functions
30 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The following sections describe the symbols, operators, constants, and functions you
can use with calculable fields.
Units default to the current system units (inches or millimeters), but may be
overridden in any field by using unit symbols. The calculator converts the entered
value to the current units.
You can use mathematical expressions in both integer and floating-point fields.
However, if you are in an integer field, Mastercam discards the decimal portion of the
result.
Wherever Mastercam accepts real numbers and formulas, you can enter an angle
value in degrees/minutes/seconds or gradians/radians format.
In FastPoint mode, the entry field accepts integers, fractions, decimal values, and
even formulas. For example, to enter a point position of X6, Y3, Z0.5, you could type
X(2*3)Y(5-2)Z(1/2). For more information, see “Using AutoCursor FastPoint Mode to
Enter Coordinates” on page 81.
The calculator treats a space between values as an addition operator (+). For example,
with Mastercam set to inches, the entry 5 8 3/4 evaluates to 13.75 inches. As another
example, still assuming inches, the entry 1m 5cm 4 evaluates to 45.338583 inches.
Unit Symbols
Use unit symbols to specify a value’s measurement unit. For example, use the symbol
mm to specify millimeters. If a value has no unit symbol, Mastercam uses the current
default units (inches or millimeters, set on the Start/Exit page of the System
Configuration dialog box). Table 1 lists the unit symbols you can use in Mastercam’s
calculable fields.
Notes:
• Always place the unit symbol after the numeral (for example, 45mm).
1
• One or more spaces between the numeral and the unit symbol are optional. For
example, both of these values are acceptable: 25in, 25 in.
• Use parentheses or additional unit symbols to clarify ambiguous values. For
example, suppose Mastercam is set to millimeters. If you want to divide 3mm
by 4cm, the entry 3/4cm is incorrect. (It's evaluated as 3/4 of a cm.) Instead,
write the expression as 3mm/4cm or 3/(4cm).
• To convert an entire expression to a unit type, multiply by the desired unit. For
example, to convert the expression
(22/7)*2.5^2 to centimeters, type ((22/7)*2.5^2)*1cm. (Note the parentheses
around the original expression.)
Arithmetic Operators
Mastercam’s calculator supports a full set of arithmetic operators, as listed in Table 2.
Constants
The calculator also defines a set of constants (pre-defined values) that you can use
when typing field entries. Table 3 lists these constants.
Table 3: Constants
Constant Description
#pi pi
#e e
#RadToDeg radians to degrees
#DegToRad degrees to radians
32 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: Constants are case-insensitive. For example, the entries #pi, #Pi, and #PI
are equivalent
Math Functions
You can use a large set of mathematical functions in your calculations. Please refer to
Table 4 for a complete list.
Function Interruption
Mastercam’s Interrupt mode allows you to pause a function, execute a
secondary function, and then continue the original function where it was
interrupted.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 33
AutoCursor
The AutoCursor ribbon bar works in conjunction with the cursor to eliminate steps
and to simplify selecting and entering points in complicated and congested geometry.
AutoCursor is active whenever Mastercam prompts you to select a position in the
graphics window. You use the AutoCursor ribbon bar to:
Track cursor position
Manually enter X, Y, and Z coordinates
Detect and snap to points in the graphics window when moving the cursor
over geometry
Figure 1-14: AutoCursor ribbon bar
When a position is detected, AutoCursor displays a visual cue to the right of the cursor
to identify the type of position. Endpoints and midpoints of curves, lines, arc center
points, and point entities are all detected and highlighted by AutoCursor. In addition,
AutoCursor can snap to angle, nearest, tangent, perpendicular, horizontal, and
vertical conditions.
34 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
For more information, see “Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar” on page 78.
The General Selection ribbon bar has a Standard Selection mode and a Solids Selection
mode. The default mode is Standard Selection. If you initiate a Mastercam function
that might apply to wireframe or solid entities, you can use options to switch between
selection modes.
For more information, see “Selecting Entities” on page 88.
Chaining
Chaining is special selection mode you use to link pieces of geometry so that they
form the foundation of a surface, solid, or toolpath. When you chain geometry, you
select one or more sets of curves (lines, arcs, and splines) that have adjoining
endpoints.
Chaining differs from other selection methods because it associates order and
direction to the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect the way
Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.
Mastercam provides several chaining methods in the Chaining dialog box, which
opens whenever a function requires you to chain entities. As you chain geometry, the
entities appear highlighted in the same color as selected entities. For more
information, see “Toolpath Chaining” on page 386.
Sketcher
Sketcher is the suite of Mastercam X functions you use to create basic geometry
dynamically by moving the mouse and clicking in the graphics window. Basic
geometry includes:
points lines
arcs chamfers
fillets solids
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 35
To sketch an entity, choose an entity type from the Sketcher toolbar list or from the
Create menu, set its ribbon bar or dialog box options, and then sketch the entity in
the graphics window. For many types of geometry, you also use the AutoCursor to
create and edit entity properties. For more information on using Sketcher functions,
see “Creating Geometry” on page 164.
Toolpaths
In Mastercam, a toolpath represents the tool data and movements used to remove
material from stock. The toolpath contains a set of rules that define the types of
chained geometry and parameters allowed, as well as how they are applied to an
operation. Each operation conforms to the rules of a specific toolpath.
A toolpath typically contains one or more sets of chains. Each toolpath you create
displays as an operation in a machine group that you can view and edit from the
Toolpath Manager tab.
To create a toolpath, you select a machine type, choose a function from the Toolpaths
menu or toolbar, and chain one or more pieces of the part’s geometry or select points,
surfaces, or solids. You then select the tool and enter other toolpath parameters.
36 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
When you accept the parameters, Mastercam generates the toolpath operation,
which appears in the Toolpath Manager tab.
TIP: You can create different toolpath groups to organize and manage
operations.
Control definition—Stored in a .CONTROL file. Controls for all products and machine
types use the same file extension. Each .CONTROL file can store several control
definitions, so that the .CONTROL file can be shared by multiple machines and
1
can access multiple post processors. Think of a .CONTROL file as a library of
control definitions. It works the same way as tool libraries, which store sets of tool
definitions so that individual tools can be accessed by different machines. If you
have multiple machines and post processors to support, you can use .CONTROL
files to determine which posts can be used with which machines.
Post processor—Stored in a .PST file. (Encrypted posts are stored in a .PSB file.)
Each control definition is linked to a specific post processor.
In Mastercam X, the .PST file also stores the post text and miscellaneous
values, so that the .TXT file used in earlier versions of Mastercam is no longer
used.
Note: For more information on using, selecting, and editing machine and
control definitions, see “Choosing a Machine Definition” on page 360 and
“Machine and Control Definitions” on page 729 and “Power User Tips” on
page 465.
Note: Although you use different tool managers to define mill/router and lathe
tools, they are stored in a single tool library.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 39
Material Libraries
Material definitions are stored in libraries, just like tool definitions. When you select a
1
material, Mastercam copies the definition to your part file. Material definition files
have a .MATERIALS extension and consist of base feed rates and tables of adjustments
for different operation types and tool types. When you select a material and a tool for
an operation, Mastercam uses the information in the material definition to help
calculate proper default feed rates and spindle speeds for the selected operation and
tool.
Mastercam Menus
In addition to using customizable toolbars and right–click menus, you can access
most Mastercam functions through a series of standard, drop-down menus and
submenus located across the top of the Mastercam window. Primary menus include:
File Menu
Use File menu functions to open, edit, print, save, track, and compare files.
Mastercam provides seamless integration with most popular CAD/CAM file formats.
Converting files from and to non-Mastercam formats occurs automatically when you
open and save files in Mastercam. When saving files, you can save all or only some of
the entities to a specified format, and include descriptive text and a thumbnail image
of the geometry with the file data.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 41
You can also import and export files to and from specified directories, and merge data
into the current file from a pattern file (for example, a nut or bolt you use repeatedly
in Mastercam files).
1
The Tracking function notifies you when a newer version of a file is available. You can
set several options to control the way Mastercam locates new files. You can also
specify when Mastercam looks for newer part-file versions.
The Change Recognition feature compares older and newer versions of a part file.
During the comparison, you can view geometry differences in various ways, as well as
update toolpaths that are affected by changes.
Edit Menu
This menu provides access to functions you use to edit geometry, such as the Join
entities, Modify Spline, Convert NURBS, and Simplify functions, and the Trim/Break
submenu functions. Other Edit menu functions allow you to cut, copy, paste, delete,
or select all entities in the graphics window.
Use the Undo and Redo functions to reverse or repeat one or more sequential events
that occur as you work with a file. (An event is a single function-based operation such
as create line or transform entities.)
42 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You can also use the Set Normal and Change Normal functions to set the direction of
multiple surface normals relative to the current construction plane.
View Menu
The View menu helps you manage the appearance and orientation of the Mastercam
graphics window.
The Viewports submenu lets you choose a particular arrangement of one or more (up
to four) viewports. Viewports are partitioned areas of the graphics window where you
can assign different views.
Use other View menu functions to show or hide the Operations Manager pane, and
otherwise modify the graphics window appearance by fitting, repainting, panning, or
zooming.
From the Orient submenu, you can change views, dynamically rotate the current
view, or flip coordinates to reorient the graphics window view.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 43
Analyze Menu
Use Analyze menu functions to view and edit entity properties.
1
Some analyze functions provide a report function that lets you save the information
to a file.
You can also use analyze functions to modify the color, line style and width, or point
style attributes of a single entity, or apply the same attributes to all the entities you
select in the graphics window.
44 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Create Menu
This extensive menu includes all Sketcher (Create Geometry), Curve, Surfaces, and
Drafting functions.
Use these functions to create points, lines, arcs, splines, curves, fillets, chamfers,
surfaces, drafting entities, and basic geometry, including rectangles, rectangular
shapes, polygons, ellipses, spirals, and helixes.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 45
From the Primitives submenu, you can create a cylinder, cone, block, sphere, or torus
surface. If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, you can also create solid
primitive shapes.
1
Additional functions allow you to create letters, define a bounding box, and convert a
solid to a 2D profile.
Solids Menu
Functions in this menu are available only if your Mastercam installation includes
Mastercam Solids.
perform Boolean functions (add solids together, remove solids from one another, and
find common solid volumes), draft solid faces, and trim solids to a plane or surface.
Xform Menu
Use Xform (transform) functions to move or copy selected entities by mirroring,
rotating, scaling, offsetting, translating, stretching, and rolling them.
With some functions, you can join the copied entities to the originals. When you
perform a transform function, Mastercam creates a temporary group from the
original entities and a result from the transformed entities.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 47
The machine type you choose modifies the Mastercam interface so that only the
toolpath options and limits supported by the machine, control and post processor are
available. This prevents Mastercam from creating tool motion that cannot be
executed by the machine.
In a Mastercam part file, the machine definition is part of the machine group
properties you view and modify in the Toolpath Manager. As soon as you select a
machine type, only the toolpaths available for the selected machine type are enabled
in the Toolpaths menu.
48 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Toolpaths Menu
Functions in this menu allow you to create and edit the toolpaths required to cut the
part using the specified machine definition. Toolpath functions appear in this menu
only after you select a machine definition from the Machine Type menu, or choose a
machine group from the Toolpath Manager. These functions vary based on the
machine type associated with the active machine group (Mill, Lathe, Router, or Wire).
Here is an example of the Mill toolpaths menu:
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 49
When you create a toolpath, an operation is automatically created and appears in the
Toolpath Manager under the active machine group. 1
Note: The machine group you are working with appears highlighted in the
Toolpath Manager, indicating that it is active.
Screen Menu
This menu is where you specify default settings and manage the display of geometry
in the graphics window. The Clear Colors option lets you remove the group color (red)
and result color (purple) that occur after performing a transform function (Xform).
You can set system attributes, and activate, deactivate, or customize the appearance
of the selection grid, which is a matrix of reference points that the cursor snaps to
when you sketch a point.
You use other Screen menu functions to temporarily remove and restore selected
entities, repaint, regenerate, or copy images in the graphics window, and combine all
parallel views into a single view.
50 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Art Menu
The Art menu displays only if your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Art.
For more information on using Mastercam Art functions, refer to the online Help, or
contact your local Mastercam Reseller.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 51
Settings Menu
Use the Settings menu functions to set up Mastercam to your specifications.
1
You can define, save, or load the default values and preferences (Configuration) you
want to work with. Other functions allow you to create customized toolbar
configurations and states, drop-down menus, function key mappings, and a
customized right-mouse button menu. The configuration and customization
parameters you define can be saved to named files that you load when you need
them, even on other Mastercam workstations provided they have the same
Mastercam version installed.
From this menu, you can also run third-party applications, VB scripts, and create,
edit, or run Mastercam macros. Ram Saver lets you optimize your PC’s RAM
management when running Mastercam. You can use the Machine Definition
Manager and the Control Definition Manager functions to set up or modify machine
and control definitions. Finally, you can manipulate viewsheets from the Settings
menu.
Notes:
• Although you can create multiple configuration.CONFIG files, toolbars and
states (.MTB), and key map (.KMP) files, each containing different values, you
can load only one of each file type at a time. For more information on
52 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Help Menu
This menu provides access to a variety of information about Mastercam.
Note: For more information on getting help with Mastercam, see “Mastercam
Support and Services” on page 10.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Role of Machine and Control Definitions • 53
the flexibility to use the same post with several machine definitions, or you can
configure several posts for the same machine.
Machine definitions, control definitions, and post processors are all stored in separate
files. When you create a machine definition, you select the control definition and post
processor to use with the machine.
Figure 1-17: Example: Machine Definition Manager
Highlighted buttons are used only for simulation and event-driven programming functions
New Edit general machine parameters
Open Edit the control definition
Save Edit axis combinations
Save as Set password protection
File containing
Unused control definition
component
groups
Post processor
Component tree
Component
library
When you use the Machine Definition Manager to create and save machine
definitions, Mastercam assigns one of the following file extensions, based in the
selected machine type:
TIP: Use one of the following methods to access the Machine Definition
Manager:
1
• From the Mastercam menu, choose Settings, Machine Definition Manager.
• From the Toolpath Manager, expand the Machine Group and choose
Properties, Files. Then click Edit in the Machine - Toolpath copy section.
When you select a machine definition and create a machine group, Mastercam loads a
copy of the machine and control definition in your part file and saves it with your
part. This is referred to as the local copy. This lets you work on the part even if you
move the file to another workstation that does not have that machine or control
definition. You can also make job-specific changes to the machine or control
definition settings without affecting the master copy stored on your workstation’s
hard drive. The machine group also stores a copy of all the tools that you use in that
group’s operations.
IMPORTANT: Mastercam does NOT store a copy of the post processor with
your part file, only the machine and control definition.
Toolpath Defaults
Mastercam stores the toolpath defaults in separate files. These have a.DEFAULTS
extension. You have separate .DEFAULTS files for inch and metric operations. Each
control definition points to a set of .DEFAULTS files—one each for inch and metric
values. When you select the machine definition, Mastercam automatically loads the
.DEFAULTS file specified in its control definition.
If you wish, you can select a different .DEFAULTS file in the machine group properties.
This will be used for only new operations created in the machine group. Use the Files
tab from the Machine Group Properties dialog box to select a different file.
To edit a .DEFAULTS file, you can use either the Files tab from the Machine Group
Properties dialog box, or the Operation Defaults page in the Control Definition
Manager. You can also use either method to create a new .DEFAULTS file. You can
create as many sets of default values as you like, for machine-specific or application-
specific defaults, and save each set in a separate file.
56 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• The .DEFAULTS file also stores default values for many machine group
properties, such as the default tool numbering method.
• For more information on working with .DEFAULTS files, see “Editing Toolpath
Defaults” on page 409.
Notes:
• If you do not have Mastercam Solids installed, you can still view and machine
an imported solid. However, Mastercam Solids must be installed to modify the
solid or create additional solids.
• For more information on the conversion options available for your Mastercam
configuration, refer to the Mastercam Help or contact your Mastercam Reseller.
To complete the operation, you must select one of the following options:
Units: Uses only the units from the new configuration file. (default)
All settings: Loads all settings from the new configuration file.
Note: You can also use the Current field near the bottom of the System
Configuration dialog box to switch current units.
Saving Files
When you save a Mastercam file to a native .MCX format, you automatically save all
geometry, attributes, levels, views, and planes. Mastercam also saves the toolpath’s
machine definitions, control definitions, stock setup, machine groups, toolpath
groups, and operations data.
You can add descriptive text, such as instructions for working with the file or contact
information, and set a default directory where the file will be saved. You can also
optionally save a bitmap thumbnail image of the geometry.
You will find the settings for these options in the Settings, Configuration, Files
properties page and its AutoSave/Backup subpage.
To change the Mastercam X file version when saving a file, click the Options button in
the Save As dialog box. Mastercam displays the Save as X version dialog box, from
which you can select other versions of Mastercam X.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Opening and Translating Files • 59
TIPS:
• In the Open File dialog box, you can quickly identify the file you want to
work with by viewing its thumbnail image in the Preview pane. You can also
view the file’s text descriptor in the Descriptor pane.
• To reduce the amount of navigation required to save files to new file names,
choose directory paths from the Recent Folders drop-down menu in the
Save as dialog box.
• To save only selected entities, use the File, Save Some function. When you
choose this function, use general selection methods—including masking—
to select only the entities to save from the current file, and then save the
entities to a new file.
• Use the Project Manager to select the file types you want Mastercam to
save in a common project folder. The project folder is the location of the
project’s MCX file. For more information on using Project Manager, see
“Project Manager” on page 61.
Text: Displays file content as plain text in the currently selected editor.
Auto: Displays file content in the application associated with the selected file
type, provided the application is installed on your computer. For example, a
1
file with a .doc extension opens in Microsoft Word.
Text files open using the default editor specified in the Settings, Configuration,
Start/Exit properties page. However, you can choose to open any file in any editor.
To select an editor:
1 Choose File, Edit/Open External.
2 In the Open dialog box, choose Editor.
3 In the Choose File Editor dialog box, use one of the following methods to
select the editor:
Choose an editor from the list and click OK.
Note: All of the editors provided with Mastercam display in the list, along with
the most recently used “Other” editors you have selected.
Or, choose Other from the list and click OK. Then complete the following
steps:
a Use options in the Select an editor dialog box to navigate to the location
of the editor program, such as Microsoft® Excel® or Word®.
b Select the program .EXE file and click Open. This closes the Select an
Editor dialog box and returns you to the Open dialog box.
4 In the Open dialog box, select the file to edit and click OK. The editor you
chose in Step 3 opens in its own window and loads the selected file for
editing.
Project Manager
Use the Project Manager to select the types of files you want to save in a common
project folder. (The project folder is the location of the project’s MCX file.) In addition
to your MCX file, you can choose to store some or all of the following types of files in
your project folder:
Material libraries
Saving these file types along with the part file to a single project folder is a great
organizational tool and can be a real time-saver when you need to move or share
projects.
Figure 1-20: Project Manager dialog box
Using the Project Manager to manage files is optional. When the Project Manager is
inactive, Mastercam uses the default paths specified in the Files tab of the Machine
Group Properties dialog box. (To open this tab, expand the Machine Group in the
Toolpath Manager, and choose Properties, Files.)
To reroute files to the project folder, open the Project Manager, and click Select All in
the File to add to project folder box. When you post the toolpath, Mastercam creates
the resultant files in your project folder, as shown in Figure 1-22.
64 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You can configure Mastercam to use a GDI or OpenGL graphics type. OpenGL is
required to display shaded images in the graphics window and to print them. You can
print wireframe or shaded images based on the current graphics window display
setting. Use the options in the Shading toolbar to change to wireframe or shaded prior
to choosing the Print or Print Preview function from the File menu.
TIPS:
• Use the Settings, Configuration function Screen properties page to choose
a graphics support type, and the Printing and Shading properties pages to
configure additional settings. For more information, see “Setting
Configuration Defaults and Preferences” on page 836.
• If you choose the Print Preview function directly from the File menu, the
values for your PC’s default printer driver are used.
2 In the Print dialog box, set paper orientation, margins, shading, scaling, line
width and other options, as necessary.
3 To view and modify the driver’s default properties in the Print Setup dialog
box, choose the Property button. Depending on the printer driver type, use
options in the Print Setup dialog box or the driver’s Properties dialog box to
also enter the number of copies to print.
4 To reposition the center point of the image, click in the Preview area where
you want to set the new centering position. The crosshairs that display
indicate the new position. When you choose Print Preview or click OK, the
position marked by the crosshairs becomes the center of the printed output.
5 To view a sample of the printed output, choose the Print Preview button. You
can print directly from the Print Preview dialog box, or close it and return to
the Print dialog box.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / File Tracking • 67
6 To map color to specific line widths, choose the Color/Width map option
and button. Then use options in the Linewidth Attributes dialog box. 1
Click OK to apply your changes and return to the Print dialog box.
7 In the Print dialog box, click OK to print or plot the entities.
File Tracking
Turn on file tracking to be notified of newer file versions. Using the File tracking dialog
box, you can specify the files that Mastercam tracks, as well as customize how
Mastercam searches for newer files. To start file tracking, select a command from the
File, Tracking submenu. The following list shows the available commands:
Check Current File
Check All Tracked Files
Tracking Options
68 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Use the File Tracking Options dialog box to specify how Mastercam locates newer
files, as described in the following list:
Search subfolders searches the current folder and any folders inside the
current folder.
File name must be exact match searches only for files that have the same
file name (not including the file extension). If this option is off, Mastercam
searches for files that begin with the same file name. For example, if Part.mcx
is the currently tracked file, Mastercam looks for files with names like
Part_new.mcx and Part_revised.sld.
File extension must be exact match searches only for files with the same file
extension.
Don’t ask again prevents the File Tracking Options dialog box from
appearing again during the current session.
If Mastercam finds a newer file, it asks if you want to run change recognition. Choose
Yes to display the Change Recognition dialog box, from which you can view and
update geometry and operations. (See “Change Recognition” on page 71.) Choose No
to return to the currently open file.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / File Tracking • 69
Tracking Options
To specify tracking options, choose File, Tracking, Tracking Options to display the
File Tracking dialog box.
70 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Use this dialog box to customize how Mastercam searches for newer versions of
tracked files. Also use this dialog box to set up multiple file tracking, as described here.
Tracking toggles the tracking function. When this option is off, Mastercam
ignores all tracking options.
Check now checks for new versions of the files in the file list.
1
Additional folders lets you specify folders for file tracking to search. To
specify a search folder, right-click the Additional Folders box, and choose
Add from the pop-up menu.
File name must be exact match searches only for files that have the same
file name (not including the file extension). If this option is off, Mastercam
searches for any files that begin with the same file name. For example, if
Part.mcx is the currently tracked file, Mastercam looks for files with names
like Part_new.mcx and Part_revised.sld.
File extension must be exact match searches only for files with the same file
extension.
Automatic tracking tells Mastercam to automatically add files to the
tracking list when files are opened.
Check current file at File-Open tells Mastercam to check for a newer version
of the current file as soon as the file is opened.
Check all files at Startup tells Mastercam to check for new versions of files
in the list when Mastercam starts.
Check all files at File-New tells Mastercam to check files when you choose
File, New.
Change Recognition
The change recognition function examines two files and reports on their differences
in various ways. To start this function, select File, Change Recognition, and then
specify the file you want to compare against. Mastercam then compares the currently
loaded file (called the original file) with the specified file (called the incoming file),
and displays the Change Recognition dialog box. From this dialog box, you can view
differences, as well as update toolpaths.
Use this dialog box to compare the geometry of the original and incoming files. You
can display geometry in various ways:
Features of the original file
Features of the incoming file
Features the two files have in common
Features unique to the original file
Features unique to the incoming file
Both files combined
Use the Override geometry colors option to select colors for the original and
incoming geometry. When this option is off, Mastercam displays the files in the
geometry’s original colors.
Use the Select geometry to mark as being in both Original file and
Incoming files button to specify features to merge into the incoming file. Your
original file, for example, may contain geometry that is used only to specify
special curves like containment boundaries. Such geometry assists with the
generation of toolpaths, but does not necessarily represent physical features of the
part. This construction geometry rarely appears in the incoming file. So, to force
change recognition to preserve this geometry and not mark it as changed, use the
Select geometry to mark as being in both Original file and Incoming files function
to add the geometry to the incoming file.
Before change recognition can identify new features in a file, the original and
incoming geometry must be in the same position. To this end, the Re-orient
incoming file feature lets you transform your geometry in various ways,
including translation, mirroring, scaling, and rotation.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Change Recognition • 73
Use this dialog box to view and manipulate changes between the original file and the
incoming file. The following controls let you view and manipulate geometry and
operations:
The operation drop-down menu contains a list of operations for the part.
Select the operation to analyze or update.
The icon to the left of the drop-down menu shows the status of the current
operation. The status can be up-to-date, affected, or dirty, as described in
Table 5 on page 74.
The text box below the operation drop-down menu displays the tool used in
the operation.
toolpaths, change recognition ignores them. That is, change recognition identifies
only changed geometry in the incoming file and how those changes affect operations
in the original file.
1
Suppose you have a part named Part01.mcx, shown with its toolpaths in the following
figure:
Figure 1-27: The Part01.mcx file
Now, a new version of the part, named Part01_Revised.mcx, comes into your shop.
The new version adds four bosses, which look like this:
Figure 1-28: The Rect02.mcx part file
To compare the two part versions, load the original file (the older one) using File,
Open from Mastercam's menu. Then, load the incoming file (the newer one) by
76 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
This operation's toolpath (from the original file) is red to show that it is affected by the
geometry changes.
To update the operation, click Edit geometry in the Change Recognition dialog
box. In this example, the Chain Manager dialog box displays, from which you
can rechain the toolpath. Then you can click the Regenerate button to update
the operation.
The chain recognition function features many options that control how you
can view and modify geometry and toolpaths. For more details about the many
controls in the Change Recognition dialog box, please refer to the Field definitions
tab of the Change Recognition dialog box help topic.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Change Recognition • 77
1
chapter 2
Drawing and Design Basics
This chapter introduces the concepts, functions, and techniques that you use to
create geometry. Drawing in Mastercam is freeform and dynamic with controls that
allow you to be mathematically precise. The cursor and mouse are your drawing tools,
and the Create and Xform menu functions are your primary drawing aids. Mastercam
Design also provides many other CAD functions to make your job easier.
With Mastercam Design, you can create wireframe, surface, and primitive surface
geometry. If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, you also have extensive
tools for creating solid models.
Note: For more information on working with Mastercam Solids, see “Solids” on
page 313.
2
The AutoCursor ribbon bar is dockable. You can leave it docked in the toolbar area or
drag it to another position. When docked, it remains visible even when inactive. When
undocked from the toolbar area and positioned elsewhere in the Mastercam window,
it automatically closes when it is not needed (inactive). When activated by your
selections, it reappears where you last placed it.
When you move the cursor over geometry on the screen, you can configure
AutoCursor to display a visual cue when it detects a specific position type (for
example, origin, arc center, endpoint, or midpoint).
Visual Cues
Visual cues are graphic symbols that appear to the right of the cursor. They identify
the type of position AutoCursor has highlighted to ensure that you select the correct
entity and position. For example, if you set AutoCursor to detect and snap to the
endpoints of existing entities, as soon as you move the cursor close to an endpoint, it
snaps to that position and the visual cue for endpoints appears.
Mastercam visual cues include:
Perpendicular Tangent
You can limit the types of positions AutoCursor detects. For more information, see
“Customizing AutoCursor Behavior” on page 82.
In complex geometry, there may be more than one position located within the
detection range of the cursor. In these cases, AutoCursor uses the order shown below
to detect and snap to positions.
1 Point entities
5 Centers of arcs
AutoCursor settings
AutoCursor override
You can even enter inch values (example, 3in) or metric values (124mm). If
necessary, Mastercam’s built-in calculator converts an inch or metric value
to the currently used unit type. For more information on the calculator,
please refer to “Mastercam’s Calculator” on page 29.
Click the drop-down arrow to choose from a list of previously entered values.
Right–click inside the field to access a menu of data entry shortcut options
you can use to define the coordinate value.
2
Use FastPoint Mode.
Click in the graphics window to select a position.
Press [Shift+Click] to create a new position relative to an existing entity. For
more information, see “Using the Relative Position Ribbon Bar” on page 167.
To enter coordinates:
1 Type the values separated by commas–for example, 2,2,5.
2 Press [Enter] to apply the value or [Esc] to cancel.
You can enter fractions or decimal values (example, 3/8 or .375). The FastPoint field
also accepts formulas, including addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*),
division (/), and parentheses.
82 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
In FastPoint mode, you can convert numbers to the base unit of measure defined in
your current Mastercam configuration. When entering values to convert, type the
number immediately followed by its unit of measure, such as in or mm. If you have
configured Mastercam to work in inches, you can type in a metric value in FastPoint
mode (for example, 27mm) and Mastercam converts it from millimeters to the correct
length in inches. You can use this conversion function for most numeric data entry
fields located in Mastercam dialog boxes and ribbon bars.
TIP: Use algebraic notation when entering formulas. For example, for a
position of X6, Y3, Z0.5 enter X(2*3)Y(5-2)Z(1/2), or 6,3,.5. The Fastpoint entry
method is consistent with prior versions of Mastercam.
Note: FastPoint mode is modal; when you activate it, you cannot move outside
of the field into any part of the application, including other AutoCursor buttons,
until you press [Enter] or [Esc].
TIP: When AutoCursor is active, you can temporarily deactivate its snap-to
settings by holding down the [Ctrl] key as you click to select a position.
AutoCursor configuration
2 In the AutoCursor Settings dialog box, select the position types to detect and
2
snap to.
Figure 2-5: AutoCursor Settings dialog box
Note: If the position type is not selected, AutoCursor does not detect it.
TIP: Remember to clear AutoCursor settings when they are no longer needed.
If you forget that you have customized AutoCursor behavior, you can
experience unexpected results when working with other Mastercam functions.
AutoCursor override
From the list, select the position type you want AutoCursor to snap to (applies only to
the current selection). This feature is particularly useful when the geometry is
crowded or confusing and you need help identifying a specific entity and position
type.
example, to force AutoCursor to detect only arc center points, position the cursor in
the graphics window and press the Arc Center power key [C].
AutoCursor power keys include:
[O] - Origin [C] -Arc Center
[E] - Endpoint [I] - Intersection
[M] - Midpoint [Q] - Quadrant
[P] - Point
TIPS:
• When you hover the mouse over an AutoCursor override that can be
locked, the mouse pointer changes to indicate that you can right–click to
select it.
You can enter relative position values using one of the following methods.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar • 87
2
entity will be relative.
2 In the Delta field, type the rectangular or polar XYZ coordinates to position
the new endpoint from the selected position.
3 Click OK to accept the entered coordinates and exit the Relative Position
ribbon bar.
IMPORTANT: When you select a closed arc (circle) in Along mode, the
endpoint is always the zero degree quadrant position. If you click the circle
anywhere in the bottom half, the along distance from the zero position is
calculated in a clockwise direction. If you click the circle anywhere in the top
half, the along distance is calculated in a counter clockwise direction.
88 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Selecting Entities
When creating geometry, you can use several selection methods to select positions
and other entities in the graphics window, including:
Clicking with the left mouse button to choose one or more entities, usually at
the prompting of a function.
Choosing General Selection ribbon bar options.
Note: For more information on Solid selection techniques, see “Selecting Solids”
on page 317.
If there are no solids in your file, the Solid Selection mode is not available; you can use
only Standard Selection options.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Selecting Entities • 89
2
Masking Entity selection Select last entity
(or entities)
Selection method list
Verify selection toggle
Cancel current selection
TIP: To switch from any selection method to Window, hold down the [Ctrl] key
and select the first window position in the graphics window.
From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose one of the following Selection
methods to lock the method in place and disable the others.
Chain: Select/chain entities that are connected to other entities. For
example, clicking one side of a rectangle selects all four sides, and clicking
one line that is connected to another selects both lines.
Window: Select entities by drawing a window around them.
Vector: Select multiple entities by drawing a vector line through them. All
entities the vector intersects are selected.
Note: The Window and Polygon selection methods are limited by the current
entity selection setting. You will learn more about this in “Entity Selection
Settings” on page 92.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Selecting Entities • 91
Note: All selection methods, including the Solids selection methods, can be
added to toolbars and your graphics window right–click menu using Settings,
Customize.
When you choose a selection method from the drop-down list, it remains set until you
perform one of the following actions: 2
Click the Standard Selection button in the General Selection ribbon
bar to reset it to the Window method.
Choose another method from the list.
Hold down the [Shift] or [Alt] keys to override the default (see Tips below for
override details.)
Once you have chosen a selection method, you can return to the standard selection
method by clicking the Standard Selection button.
To finalize multiple-entity selections, press [Enter], or click the End Selection button
in the ribbon bar.
Note, however, that you can end a series of selections by double-clicking the last
entity of the selection. For example, to select three lines using the single selection
method, click the first two lines. Then double-click the third line to end the selection
process. (The double-click method does not work with Polygon and Vector selections,
which use a double-click to complete the polygon or vector.)
To reselect the entity (or entities) selected for the previous operation, click the Select
last button.
TIPS:
• In Standard selection mode, hold down the [Alt] key to switch from Window
to Vector selection.
• To override any selection method and toggle between the Chain and Area
selection methods, hold down the [Shift] key when selecting an entity or a
position. If you place the cursor on an entity while holding down the [Shift]
key, the Chain method is active; otherwise, the Area method is active.
92 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Masking
A selection mask is a defined set of criteria used to quickly select entities in the
graphics window. Using a selection mask with a complex part file ensures that you
select only and all of the specific entities you want.
When working with selection masks, you can:
Define a selection mask to use once and discard (default).
Make the selection mask active until you turn it off or exit the Mastercam
session.
Save the selection mask criteria to a file (.MASK) that you can later open and
reuse.
Open an existing selection mask file and apply it.
Use left– and right–click Quick Masks to select all or only specific entity type.
(You will learn more about this later in “Quick Masks” on page 94.)
To use a mask for selection, click the All or Only buttons in the General Selection
ribbon bar.
Choosing All opens the Select All dialog box. Use this dialog box to define
and apply a mask that automatically selects all entities in the current file that
match the mask criteria. You can choose to apply the criteria and select all
entities, or only entities in a specified group, including groups created by
Xform (transform) functions.
Choosing Only opens the Select Only dialog box. Use this dialog box to set
restrictions on the entities that are available for selection in the graphics
window. When you apply the Only mask, you use other General Selection
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Selecting Entities • 93
methods to select only those entities that match the mask criteria you define.
Until you clear the mask, you are restricted from selecting entities that are
excluded by the mask.
Figure 2-9: Masking Select All/Select Only dialog boxes
2
Option buttons
Criteria type
check boxes
and buttons
Criteria options
to Select Entity,
Select All, or
Clear All
Criteria list
Additional
masking
parameters
In the Select All or Select Only (Masking) dialog box, choose mask criteria or open an
existing mask file to select entities in the graphics window. Selection criteria can
include any combination of entity types, colors, levels, line styles, line width, point
94 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
styles, arc diameters, line lengths, or Z depths that match the values and filters that
you define in these dialog boxes.
Quick Masks
Mastercam's Quick Masks are time-saving functions that allow you to select
entities by type with a single mouse click, without having to choose All or
Only mask functions and work with their dialog boxes.
Figure 2-10: Quick Masks toolbar (horizontal or vertical orien-
tation)
By default, the Quick Masks toolbar is docked vertically as shown to the right.
It is positioned directly below the MRU (most recently used) toolbar along the
rightmost edge of the Mastercam window.
Quick Masks (QM) functions support different right–click and left–click
actions.
Left–click a Quick Mask function to toggle the selection of all
matching entities either on or off.
Right–click a Quick Mask function to toggle the mask in the Select
Only dialog box’s criteria list. (You can manually select only entities
that meet the mask criteria.)
For example, suppose you have a rectangle that comprises four lines.
To select all entities of a specific type and color in the current part file
1 From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose All.
2 In the Select All dialog box, choose the Entities check box.
3 In the Entities criteria list, select one or more entity types to include.
4 To set the Colors criteria, choose the Colors button.
5 Select the check box next to the color of the entities to include.
6 Click OK to apply the mask and exit the dialog box.
7 All entities of the specified type and color are selected in the graphics
window. Continue with the current function, if applicable, or choose a
function to perform on the selected entities.
TIP: If you are creating a mask using multiple criteria, to quickly apply the
mask and exit the dialog box, hold down the Ctrl key and double–click when
selecting the last criteria item.
3 In the Entities criteria list, double–click the Lines check box (under
Wireframe) to immediately apply the mask and exit the dialog box.
4 In the graphics window, select the lines you want to work with. Until you
clear the mask, you cannot select any other entity type.
5 Use one of the following methods to clear the mask
Complete the selection.
Reopen the Select Only dialog box and clear the selections.
Click the Clear all masking button located on the Quick Mask toolbar.
TIP: Use the “Maintain Only Mask” check box in the Select Only dialog box
to apply a mask until you close the Mastercam session or choose to deselect
the Maintain check box.
you want to select. Click to set the final position. All entities completely
contained within the window are selected.
To select multiple entities using the Vector selection method, hold down the
Alt key, and then click and drag a line through the entities you want to select.
All entities that the line intersects will be selected
To select multiple entities using the Area selection method, hold down the
Shift key and click inside the outermost entity, but outside the inside
2
entities. Make sure that the cursor is not close enough to an entity to
highlight it before you click.
To reselect the entity (or entities) selected for the previous operation, click
the Select last button in the General Selection ribbon bar.
TIP: To improve your view of the selection area when using the Window
selection method, after selecting the first window point, use the Pan, Zoom or
Fit to screen function before selecting the second point.
Note: This selection method does not physically create a chain in the Mastercam
database or otherwise link the entities. It is used only to simplify the selection of
connected entities.
To select a chain of entities, hold down the Shift key to activate Chain
selection and select an entity that is connected to other entities, such as a
line used in a rectangle. All connected entities are automatically selected in a
single chain (in this example, the entire rectangle). Continue to use this
method to select other connected entities as chains.
Alternatively, you can lock in the Chain option from the General Selection
ribbon bar drop-down list then select connected entities.
To select a partial chain of connected entities, activate the Chain selection
method using either method described above and select an entity connected
98 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
to others. Then click again in the location where you want to chain selection
to end. The remainder of the entities in the chain are automatically
unselected.
3
1
Click here to select the set of curves Click here to select all of the curves
marked 1, 2, and 3 (infinite nesting in marked within and including the
area chaining is off). Selected curves outermost boundary (infinite nesting in
are shown in bold. area chaining is on). Selected curves
are shown in bold.
TIP: To enable the selection all of the shapes or chains within a closed
boundary, in the Settings, Configuration, Chaining properties page, you must
selection the option for Infinite nesting in area chains.
Unselecting Entities
Use one of the following methods to cancel or unselect entities.
Click a single entity again to unselect it. Or, if Mastercam is at the root level
(that is, not inside a function), press [Esc].
Choose another selection method. All entities selected in a single action,
such as Window selection, are unselected.
2
Choose the Unselect all option in the General Selection ribbon bar to
clear all selections.
Setting Attributes
All Mastercam entities have basic attributes (physical characteristics). Based on the
entity type, attributes can include:
Color Point style
Line style and width Level
Changing physical attributes when you are working with complex parts is a very
powerful technique you will use often to organize your work. Use the Status bar fields
to quickly and easily select new entity attributes.
Figure 2-12: Status bar
To use an existing entity to set color, line, point, and level attributes:
Press [Alt+X] on the keyboard and select an entity in the graphics window.
The Status bar color, point style, line style, and line width fields are changed
to the selected entity’s attributes.
To set attributes for specific entity types (such as points, lines, arcs, solids,
surface, and drafting dimensions):
1 Click the Attributes button in the Status bar.
2 In the Attributes dialog box, select the EA Mgr (Entity Attributes Manager)
check box, and then click the EA Mgr button.
3 In the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box, select the entity types, and set
the attributes you want to use in the current Mastercam session.
102 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To open the Color palette dialog box and choose a color, double–click the
color sample.
Note: You can also use the EA Mgr to apply attributes to files you convert from
other programs. Select the option to Include entities created when opening
non-Mastercam files.
4 When all entity attributes are set, click OK to accept them and return to the
Attributes dialog box.
IMPORTANT: If you deselect the EA Mgr check box in the Attributes dialog
box, the Entity Attribute Manager dialog box settings are not used.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Attributes • 103
To change the attributes of all of a specific type of entity (such as all points or
splines):
1 In the Status bar, click the Attributes button.
2 In the Attributes dialog box, select the EA Mgr (Entity Attributes Manager)
check box, and then click the EA Mgr button.
3 In the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box, select the entity types and
attributes to use when creating new entities in the current Mastercam
session.
4 To update all of the selected types of entities that exist in the current file and
close the dialog box, click Apply to existing entities.
Note: To continue to use these attributes for new entities, leave the EA Mgr check
box selected in the Attributes dialog box. To use different attributes, deselect the
check box.
104 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: You can also use Analyze functions to modify entity attributes and other
properties. For more information, see “Analyzing Entities” on page 263.
Setting/Changing Color
Mastercam supports a palette of 256 colors, which you can customize. You can reduce
the palette to 16 colors by choosing the 16 Colors button in the Colors dialog box, or
by deselecting the Show 256 colors check box when setting up system configuration
parameters in Settings, Configuration, Colors.
Use one of the following methods to access the Colors dialog box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Screen, Geometry Attributes and select
the colors palette button.
Click the Colors field in the Status bar.
Figure 2-15: Colors dialog box
To select a color:
Type its ID number in the Current color field.
Click the color in the color palette.
Choose the Select button and click an entity in the graphics window with the
color you want to use.
Choose the Customize tab and use the fields to create a custom color.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Attributes • 105
Note: For more information, see “Working with Levels” on page 142.
Setting Z Depth
Use the Z field in the Status bar to set the Z-depth value for the geometry and
toolpaths you create. Set the Z depth using one of the following methods:
Type a value in the field.
Click the drop-down arrow and choose one from the most recently used list.
Click the Z label and select a position in the graphics window to use its Z
depth value.
The following functions always provide 3D solutions, regardless of the Status bar
2D/3D setting:
Fillets and chamfers Surfaces and solids
Convert to NURBS Close Arc
Modify Spline Simplify
Xform: Translate, Translate 3D, Mirror, Rotate, Rectangular Array, Scale
Notes:
• In 3D mode, if you choose to bisect two lines that are not in the same plane or
are not parallel to the current Cplane, a message informs you that a 3D
solution does not exist and asks you to specify the Z depth to use for the 2D
solution.
• When editing entities using the Trim or Break functions, all solutions are
calculated based on the current Cplane setting. If the entities cannot intersect
in the current Cplane through a 2D projection, they cannot be modified using
these functions.
TIP: Overlooking the current Cplane and Z depth is a common source of error,
which can cause you to create the geometry in unintended orientations. To
avoid this mistake, set the graphics view (Gview) to the same setting as the
Cplane or to Isometric.
TIP: Use the mouse wheel or middle button any time—without selecting a
function—to dynamically spin or pan the contents of the graphics window. To
set the spin or pan behavior, use the Settings, Configuration, Screen
properties page and Middle Button/Wheel use field.
Note: If Repaint does not completely restore the graphics window, use the
Screen, Regenerate Display List function to rebuild the display list.
Regenerate screen: Rebuilds the display list at the current screen scale.
Regenerating the display list may also improve display speed and
performance.
Zooming
Mastercam also offers a number of zoom functions, including:
Zoom window: Magnifies a portion of the graphics window. To anchor the
first window point, click an area of the graphics window that is not directly
on an entity. Then draw a rectangular window by moving the mouse
around the entities you want to zoom. Click to set the final position and fill
the graphics window with the contents of the selection window.
108 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: To improve your view of the selection area when using this method,
select the first window point. Then use the Pan, Zoom target, or Fit to screen
function before selecting the second point.
Zoom target: Expands a specific area defined by two selected points. The
first position you select indicates the center of the target area. As you move
the cursor to select the second position, you draw and drag a rectangular
area that defines the target boundary. When you select the second position,
everything in the target area expands to fill the graphics window, centered
around the first point you specified.
Unzoom previous / .5: Restores zoom to its previous setting. If no previous
setting exists for the current Mastercam session, this function reduces the
size of the displayed geometry to 50% of its current size.
Unzoom .8: Reduces the size of the displayed geometry to 80% of its
current size.
To dynamically change the graphics window view (Gview) using mouse and
keyboard methods:
To zoom in and out, spin the mouse wheel forward or backward
(if configured for this action).
In Settings, Configuration, Screen properties, set the middle mouse
button/wheel action to spin or pan. To temporarily change this setting to
the alternate behavior, position the cursor in the graphics window, hold
down the [Alt] key and press down on the middle mouse
button/wheel to grab the contents of the graphics window.
Continue to press down while moving the mouse to either spin or pan.
To move the image around, use the up, down, left, or right keyboard
arrow keys.
To spin the image, hold down the [Alt] key and use the up, down, left, or
right arrow keys.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Changing the Graphics Window Display • 109
Using Viewsheets
Use viewsheets to create different part views, each on its own viewsheet tab. With a
viewsheet you can define a specific view orientation and scale, store modified level
settings, and use a bookmark to define a restorable viewsheet state. By default,
viewsheets are off. To enable viewsheets, choose Settings, Viewsheets, Viewsheets
Enabled from the Mastercam menu. The main viewsheet tab then displays at the
bottom of Mastercam's window, as shown below.
2
To rename a viewsheet:
Select Settings, Viewsheets, Rename from the menu bar, or right-click a
viewsheet tab, and select Rename Viewsheet from the pop-up menu.
To delete a viewsheet:
Select Settings, Viewsheets, Delete from the menu bar, or right-click a
viewsheet tab, and select Delete Viewsheet from the pop-up menu.
Setting Viewports
A viewport is an area within the graphics window that displays a particular graphics
view of the geometry you are working with. A viewport configuration is an
arrangement of one or more (up to four) viewports. By default, Mastercam displays
geometry from the top view in a single viewport that occupies the entire graphics
window.
To divide the graphics window into multiple viewports, or panes, each capable of
displaying a different graphics view, choose an option from the View, Viewports
menu. Mastercam offers four viewport configurations.
The following graphic shows the default views assigned to each viewport
configuration.
TIP: To change the size of the viewport panes, grab and drag the vertical or
horizontal inside edge.
2
Setting Views/Planes/WCS
Mastercam uses a 3D Cartesian coordinate system to locate
your work in three-dimensional space. The positions of +Z
geometry and toolpaths are expressed in terms of three +Y
coordinate axes: X, Y, and Z. Each axis is signed to indicate a
positive (+) and a negative (-) direction.
-X +X
Machining jobs often require you to work with coordinate
locations in sophisticated ways. Mastercam includes -Y -Z
several useful tools you can use to transform, overlay, slice,
and otherwise manipulate the coordinate system so that you can draw and machine a
part any way you choose.
To apply coordinate systems in Mastercam, you use functions to set specific views. A
view consists of two main parts:
A plane, or slice through the coordinate system
An origin, or zero point
You can use views as graphics views (Gviews) to view the part, as construction planes
(Cplanes) to orient geometry, and as tool planes (Tplanes) to orient toolpaths.
Gviews define the perspective from which you view the part in the graphics
window.
Cplanes represent the planes in which you create new geometry.
Tplanes are the cutting planes for the toolpaths you define.
Standard and custom views have assigned names, are saved with the part information
(making them portable), and can be selected as you work with the part to change its
orientation in 3D space.
The Work Coordinate System (WCS) is the active coordinate system in use by
Mastercam at any given time. It contains the orientation of the XYZ axes plus the
location of the zero point (the origin).
112 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: Mastercam saves the most recently used plane, view, and WCS
selections for each machine group, and restores them whenever you activate
the machine group. For example, if one machine group has toolpaths on the
front of the part, and another machine group has toolpaths on the side of the
part, when you activate either machine group, Mastercam automatically
activates the views and planes you were using the last time the group was
active. For more information on machine groups, see “Managing Toolpath
Operations” on page 422.
Manipulating the WCS and setting planes and views to simplify the creation of
geometry, solids, and toolpaths are essential Mastercam skills you will use often.
In this section, you will learn about:
Standard Views (page 112)
Using Gview/Planes/WCS Status Bar Options (page 114)
Using the Dynamic Gnomon (page 118)
Work Coordinate Systems (page 120)
Managing Views (page 123)
Lathe Coordinate Systems (page 135)
Standard Views
Every Mastercam part includes standard views that correspond to the six faces of a
cube (Top, Front, Back, Right, Left, Bottom) plus an Isometric view. Standard views
are available in all Mastercam files. Their names and coordinates cannot be modified.
The Status bar Gview, Planes, and WCS menus provide options you use to select
standard views, create custom views, and set the Gview, Tplane/Cplane, and WCS.
Use options in the Gview menu to orient the graphics view and control the
perspective from which you view the part. You can also use options in the
Mastercam View menu to modify the graphics window display.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Views/Planes/WCS • 113
If you configure the Status bar to include separate Cplane and Tplane fields, these
menus also share many functions.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Views/Planes/WCS • 115
To help you become familiar with using view, planes, and WCS Status bar menu
options, descriptions and tips for each option are provided below, organized by the
their general category.
Standard views: Select Top, Front, Back, Right, Left, Bottom, or Isometric
to quickly set a standard plane. When selecting a standard view from the
Gview or Planes menus, the plane you set is relative to the current WCS. This
is why (WCS) is part of the standard view name in these menus. Standard
planes line up with a cube which has been shifted so that it is parallel to the
WCS axes.
TIP: To reset the Gview or Cplane/Tplane to the default Top system view,
regardless of the WCS setting, select Named, and then choose Top from the
View Selection dialog box.
Named views: Options that include “by Name” or “named views” orient the
selected view or plane with a view you select from the View Selection dialog
box. This dialog box displays all the views that have been created and saved
with the part, including standard and custom views.
116 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: For step-by-step instructions on using the Geometry and Solid face
functions, see “Creating Views from Selected Entities” on page 129.
Rotate: Creates a new view by rotating the current view about any or all of
the axes by a specified number of degrees.
Dynamic: (Gview only) Creates a new view by rotating the view perspective
as you drag the mouse.
Note: For step-by-step instructions on using the Rotate and Dynamic functions,
see “Creating Views by Rotating” on page 130.
Last: Sets the plane equal to whatever it was oriented to before the current
selection.
Normal: Creates a new view using a selected line that is normal to the desired
plane. You must also select the orientation of the coordinate system relative
to the normal line. For step-by-step instructions, see “Creating Views from
Normals” on page 131.
= Gview: Sets the selected plane with the same view as the current Gview.
=Tplane, =Cplane: Aligns the selected plane with the same view as the
current Tplane or Cplane.
= WCS: (Planes only) Sets the Tplane and Cplane equal to the same view as
the current WCS.
Planes Always = WCS: (Planes only) Links the Tplane and Cplane to the
WCS so that if you change the WCS, it will also update the Tplane and
Cplane. Selecting this option disables the other options in the menu.
Origin: Displays the origin of the selected view/plane and, if enabled, allows
you to click and change it. Using this method to change the origin
automatically creates a new view that you can name and save to the view
catalog. You can also use the View Manager to change the origin of an
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Views/Planes/WCS • 117
existing view and update the origin of all planes that are linked to the view,
including the WCS.
Saved as: Indicates whether the new view has been saved and displays its
name.
Name and Save: (Gview only) If the current view has not been saved, use this
option to open the New View dialog box where you can set parameters and
save the custom view. (If the current view has not been saved, Mastercam
2
displays Gview: Not Saved in the graphics window.)
Choose the Status bar configure option [!] and use the right-click menu to
insert separate Cplane and Tplane planes into the Status bar. Then use the
Status bar Cplane and Tplane menu functions to set the planes
independently.
5 Axis Arrowhead—Select to align the gnomon to existing geometry. You can also use
AutoCursor positions to place the gnomon on an entity. You may align the gnomon to:
a line or solid edge
tangent to a spline or arc
normal to a surface or solid face
Note: Use the Gnomon Settings dialog box to modify the gnomon’s behavior. To
2
access this dialog box, click the Settings button on the ribbon bar or dialog box.
Or, hold the [Ctrl] key and right–click anywhere in the graphics window.
Begin creating a plane by locating the origin of the gnomon. Locating the gnomon
creates the origin for the plane. Use AutoCursor positions, enter values in the XYZ
120 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
fields, or sketch a location. Click the Move to button to automatically move the
gnomon origin to the origin type selected in the drop-down list.
Further manipulation of the gnomon is accomplished by selecting the gnomon and
performing the associated function.
Click the Align with button to automatically rotate the gnomon to match the axes
orientation of the type selected in the drop-down list. Use the Flip button, or the [F]
shortcut key, to flip the orientation of the gnomon during rotation or alignment.
Note: From the WCS Status bar menu, choose the View Manager option to
access the View Manager dialog box. This dialog box provides a central location
for working with all views that have been created for the part. You can modify
existing views, create new ones, and set the Cplane, Tplane, and the WCS to
selected views.
the Z axis on a horizontal mill. When you create a toolpath and select its tooling, the
machine definition provides the necessary information on axis combinations, turret
and spindle orientations, and how the machine tools are mounted. This information
is available to the post processor.
You can move a part file transparently from a vertical mill to a horizontal mill, or from
one spindle of a lathe to another, without having to manually transform the
coordinate system in the part file.
2
Displaying Coordinate Information
Mastercam integrates several different status indicators into the graphics window so
you can tell at a glance how your work is oriented.
The following information always displays in the lower left corner of the graphics
window.
The picture of the coordinate axes (the gnomon) shows the orientation of the current
Gview.
The lower line displays the name of the views aligned with the Gview, WCS, Cplane,
and Tplane.
Note: The Tplane view information displays only when a machine definition or
machine group is active.
The following picture shows the same display when a machine is active. In this
example, the Tplane and Cplane are set to the same view (the front of the part):
122 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The following picture shows the same display when the Tplane and Cplane are
oriented differently. In this case, both are set to align with different custom views:
Whenever you see Top displayed in this way, whether it is for a Cplane,
Tplane, Gview, or WCS, it is in reference to the standard Top view.
2
Use the View Selection dialog box to select the standard, pre-defined Top
view. You can choose this view without affecting the view used to align the
current WCS. For example, if the WCS is aligned to a custom view but you
want to draw geometry in the default XY plane, from the Status bar, choose
Planes, Named. Then select Top from the View Selection dialog box.
To select the Top plane relative to the WCS, from the Status bar, choose
Planes, Top (WCS). When you look at the status area, instead of Top, the
same view name as the WCS displays, instead of Top, indicating that the top
plane is now parallel to the WCS instead of to the system XY plane.
Managing Views
The View Manager dialog box is a central point where you can select, edit, create and
manage views.
124 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Selection dialog box, select one or more views to import. The selected views
are added to the current file.
Info: Display a report with detailed information about all the views in the
view list.
Using this example, suppose we create a view aligned with this rectangle, with its
origin at the anchor point. If the axes of the new view are parallel to the system axes,
its origin in view coordinates is the same as the original coordinates of the point (as
displayed in the View Manager).
Next, create another view anchored on the same point but with the X and Y axes
flipped. In the View Manager, you will see that the coordinate values for its origin are
126 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
reversed.
Finally, consider what happens if you rotate the rectangle 25 degrees about its edge
closest to the X axis, and create a new view. The anchor point has not moved, but the
axes are aligned, as shown below.
In this example, the X axis orientation is the same as the standard system view, but the
Y and Z axes are rotated. The X coordinate of the origin is X=2, and the Y and Z
coordinates reflect the axis rotation.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Views/Planes/WCS • 127
2
When you do this, you can apply the new origin to the view which is currently
mapped to those functions, or create a new view.
Note: When you change the origin for an existing view, Mastercam
automatically updates the tool origin for any toolpaths created in that view.
These toolpaths will need to be regenerated before they can be posted.
TIPS:
• Deselect the Enable origin check box if the selected view sets only the
orientation of a plane, and you do not want to change the origin.
• Select the Associative check box to maintain a link to geometry in the
graphics window. For example, you might create a view aligned with a face
of your part. If you select the Associative option, Mastercam updates the
view's orientation and origin when the underlying geometry moves.
Deselect this option if you are creating the view from temporary guides or
construction lines that you plan to delete.
4 Click OK to save the changes and exit the function. The origins of any
functions that are currently aligned with the view (such as the Tplane or
Cplane) are immediately updated to reflect the new origin.
2
geometry, or a solid face.
Note: Use general selection methods to select entities in the graphics window. To
select a hidden face, use the Select from back option in the General Selection
ribbon bar (available only in Solids mode).
3 Use the following steps in the Select View dialog box to select the positive
directions for the axes:
a Click the arrows to preview different sets of axis combinations.
b Click OK to accept the displayed axis combination.
4 Use options in the New View dialog box to define the new view.
Mastercam displays default origin coordinates based on the selected
geometry, but you can use the Select button to choose a different
location.
Select the Set new origin check box to align the Cplane, Tplane, and/or
the WCS origins relative to the view origin when applying the view. If
unselected, when you work in the view, its planar orientation is applied to
the WCS, Tplane and Cplane functions, but their origin does not change
in.
To make the view associative with the geometry that you just selected,
select the Associative check box. If selected, when the geometry moves,
the definition and origin of the view are automatically updated.
5 Choose OK to save the view. It is immediately applied to the function that
was active when you started this process. For example, if you started from
the WCS menu, the new view is applied to the WCS.
130 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: You can also select Rotate Graphics View from the Gview Status bar
menu. To name and save the new view you create using this method, you must
choose Save from the Gview Status bar menu and complete the fields in the
New View dialog box, as described.
ribbon bar, drag the mouse around the rotation point to see the axes at every
30 degree position. Press [Enter] to fix the axes in position.
5 Use options in the New View dialog box to name the view, set the origin and
specify other parameters.
6 Choose OK to save the view. It is automatically applied to the function that
was active when you started. For example, if you started from the WCS
menu, the new view is applied to the WCS.
Note: You can also create a normal view from the Gview functions. You can
select Normal from the Gview Status bar menu, or, from the Mastercam menu,
choose View, Orient, Normal View. To name and save the new view you create
using these methods, you must choose Save from the Gview Status bar menu
and complete the fields in the New View dialog box, as described.
General Guidelines
If you are programming moves that the machine can accomplish in one
setup, use a single WCS.
If the application requires you to manually change the part orientation in the
machine, use a different WCS.
For most common milling applications on a 3-axis knee mill or VMC, leave
the WCS aligned to the Top view and use the Top tool plane for your work.
If you have a rotary axis, do the following:
If the fixture rotates continuously while cutting the part, leave the WCS
and Tplane alone, and use the Rotary options from the Toolpath
parameters tab.
If the fixture must rotate to a fixed position before the toolpath starts to
machine a regular 2D or 3D toolpath, set the Tplane to the desired plane
before creating the toolpath.
For 5-axis machines and multiaxis toolpaths, use tool planes to work on the
various faces.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Views/Planes/WCS • 133
2
views accordingly, with respect to the WCS.
To address this situation, create a new view aligned with the part geometry. Choose
WCS from the Status bar, select WCS by Geometry, and select either two lines from
the contour or one of the arcs. When the New View dialog box displays, assign a
name, locate the origin at a suitable point, and, optionally, assign a work offset for the
view. Click OK to save the new view.
Select the new view for the WCS, and then align the Tplane and Cplane to it. Choose
Planes from the Status bar, then Top (WCS). Create a 2D toolpath as usual. When you
post the part, 2D tool motion commands are dimensioned from the part origin, as if
the part is lying flat.
134 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
In this situation, assign a different work offset to each fixture. Then, when you create
the toolpaths for each part, include the offset number in each toolpath. By basing
each toolpath on an offset number instead of a coordinate position, you can run the
job without worrying about how the fixtures are positioned on the table. Before
running the job, the operator needs only to touch off the parts properly to set each
offset position in the control.
To accomplish this in Mastercam, choose View Manager from the WCS Status bar
menu and use the View Manager dialog box to create a new view for each fixture. To
create each view, click on the Top view, and choose Copy. Then type a name for the
new view and enter the offset for the fixture. To define an origin for the view, in the
Origin section, choose Select and pick a point on the fixture as shown in the above
picture.
Before creating operations for each part, choose Named from the Planes Status bar
menu, and select the view you created for the fixture. When you post the operations,
Mastercam automatically outputs the correct offset codes and creates tool positions
relative to the origin specified for each fixture.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Views/Planes/WCS • 135
Mastercam includes a number of functions you use to create lathe parts and toolpaths
for different types of lathes. These tools include machine definitions, Cplanes, and the
WCS. In the following sections you will learn techniques for working with lathe
coordinates.
which the tool is used. The tool can also be rotated about its long axis to a specific
orientation; this allows you to use the same tool on both the main and sub-spindles.
To generate the proper rotational output, rather than change the Tplane as you might
with a mill, enter the tool angle for a lathe toolpath by clicking the Tool Angle button
in the Toolpath parameters tab.
Note: This option is available only if the appropriate rotary axes have been
defined in the active machine definition.
Use the Tool Angle dialog box that displays to enter the angle of the tool. You can enter
the angle directly in the field, or select a line parallel to the Feed Direction or Plunge
Direction by clicking the appropriate button. Then enter the rotation angle of the tool
about its axis. You can select 0 or 180, or choose Other and type the desired angle in
the field.
TIP: You can also store a tool angle in the tool definition. Typically, this is done
to support lathes without a B axis in order to create tools that are at an angle to
the primary axes. For lathes with true B-axis capability, enter a tool angle of 0
in the tool definition so that the tool is parallel to the axis for compatibility with
a tool changer. Then use the Tool Angle button and dialog box to set the
desired tool angle for each operation.
IMPORTANT: The angle entered in the Tool Angle dialog box is measured
relative to any tool angle stored in the tool definition; it does not simply
replace or overwrite it.
Lathe Cplanes
Mastercam provides special lathe construction planes that allow you to work in
familiar lathe coordinates. For conventional 2D turning applications, use the Status
bar Planes menu to select the coordinate system. Select Lathe Radius or Lathe
Diameter coordinates, and then specify the desired X and Z directions.
This sets the Cplane and Tplane; there is no need to change the WCS. For
conventional 2D turning applications, you can leave the WCS as the system Top view.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Editing Your Work • 137
2
Manager. Then select LATHE Z = WORLD Z. Click the Set WCS icon to align the work
coordinate system with this view and choose OK.
This maps the lathe Z axis so that it is vertical. You can now choose a diameter or
radius coordinate system from the Planes menu. When you work with the part in the
graphics window, it is oriented vertically, as it will be on the machine.
Note: Prior to Mastercam X Lathe, when you generated a lathe turning toolpath,
Mastercam automatically wrote the coordinates to the NCI file in terms of a
typical lathe coordinate system. Instead of using the standard XYZ axes like
Mastercam Mill, the coordinates in the NCI file were written using standard
lathe axes.
This is no longer true. In Mastercam X Lathe, you can still work in familiar lathe
coordinate systems (either radius or diameter) by selecting them from the
Planes menu on the Status bar.
However, if you are a post writer and familiar with creating posts for earlier
versions of Mastercam Lathe, your post processors may now need to perform
this initial coordinate transformation rather than just reading it from the NCI
file.
TIP: You also use functions in the Xform (transform) and Analyze menus to
modify entities. For more information, see “Modifying Geometry” on
page 227.
Undo/Redo
You can undo and redo one or more sequential events that occur
while working with the current file and design functions.
An event is defined as a function-based operation. There is no
difference between creating a single line or using an Xform
(transform) function that creates 100 lines. Each is a single event.
The events you can undo and redo are limited to Mastercam CAD functions, including
those you use to create or edit geometry, drafting entities, file annotations, and entity
attributes. If your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Solids, you can also
undo/redo solids creation and transform operations.
The following CAD functions are not saved as events:
Editing live entities. However, fixing the entity by exiting the function is
saved as an event. If you undo this type of event, you delete the entity.
Delete/undelete
Blank/unblank
Hide/unhide
Setting system attributes (color, level, point and lines styles)
Status bar functions (Gview, Cplane, Tplane, WCS, Z depth, Levels, Groups,
2D/3D construction)
Zooming or panning images in the graphics window
By default, Mastercam can save up to 2 billion undo/redo events, restricted only by
the amount of random access memory (RAM) available on your PC. To enhance your
PC performance, you can configure Mastercam to store only a specific number of
events and allocate a maximum amount of RAM to the undo/redo functions. For
more information, see “Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences” on page 836.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Editing Your Work • 139
Notes:
• Each time you open a part file or create a new file, the list of undo/redo events is
cleared from memory. However, saving or merging the current file does not
clear this list.
• Due to the complex and associative nature of creating and modifying
toolpaths, you cannot undo or redo toolpath-related functions.
2
• You can undo/redo the creation of a solid and Xform events involving a solid.
However, other Solids functions, including changes you make to solid
operations in the Solids Manager, are not stored as undo/redo events.
Delete/Undelete
Delete and undelete functions in the Edit, Delete submenu permanently remove or
restore one or more selected entities from the graphics window and from the part file.
The Delete Duplicates (simple) and Delete Duplicates - Advanced functions find and
automatically delete duplicate entities in the current file. This section describes each
delete and undelete function and how and when to use it.
types. Otherwise, it locates and deletes all duplicates for all entity types. An online
summary informs you of the entities that were deleted.
Figure 2-21: Example: Delete Duplicates summary
This function also provides an online summary of the entities that were deleted.
Delete Entity
You can use different methods to delete entities, based on whether you
select entities before or after choosing the Delete function.
First use the General Selection ribbon bar options to select
entities. Then press the Delete key on your PC keyboard or choose
the Delete entity function from the Edit menu.
First choose the Delete entity function. Then select the entities to delete and
press the [Enter] key or choose the End selection button in the General
Selection ribbon bar.
Notes:
• To recover the entities you delete in error, use the Undelete or Undo functions.
• To temporarily remove selected entities from the graphics window, use the Hide
or Blank functions. For more information, see “Hiding Entities” on page 160
and “Blanking Entities” on page 160.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Editing Your Work • 141
Undeleting Entities
Undelete functions restore one or more deleted entities to the current file. You can
undelete only the entities you deleted while working with the current file. For
2
example, if you delete entities from File 1, you can “undelete” them only until you
open File 2.
Undelete functions include:
Undelete entity: Restores the last entity you deleted. You can
continue to select this option to incrementally undelete entities.
TIP: To recover the entities you delete in error, use the Undo function.
142 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
level that you want to use. When you select the entity, the Level Manager
dialog box expands and shows the main level set to the level of the
selected entity.
Figure 2-22: Level Manager dialog box
Main
Visible level indicator
2
Hidden level
Set main level by selecting an entity Choose an option to filter the list of
in the graphics window levels that appear in the table.
Used or named: Displays only levels that contain entities in the current file
and those that have an entry in the Name field /column.
Range: Displays only levels that fall within the specified range.
Note: The main level is always included in the table, regardless of the selected
filter.
Notes:
2
• To sort all levels by set name, click the Level Set column heading.
• To show or hide a set of levels based on their Level Set name, right-click in the
Level Set column cell of one member of the set and choose All Level Set On or
All Level Set Off.
Notes:
• The CSV file format is compatible with many applications, including
Microsoft® Excel®.
• You can also manually create a CSV file in Excel. An Excel CSV file usually
contains three columns of information: level number, level name, and level set
name. Level number and level name columns are required, while the set name
column is optional.
2 Use the fields in the Open file dialog box to navigate to the file location and
select the .CSV file to use.
3 Click Open to copy the levels and level set names defined in the specified file
to the current file.
Drafting
Use functions in the Create, Drafting menu and its submenus to work with drafting
entities. In this section, you will learn to create and modify different types of drafting
entities, and apply them effectively. For more information, see:
Drafting Dimensions on page 146
Smart Drafting Dimensions on page 147
Baseline, Chained, and Ordinate Dimensions on page 148
Working with Ordinate Dimensions on page 150
Non-Dimensioned Drafting Entities on page 153
Associating Drafting Entities with Geometry on page 156
Defining Drafting Options on page 159
Drafting Dimensions
Drafting dimensions measure the size of geometric entities or the distances or angles
between entities. All dimensions contain text, up to two leader lines, and/or up to two
witness lines.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Power User Tips • 147
To create drafting dimensions for geometric entities, you use functions in the Drafting
Dimension and Ordinate submenus. Mastercam supports linear, angular, and radius/
diameter dimension formats, and for each format, a variety of dimension types.
Linear dimensions measure the length of a line or the distance between two
points and include the following dimension types: horizontal, vertical,
parallel, perpendicular, baseline, chained, and tangent. You can also use
horizontal and vertical dimensions to measure the radius or diameter of arcs
and circles.
Radius/diameter dimensions display rotating leader lines and measure the
radius or diameter of arcs and circles.
Angular dimensions measure the angle formed by any of the following: two
non-parallel lines, two points and a line, three points, or by a line and a
horizon (a virtual line is defined by specifying an angle relative to the X axis
of the Cplane).
TIP: You can assign drafting entities to their own level, which makes it easy to
filter the display of drafting entities, as necessary.
Most of the singular dimension functions that appear in the Create, Drafting,
Dimensions and Ordinate submenus (such as Horizontal, Vertical, Parallel) can be
accessed directly from the Dimension ribbon bar.
Figure 2-24: Dimension ribbon bar
rs
de
mo ers
lea
n
Nu ht t
ig x
rti l
tio
Ve onta
di r
Re ead
t
He st Te
Ar ered
Ra ete
ve
Di er
ran
Up s
Ce ness
te
Lo al
ta
ws
n
Bo us
mb
c
tio
Al e
da
dl
ien
am
riz
ad
ign
Or k
nt
gl
nt
ju
ro
x
it
Ad
Op
Ho
An
Qu
Ad
Fo
W
With Smart Drafting Dimensions, you can dynamically create and edit dimensions for
lines, circles, and arcs using select, drag, and draw techniques—without selecting any
other Drafting menu functions. You can also edit and reposition notes and labels.
Dimension Ribbon Bar Shortcut Keys
All Dimension ribbon bar functions have shortcut keys, making it easy to modify the
type and format of drafting entities. For example, when dimensioning a closed arc in
Smart Drafting Dimensions, the default dimension type is diameter (D). To change to
radius, type [R] after selecting the dimension, or as you drag and draw the dimension.
To change it back to diameter, type [D].
TIP: To become familiar with ribbon bar shortcut keys, activate Learning Mode
in the Settings, Configuration, Screen page. When Learning Mode is active,
you can view all shortcut keys associated with ribbon bar options by moving
the mouse over the ribbon bar.
Baseline Dimensions
Baseline dimensions reference an existing linear dimension which becomes the base,
or zero point, for all baseline dimensions in the series. Baseline dimensions inherit
their orientation from the initial dimension but are not associated. Create baseline
dimensions when:
Associativity is not important
“Stacked” display and orientation suits the rest of the drawing
Measurement from a common reference point is desired
150 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Chained Dimensions
Chained dimensions, like baseline dimensions, are linear. However, instead of
referencing a single base point, each dimension in a chain references the previously
created dimension. Chained dimensions inherit their orientation from the initial
dimension but are not associated. Create chained dimensions when:
Relative associativity is important
“Stacked” display and orientation suit the rest of the drawing
Measurement of interval between points is desired
Ordinate Dimensions
Ordinate dimensions reference an initial base ordinate dimension that you create or
select and whose position Mastercam designates as zero. Because they are not linear,
ordinate dimensions give you greater flexibility with regard to positioning, alignment,
and orientation. Base (parent) or secondary (child) ordinate dimension may be
associated with geometry. Create ordinate dimensions when:
Associativity is important
Non-linear display and flexible positioning, alignment, and orientation suit
the rest of the drawing
Measurement from a common reference point is desired
2
Ordinate, Vertical
This function allows you to create vertical ordinate dimensions that
measure the vertical distance, from a common base point, along the Y axis
of the current Cplane. The following example shows a vertical ordinate
dimension.
Figure 2-27: Ordinate, Vertical
Ordinate, Parallel
With this function, you can create parallel ordinate dimensions that
measure the distance, from a common base point, along the axis formed by
two points that you enter. The following example shows a parallel ordinate
dimension.
152 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Once you set a base point and other dimension parameters, Mastercam automatically
creates a base (parent) dimension and all possible child dimensions relative to this
point based on the selected parameters and entities.
You can create horizontal and/or vertical ordinate dimensions, and create
dimensions at the center points of arcs, the endpoints of arcs, and/or the endpoints of
lines, splines, and surface curves. Using this method saves time because you create
many ordinate dimensions at once, eliminating the need to enter individual points.
2
The ordinate dimensions you create using this method are not associated with any
geometry; however, child dimensions are associated with the base point.
Ordinate, Align
Choose this function to select, reposition, and align the text of all related
ordinate dimensions along a common axis. Aligning ordinate dimensions
can improve neatness in a drawing while highlighting their relatedness.
However, if aligning the ordinate dimensions interferes with other entities
in the drawing, you can use the Dimension Ribbon bar Align option to move a
selected ordinate dimension independently from the others.
Create Note
This function allows you to create drafting notes and labels, and as an
alternative way to create freestanding single, segmented, or multiple leader
lines. Drafting notes and labels are blocks of text (one or more lines) which
you can insert into a drawing. Notes are standalone blocks of text, whereas
labels have one or more leader lines used as pointers.
Figure 2-30: Drafting Note dialog box
You enter note or label text by typing it or by loading it from an ASCII file. You can also
create line and paragraph breaks within a block of note or label text.
Create X-Hatch
To fill a selected closed curve boundary with a specific hatch pattern, use
the Hatch function and choose from standard and user-defined patterns.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Power User Tips • 155
2
156 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You can also customize the spacing, and rotation angle of the selected pattern.
Note: Hatch patterns fill closed boundaries, with the exception of nested chains
which form holes in the pattern.
horizontal vertical
parallel perpendicular
baseline angular
tangent point
Notes:
• Chained dimensions cannot be associated with geometric entities.
• For more information on setting drafting configuration parameters, see
“Defining Drafting Options” on page 159.
To be associated, you must use Mastercam to create a drafting entity for a selected
geometric entity when the Associativity parameter is selected (active) for the drafting
session.
Note: Only associated drafting entities can be regenerated. However, you can
validate both associated and non-associated drafting entities.
2
Defining Drafting Options
To edit parameters that define drafting entities, choose the Drafting Options or Multi-
Edit function from the Create, Drafting menu. Both functions open the Drafting
Options dialog box. However, you use the Options function to make changes that
apply only to all new drafting entities that you create. Use the Multi-Edit function to
change the characteristics of existing drafting entities that you select in the graphics
window.
Figure 2-33: Drafting Options dialog box
Another important difference between these functions is that the Options function
lets you view and modify all Drafting Options pages, (Dimension Attributes,
Dimension Text, Dimension Setting, Note Text, and Leaders/Witness).
160 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
With the Dimension Multi-Edit function, you view and modify only the pages with
parameters that are associated with the drafting entities you select. For example, if
you do not select drafting entities that are notes, the Notes Text page does not appear.
To set drafting parameters in the Drafting Options dialog box, define parameters in
each page.
IMPORTANT: The changes you make using the Drafting Options and
Dimension Multi-Edit functions apply only to the current Mastercam session.
To save drafting parameters with your Mastercam configuration file, use the
Settings, Configuration function.
Hiding Entities
To temporarily remove and restore selected entities in the graphics window display,
use the following Hide and Unhide functions, available from the Screen menu.
Hide Entity
Use this function after selecting the entities you want to keep in the
graphics window. It temporarily removes all unselected entities from view
in the graphics window, allowing you to focus on a small amount of
geometry. If hidden entities already exist in the file, this function acts as a
toggle to “unhide” them.
Hide More Entities
This function is available only if hidden entities already exist in the file. It
allows you to select additional entities from the current display and remove
the unselected entities, hiding even more entities from view.
Unhide Some
You use this function only if you are already working with a file that
contains hidden entities. It displays only the entities that are hidden and
allows you to select the entities you want to “unhide” and add back to the
graphics window view.
Blanking Entities
You use the following Blank and Unblank Screen menu functions to selectively
remove and restore a limited number of entities from the graphics window view.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Power User Tips • 161
Blank Entity
To reduce the complexity of the screen display, choose this function and
select the entities to remove from view in the graphics window. You can
select entities on any level.
Unblank Entity
If blanked entities exist in the file, use this function to “unblank” them and
2
restore all previously blanked entities to the graphics window.
Copying Entities
The Edit menu provides you with basic Cut, Copy and Paste functions. You can also
access these functions using their keyboard shortcuts, [Ctrl+X], [Ctrl+C], and
[Ctrl+V], respectively. These functions allow you to cut, copy, and paste selected
entities between different Mastercam files.
IMPORTANT: Only geometry and drafting entities are copied between files.
Toolpath operations and machine, control, and toolpath-related data are not
transferred with the selected entities.
Note: Cut entities to remove them from the existing file. To leave the existing file
unchanged, Copy the entities.
3 To save the selected entities to another file, choose one of the following
methods:
Close the current file, open a new or existing file, and choose Paste or
type [Ctrl+V] to paste the entities.
Open another Mastercam session and file (new or existing), and choose
Paste or type [Ctrl+V] to paste the entities. When you paste the selected
entities, they are “live”.
4 Use options in the Paste ribbon bar to override the entity attributes for color,
level, line style, point style and line width.
Figure 2-34: Paste ribbon bar
t t in lin tyle
lev th
e
ain wid
tyl
s
o m ne s
t
o m olor
el
o m oin
om e
t t in p
c
li
ain
ain
a
a
om
tt
tt
tt
Se
Se
Se
Se
Se
5 To exit the paste function, press the [Esc] key, or choose another Mastercam
function.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Power User Tips • 163
2
chapter 3
Creating Geometry
This chapter introduces the functions and ribbon bars you use to create a broad range
of geometric entities. You will learn to create geometry and work with essential
Mastercam CAD functions, including:
Using the Sketcher Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 165
Working with “Live” Entities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 166
Creating Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 168
Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 172
Creating Arcs and Circles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 177
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . page 182
Creating Fillets and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . page 206
Creating Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 208
Creating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 212
Creating Primitives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 218
Creating Autosynced Rails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 224
CREATING GEOMETRY / Using the Sketcher Toolbar • 165
es
s
ap
er
sh
mf
ric
ha
es
et
s /c
i ti v
es
ts
om
es
lin
l et
cs
m
in
Lin
Ge
Sp
Pri
Po
Ar
Fil
3
TIP: Other toolbars, such as the Solids and Surfaces toolbars, offer additional
functions for geometry creation. You can access all of these functions and
more from the Create and Solids menus. See “Working with Surfaces and
Solids” on page 280 to learn more about creating these entity types.
Sketching basic geometry in either 2D or 3D mode is free-form, fast, and easy. Simply
select a Sketcher function from the drop-down list, and then use the mouse to click in
the graphics window and create the entity. For many Sketcher functions, you also use
function ribbon bar or dialog box options to define or edit the live entity. If you prefer
keyboarding, shortcut keys provide access to most ribbon bar options.
Notes:
• For many types of geometry creation, you use the AutoCursor with a selected
Sketcher function to create and edit entities. For more information, see “Using
the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar” on page 78.
• You can customize the Sketcher toolbar by adding or removing functions. For
more information, see “Customizing Toolbar Functions” on page 814.
• Sketcher functions do not include drafting, transform, modify, surfaces (with
the exception of shapes), or solids (with the exception of primitives).
166 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Live entities are those in the process of being created. You can edit their
properties using options in the selected function ribbon bar or dialog box,
remove them from the graphics window, or “fix” them.
Entities become fixed entities when they have been accepted–for example,
when you press Enter or click OK or Apply to complete a function.
After you create an entity using one of the Sketcher functions, it remains live until you
exit the function, start a new function, or create another entity. Live entities are
designated by a live entity color. When you accept an entity, it changes to the normal
entity color.
After entities become fixed, you can edit them using the Edit, Analyze, and Xform
(transform) menu functions.
l
le
ta
gt
dp
ne
ng
t
on
l
en
en
ca
en
i-li
ea
riz
ng
el
rti
ult
it
Ho
Lin
Ve
Ta
Lin
Ed
2 To create the endpoints of the new line entity, click two positions anywhere
in the graphics window. The line appears in the live entity color.
3 Click the Edit Endpoint 1 button.
3
4 Move the cursor to a new position for the first line endpoint, and then click
again.
5 Click the Edit Endpoint 2 button.
6 Move the cursor to a new position, and then click again.
7 Repeat Steps 3–6 until you are satisfied with the endpoints.
8 To change the line length:
a Press [L] or click the Length button.
b Type a new length and press [Enter].
9 To change the angle:
a Press [A] or click the Angle button.
b Type a new angle and press [Enter].
10 Use one of the following methods to fix the entity:
To stay in the function and continue to create lines, pick a position in the
graphics window as the first endpoint of a new line, or click Apply in the
ribbon bar.
To exit the function, press [Esc], click OK or choose another function.
t
lta
l ec
De
Se
Distance and Angle Length on a selected entity
When you press [Enter] to apply the specified values, the Relative Position ribbon bar
closes. Use the current function’s ribbon bar or dialog box to select additional
positions or modify the live entity.
TIP: Choose Select in the Relative Position ribbon bar to activate the Along
mode and create a new entity along an existing entity. When prompted, select
a line, arc, or spline at a position nearest to the endpoint from which you will
specify the along length. When you select the entity, the Delta, Distance, and
Angle fields become inactive and you are prompted to enter a length value. To
directly access the Along mode, choose it from the AutoCursor ribbon bar
override drop-down list.
Creating Points
In this section you will learn to create points using the following functions:
Create Point Create Point
Position(page 169) Dynamic(page 169)
Create Point Node Create Point
Points(page 170) Segment(page 170)
Create Point Create Point Small
Endpoints(page 171) Arcs(page 171)
You access the point functions from the Sketcher toolbar point drop-down list, or
from the Create, Point submenu.
Figure 3-3: Sketcher Points drop-down list
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Points • 169
Note: When you choose the next point position, the prior point becomes a fixed
entity.
t1
oin
dP
e
n
nc
al
E
t
it
rm
fse
sta
in t
Ed
e
No
Lin
Po
Of
Fli
Di
Use the Line and Point options to specify the type of entity to create. You can
create a line, a point, or both.
170 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Use the Flip button to set the side of the selected entity on which an offset
point or line appears. (Flip has an effect only when Offset is non-zero.)
Use the ribbon bar Offset field to create the point or line perpendicular to
the selected entity, offset by a specified distance.
Use the Distance field to specify the distance along the entity from its nearest
endpoint where you want to create the point or line. You can use the this field
independently or in conjunction with the Offset field.
When you are placing a point or line along a line or an arc, you can create it beyond
the selected entity, extended in either direction.
IMPORTANT: When you choose this function, the node points are
immediately created as fixed entities and the function ends.
TIP: You can also set the distance or number of points before selecting an
entity.
r
nc
e
mb
sta
Nu
Di
When you enter a number or distance value, Mastercam automatically calculates the
necessary point positions.
If you use the Number field to create points, Mastercam always places points on each
endpoint of the entity. However, if you use the Distance field, Mastercam creates the
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Points • 171
first point at the endpoint nearest where you selected the entity, and then, at
multiples of the specified distance. It is possible that a point may not be created at the
final endpoint.
Note: This function creates points only along the physical entity. No points are
created on an extended projection of the entity.
TIP: To quickly remove all endpoints created by this function, from the
Mastercam menu choose Edit, Undo.
s
ius
rcs
arc
rad
e
al
let
ax
rti
De
Pa
M
To create points at the center of arcs and circles, choose the Partial arcs option. If this
option is not selected, point will be created only in the center of circles (closed arcs).
To delete the selected arcs and circles after the points have been created, choose the
Delete arcs option.
Note: The Thread Point and Cut Point options in the Create, Point submenu
are specific to Mastercam Wire. The Thread Point option lets you to place thread
points for each chain in a wire operation. The Cut Point option lets you create a
cut point in a position different from the thread point. These functions are
covered in the Mastercam X4 Wire Getting Started Guide located in your
Mastercam install \Documentation folder.
172 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Creating Lines
Mastercam offers a variety of flexible functions you use to quickly create lines,
including:
Create Line Endpoint Create Line Closest
(page 172) (page 174)
Create Line Bisect Create Line Perpendicular
(page 174) (page 175)
Create Line Parallel Create Line Tangent Through
(page 176) Point (page 177)
To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Line drop-down list, or from
the Create, Line submenu.
Figure 3-8: Sketcher Line drop-down list
l
le
ta
gt
dp
ne
ng
t
on
l
en
en
ca
en
i-li
ea
riz
ng
el
rti
ult
it
Ho
Lin
Ve
Lin
Ta
Ed
To dynamically create endpoints, click in the graphics window, or type values in the
Line Length and Line angle fields and then click in the graphics window to position
the line. Use AutoCursor to precisely define the line endpoint positions.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Lines • 173
Notes:
• When creating a tangent line, including lines that are perpendicular to a line
and tangent to an arc, you can create the line on an extended portion of the
selected entity.
• Use the AutoCursor visual cues to help identify a tangency, especially when
creating a line tangent to a spline. Right-click in the graphics window, choose
AutoCursor, and then select Tangent in the AutoCursor Settings dialog box.
IMPORTANT: When you choose this function, the line is immediately created
as a fixed entity and the function ends.
ns
ol u n
4 S lutio
tio
h
gt
o
n
1S
Le
To set the length of the bisecting line, enter a value in the Length field, press Enter,
then select the two lines to bisect.
nt
th
ge
it e
ng
p
n
Ed
Le
Ta
Fli
To set the length of the perpendicular line, type a value in the Length field and press
Enter. Then select the entity and a position.
You can also use this ribbon bar to create a line perpendicular to a line and tangent to
an arc by choosing the Tangent option and selecting a line or arc and then an arc or
line. In this circumstance, Mastercam creates multiple possibilities for perpendicular
lines and you must select the one to keep.
Use the Flip option to set the position of the perpendicular line relative to the selected
entity. This button has three toggle states:
Selected: (default) Creates a new perpendicular line at the position you
select in the graphics window.
Opposite: Creates a perpendicular line on the opposite side of the entity
from where you select the position.
Both: Creates two perpendicular lines on both sides of the selected entity.
176 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• To use the tangent feature of this ribbon bar, you must have at least two entities
in the graphics window, and one of them must be an arc.
• When creating lines perpendicular to arcs, you can create the line on an
extended portion of the selected arc.
• When creating lines perpendicular to arcs or splines, select the entity close to
the area from which you want to draw the line.
t
e
en
nc
it e
ng
st a
p
Ed
Ta
Fli
Di
The parallel line is created at the same length as the existing line. To offset the parallel
line, enter a value in the Distance field then indicate the offset direction.
Use the Flip option to set the position of the parallel line relative to the primary line.
This button has three toggle states:
Selected: (default) Creates a parallel line on the selected side of the primary
line.
Opposite: Creates a parallel line opposite the selected side of the primary
line.
Both: Creates a parallel line on both sides of the primary line.
Note: When creating tangent lines, you can create the line on an extended
portion of the selected entity.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Arcs and Circles • 177
h
le
it E
gt
3
se
n
Re
Le
Notes:
• If you have the Length field locked, Mastercam creates two tangent lines and
asks you which line to keep.
• If you pick a tangent point that is not on a selected arc, Mastercam moves the
point onto the arc. It does this by projecting the selected point along a vector
from the point and through the arc's center point.
• If you pick a tangent point that is not on a selected spline, Mastercam moves
the point onto the spline. It does this by using the Nearest function to project
the selected point.
• After you choose Edit Endpoint 1 or Edit Endpoint 2, you can use AutoCursor
to reposition the line’s endpoint.
Choose a function from the Sketcher toolbar Arc drop-down list, or from the Create,
Arc submenu. In most functions, you can create arcs or circles tangent to existing
entities, such as curves, lines, or points.
Figure 3-14: Sketcher Arcs drop-down list
r
nt
t
et
en
ce
s
diu
am
ng
it
Ra
Ed
Ta
Di
Alternatively, you can enter a value into either the Radius or Diameter field to set the
size of the circle and then click in the graphics window to set the center point to
position the circle.
You can use AutoCursor to position the center point and/or the edge point of the arc.
You can also create circles tangent to other entities.
start point, and end angle. To create a full circle, double–click the first edge point (you
are not prompted to select a second edge point).
Figure 3-16: Create arc polar ribbon bar
t
oin
rp
gle
e
gle
er
nt
an
t
et
en
ce
an
s
diu
am
art
ng
it
d
p
Ra
Ed
En
St
Ta
Fli
Di
Alternatively, you can manually enter values in the ribbon bar fields to set the circle
size, start angle, and end angle. You can then select the center point in the graphics
window to position the arc and use AutoCursor to position any or all of the three
3
points of the arc.
You can also create arcs tangent to curves and points.
TIP: Use the Flip option to set the direction of the arc. This button has two
toggle states; clockwise (left) and counterclockwise (right). You can also drag
the mouse through the start point of the arc to reverse the direction.
Notes:
• If you choose the Tangent button in the ribbon bar, you must select an entity as
the first edge point selection (radius and arc start point). The selected entity is
the tangent entity for the resulting arc.
• To create a full circle, enter 0 for the start angle and 360 for the end angle.
int
ree t
ge
er
Th poin
po
t
et
en
ed
s
diu
am
ng
o
it
Tw
Ra
Ed
Ta
Create Arc Endpoints Di
You can create arcs with defined endpoints and one edge point using this
function. Click in the graphics window to set the endpoints and then click to
set the edge point.
Figure 3-18: Create arc endpoints ribbon bar
ts
oin
dp
er
t
et
en
en
s
diu
am
ng
it
Ra
Ed
Ta
Di
You can also create arcs tangent to curves and points, and use AutoCursor to position
any or all of the three points of the arc.
Notes:
• If you choose the Tangent button in the ribbon bar, Mastercam accepts any
locations for the first two positions but you must select an entity for the third
position. The selected entity is the tangent entity for the resulting arc.
• You can select up to two collinear points.
ts
oin
ep
dg
t
en
it e
ng
Ed
Ta
Create Arc Polar Endpoints
You can create polar arcs from either a defined start or end point. Choose this
function and click in the graphics window to set the first point. Then enter
values in the ribbon bar fields to define the radius/diameter, start angle, and
3
end angle.
Figure 3-20: Create arc polar endpoints ribbon bar
t
oin
gle
En int
gle
dp
r
oin
e
po
an
et
en
an
s
dp
diu
am
art
art
it
d
Ra
Ed
En
St
St
Di
itie
Ra ange ent titie
2 e nti
Cir an ang ne
Ar le Ta nt 3 ncy
n
ng o y
c T t rli
c T ng e
Ta nt p ntit
c ge e
Ar amic ente
Dy ent int
e e
ng 1
n c
er
Ta ent
et
s
am
ng
Ta
Di
182 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To set the size of the arc, enter a radius or diameter in the corresponding ribbon bar
field, choose the tangent condition you want to use, and follow the prompts to create
the arc. Under some circumstances, Mastercam displays four possible arcs and you
must select the one you want to keep.
Note: When choosing lines to create an arc, those lines cannot be parallel to one
another.
Use other functions in the menu to create bounding boxes and letters. If Mastercam
Solids is installed, you can also extract 2D geometry from a 3D solid.
In this section, you will learn to create basic shapes using the following functions:
Create Rectangle Create Rectangular
(page 184) Shapes(page 184)
Create Polygon Create Ellipse
(page 186) (page 187)
Create Bounding Box Create Letters
(page 187)
Create Spiral
(page 190)
Create Helix
3
(page 191) (page 193)
Create Turn Profile Create Silhouette Boundary
(page 193) (page 195)
Create Relief Groove Create Bolt Circle (page 198)
(page 196)
Create Stair Geometry Create Door Geometry
(page 198) (page 202)
Create Rectangle
This commonly used function lets you quickly create a rectangle by defining
two points. To draw the rectangle, click to set the base point that anchors the
rectangle. Then drag the anchor point and click to set the second corner. You
can use AutoCursor to precisely position the two points on the rectangle.
Figure 3-23: Create rectangle ribbon bar
su ter
ce
n
ea ce
rfa
s
Cr r to
int
po
te
t
o
h
igh
ch
idt
it
An
He
Ed
W
Use other ribbon bar fields to draw the rectangle from a center point, or create it as a
surface within the rectangle. The rectangle remains a live entity until you click the
Apply button or click to start drawing another rectangle.
TIP: To quickly create multiple rectangles using the same dimensions, lock the
Width and Height fields in the ribbon bar. Each time you click in the graphics
window, a complete rectangle of the defined dimensions is created.
You can create the shape using a base point or 2-point method. The dialog box
options change, depending on the method you select. However, both methods let you
set a corner fillet, rotation angle, general shape, and surface creation.
the rectangle from that position. Use the AutoCursor to dynamically change the
base point position, length, or width before fixing the rectangle.
2-Point Method
Choose this method and sketch a corner base point, then draw the rectangle and
sketch the second point. Use the AutoCursor to change either the base point or
second point.
Create Polygon
This function allows you to quickly create a polygon as wireframe geometry
and, optionally, a surface. Use the Corner or Flat options to determine
whether the radius is measured from the base point to a corner, or to the
midpoint of a side.
Figure 3-25: Create polygon dialog box (expanded)
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Miscellaneous Shapes • 187
Create Ellipse
You can create an ellipse as wireframe geometry and, optionally, a surface,
using this function and dialog box. To create a partial ellipse, enter a start
angle greater than 0 degrees and/or an end angle less than 360 degrees.
Figure 3-26: Create ellipse dialog box (expanded)
Rectangular Cylindrical
3
190 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: To enable the Stock and Solid options in the Create section, enter a value
for Expand Z (for a rectangular shape) or Expand Radius (for a cylindrical
shape). These option may be used if all the selected geometry is 2D and lies in
the same plane.
Create Letters
The Create Letters dialog box allows you to add alphanumeric characters
consisting of lines, arcs, and NURBS splines to your file. You can use one of
the fonts provided by Mastercam, including special drafting fonts, or choose
from any TrueType® font installed on your PC.
Figure 3-29: Create letters dialog box
Mastercam Fonts
Mastercam contains predefined letter fonts, including Block, Box, Roman, and Slant,
and a number of specialized drafting fonts, such as Dayville, European, Hartford, Old
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Miscellaneous Shapes • 191
English, and more. You can also choose a custom font for letters by selecting Other
from the font list and navigating to the folder where your font is stored to select it.
When you select a drafting font, you can choose the Drafting Options button and
format letters using the Drafting Options dialog box and Note Text options. The Note
Text parameters you define will overwrite the Font and Height settings that appear in
the Create Letters dialog box.
TrueType Fonts
You can choose any TrueType font installed on your PC to format the letters you
create in Mastercam files. To use one of these fonts, choose the TrueType button,
select one from the Fonts dialog box and click OK.
3
TIP: When using TrueType fonts, the height of the actual letters may not
match the value that you entered for letter height because Mastercam scales
the letters based on all of the information encoded into the TrueType font,
including blank space around the letters. Use the Xform, Scale function to
resize them as needed.
Create Spiral
Use this flexible function to create spiral geometry as a series of NURBS
splines. You can specify the initial and final pitch in both the XY and Z
planes, set the number of revolutions or height, and choose the direction
(CW/CCW).
192 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: To create a spiral with a taper angle, use the Create, Helix function.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Miscellaneous Shapes • 193
Create Helix
This function lets you create a tapered spiral as a continuous NURBS spline.
You can define the inward and starting angles, radius, number of revolutions
or height, pitch, and direction (CW/CCW).
Figure 3-32: Create helix dialog box
Note: To create a helix using dimensions in the XY and XZ planes, use the
Create, Spiral function.
Note: You can choose to create the profile from the upper half, the lower half, or
the entire cross section of the selected entity.
Note: For more information on how to use the options in this dialog box, please
click the Help button on the dialog box, and click the Field Definitions tab.
6 Click OK.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Miscellaneous Shapes • 195
TIP: Set the WCS XY plane parallel to the axis of rotation for consistent
results. A 3D axis can yield unexpected boundary curves.
3 Choose the Select From Table button. In the Relief Groove Table dialog box:
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Miscellaneous Shapes • 197
Note: If you are working in English (inch) units of measure, the converted
English values in the table approximate the metric-based DIN standards.
b Click OK to accept your selection and return to the DIN Relief Groove
Parameters dialog box. The Dimensions and d position fields update,
based on the table selection.
4 Set an orientation and indicate whether to trim or break the horizontal and
vertical lines that intersect the endpoints of the groove geometry.
5 Set the relief groove position.
Note: To view the relief groove in the graphics window before geometry is
created, choose Preview Groove. Press [Enter] to end the preview.
TIPS:
• Select Create Holes to create both arcs and center point entities; deselect
this option to create only the center points.
• The Create Bolt Circle function is useful when you are running Mastercam
Design, and you cannot access drill toolpaths.
• You can also use Mastercam's Drill Point Selection function (choose
Toolpaths, Drill Toolpaths) to automatically drill bolt circles without
creating geometry.
3
200 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The pictures below show a closed stringer and the dimensions required to create the
stair geometry in Mastercam Router. The same dimensions apply to both closed and
open stringers.
7 Determine the thickness of material to be used for both the tread and the
riser, and enter these values into the appropriate fields.
8 Enter the width of material to be used for the stringer in the Stringer width
field.
9 Enter the distance you want the tread to extend beyond the riser in the
Overhang Amt field.
10 Enter values in the Top riser offset field and Bottom riser offset field to
create lines to close the stringer boundary.
11 Select the Wedges check box to add additional space in the routed channel
on a closed stringer. Enter values for the short-side height and tall-side
height and for the length of the wedge. The value in the Angle field will
3
update automatically based on these width and height values.
12 Select which side of the stringer to view in the graphics window by selecting
either Draw right side stringer or Draw left side stringer.
13 Select Rotate stringer/s to x axis to draw the stringer along the X-axis in the
graphics window.
14 Click OK to close the dialog box.
15 Click in the graphics window or use AutoCursor to position the stair
geometry.
16 Press [ESC] to exit the function.
Note: The Stair rise and Stair angle fields are computed automatically by
Mastercam, based on the values you enter. These fields cannot be directly edited.
To finish the risers with mitered corners, use a contour chamfer toolpath.
The contour chamfer toolpath requires a V-groove tool, such as a chamfer
202 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
bit. The picture below shows the mitered risers. The gold represents the 2D
chamfer toolpath.
You can define the door features and attributes, such as such as color and line style for
the geometry, horizontal or vertical mullions, or a radius for rounded corners. You can
204 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
also make multiple copies of the door you define.The picture below shows the door
components that require dimensions when using the Door dialog box.
3
206 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: AutoCursor is unavailable during the use of fillet and chamfer functions.
IMPORTANT: For each fillet/chamfer function, you define whether to trim the
filleted/chamfered entities by selecting the Trim or No Trim options in the
function ribbon bar.
Fillet Entities
Before you select the entities to which you will apply the fillet, use the Fillet
ribbon bar fields to define the fillet style (normal, inverse, circle, clearance)
and enter the necessary radius value. You can also define whether to trim the
selected lines to the fillet. Trimming is set as the default so if you do not want
the entities trimmed, just deselect the Trim button.
Figure 3-41: Fillet entities ribbon bar
m
s
Tri
diu
yle
m
No
Ra
Tri
St
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Fillets and Chamfers • 207
When you move you mouse near an entity, Mastercam displays a preview of the fillet,
if one can be created with an adjacent entity. To immediately create the fillet as a fixed
entity, click one of the previewed entities.
Note: This function does not recognize chains. Use the Fillet Chain function to
fillet chained entities.
Fillet Chains
Use this function to fillet entities that have sharp corners and can be
recognized as a single chained entity (i.e., rectangles and polygons). The
3
ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is
particularly useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches
and dies). These parts often require different radius values on inside and outside
corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance.
When you choose this function, the Fillet Chains ribbon bar displays and the
Chaining dialog box opens. Use the dialog box options and cursor to chain the entities
to fillet. When you close the Chaining dialog box, a preview of the chained entities
appears in the graphics window with the fillet entities highlighted.
Figure 3-42: Fillet chains ribbon bar
on
m
s
cti
Tri
diu
ain
yle
m
re
No
Ra
Tri
St
Ch
Di
To edit the resulting fillets, use the ribbon bar fields. To accept them, click Apply.
Chamfer Entities
Use this function to apply chamfers to existing entities. Before you select the
entities to chamfer, choose the chamfer method and enter the necessary
distance and angle values.
Figure 3-43: Chamfer entities ribbon bar
1
2
e
m
nc
nc
Tri
gle
st a
st a
yle
m
No
An
Tri
St
Di
Di
208 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Select the first entity. As you move the mouse over the second entity, a preview of the
chamfer displays. When you select the second entity, the chamfer is immediately
created as a fixed entity.
Notes:
• To chamfer chained geometry, use the Chamfer Chains function.
• You can chamfer arcs using the 1 Distance and 2 Distance methods.
Chamfer Chains
This function allows you to chain entities and create chamfers at sharp
corners. When you choose this function, the Chamfer Chains ribbon bar
appears and the Chaining dialog box opens. Use the dialog box options and
cursor to chain the entities to chamfer. When you close the Chaining dialog
box, a preview of the chained entities appears in the graphics window with the
chamfer entities highlighted.
Figure 3-44: Chamfer chains ribbon bar
h
idt
/w
ce
m
Tri
an
ain
m
st
No
y
Ch
Tri
St
Di
To edit the resulting chamfers, use the ribbon bar fields. To accept them, press the
Apply button.
The Style field in the Chamfer Chains ribbon bar is a multi-purpose field that is used
in conjunction with the Distance/Width field, which is also a multi-purpose field. You
use these fields to set both the chamfer distance and width.
To set the chamfer distance, choose 1 Distance from the Style field list, then
type the distance to use in the Distance/Width field.
To set the chamfer width, choose Width from the Style field and type the
width in the Distance/Width field.
Creating Splines
Mastercam provides a number of functions that define the method used to create a
spline. Their corresponding ribbon bars allow you to further define the resulting
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Splines • 209
geometry. Spline functions include: Choose the function from the Sketcher toolbar
Create Manual Spline Create Automatic Spline
(page 209) (page 210)
Create Curves Spline Create Blended Spline
(page 211) (page 212)
Splines drop-down menu, or from the Create, Spline submenu.
Figure 3-45: Sketcher Splines drop-down list
3
TIP: When a spline is live, use the ribbon bar fields to edit it.
Notes:
• To set the default spline type (parametric, NURBS, curve-generated) choose
Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings, and select a Spline/Surface creation
type.
• You use the AutoCursor to specify point positions only with the Manual spline
function.
To position any spline control point, use AutoCursor to enter coordinates before
creating the next node point.
Figure 3-46: Create manual spline ribbon bar
ns
t
oin
itio
ep
nd
co
on
nd
up
it e
ck
Ba
Ed
TIPS:
• You can create a closed spline by selecting the same point for the first and
last points.
• Mastercam uses a combination of distance and direction from point to point
to place the points in a sensible order. To avoid distorting the intended
shape of the spline, delete or blank extraneous points.
IMPORTANT: To use the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar to set the spline
endpoint tangencies, before creating a spline, choose the Edit End Condition
button in the function ribbon bar.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Splines • 211
The Spline End Conditions ribbon bar appears after you finish defining the
spline only if you choose the Edit End Condition option in the function
ribbon bar before you create the spline.
Figure 3-47: Spline end conditions ribbon bar
r
to
cto
d
ho
od
ec
le
ve
gle
et
th
yv
ng
me
tm
cy
ta
an
nc
en
oin
oin
ge
t
oin
oin
ng
ta n
tp
tp
ta
dp
dp
ar
ar
p
En
En
St
St
Fli
Fli
Use the Start Point and End Point fields to define the tangent vector of the spline’s
3
endpoints. Choose from the following selections.
3 Pt Arc: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to the endpoint of an arc
Mastercam calculates from the spline’s first or last three points, based on
whether you are defining the Start or End point condition.
Natural: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to Mastercam’s calculation of the
optimal tangency condition that results in a minimal curve length. This is the
default end condition.
To entity: Sets the endpoint tangent vector based on the tangent vector of a
curve at the point that you select it.
To end: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to the endpoint of a selected curve.
Be sure to select the curve close to the endpoint whose tangent vector you
want to use.
Angle: Sets the endpoint tangent vector based on the value you enter in the
Angle field.
lc
itio
na
in
l
va
ve
igi
a
De
Ch
Le
Or
212 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
determines how closely each resulting spline matches the selected curves, and you
can choose to keep, blank, or delete the original curves once the splines have been
created, or move them to a different level.
de
itu
de
rve e
gn
itu
cu urv
ma
cu urve
gn
nd nd c
ma
c
Se seco
Fir first
rve
t
t
lec
lec
co
st
m
Se
Se
Tri
Creating Curves
When working with surfaces and solids, use functions in the Create, Curves submenu
to generate curves on solid and surface edges. Then use the ribbon bar options for
these functions to further define the curves.
Figure 3-50: Create Curves submenu
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Curves • 213
Notes:
• For untrimmed NURBS and parametric spline surfaces, Mastercam creates
exact curves where possible. Chord-height, tolerance-fitted curves are created
for all other surface types.
• For trimmed surface edges, a chord-height, tolerance-fitted cubic NURBS curve
is created.
a
an
rcs
k
A
ea
Fit
Br
After you select a surface, move the dynamic arrow to the edge on which you want to
create the curve. Then enter a break angle and press [Enter].
Mastercam looks ahead on the straight line of the surface edge and calculates the end
of the edge at the point where the line turns by a value greater than or equal to the
defined break angle.
For trimmed surface edges, a chord height, tolerance-fitted cubic NURBS curve is
created. Use the Fit Arcs and Lines button to create arcs and lines where possible.
214 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
es
Lin
s
d
le
ge
an
ng
ed
cs
ka
Ar
en
ea
p
Op
Fit
Br
Fli
For trimmed surface edges, a chord height, tolerance-fitted cubic NURBS curve is
created. Use the Fit Arcs and Lines button to create arcs and lines where possible.
Cu
Fli
An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its
wireframe display. In the following example, the green lines represent the wireframe
display of a surface. The red lines represent the two constant parameter curves
created on the surface, one in each direction. The point where the constant parameter
curves intersect is the fixed position, or constant parameter.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Curves • 215
Choose the curve quality and select a surface in the graphics window. After you select
the surface, Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the surface. You can move the
arrow to the point on the surface where you want to create the curve.
y
t it
ty
an
ali
qu
qu
rve
rve
p
Cu
Cu
Fli
Use the ribbon bar fields to define the number of curves to create and how closely the
curves fit the surface on which they are created.
After setting the curve quantity and quality, select a surface in the graphics window.
As soon as you select the surface, the curves are created and remain live. While the
curves are live, you can edit both the number and the surface fit of the curves.
To finish the curve, double-click the last endpoint or press [Enter]. The curve appears
and remains live. While the curve remains live, you can change the chord height but
not the endpoint locations.
Note: The resulting curve passes through the points in the order you enter them.
You must enter a minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the curve.
216 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
es
i pl
ult
ing
dm
t
ne
fse
ac
in
Pl a
Fin
Sp
Jo
Of
Set all the options on the ribbon bar, press [Enter], select the surface, and press Apply.
While the curves or points are live, you can change any of the settings and watch the
entities change dynamically. When finished, press [Enter] again to fix the curves or
points.
ty
gle
ali
an
qu
ng
rve
rt i
Cu
Pa
In the following graphic, the red line represents the parting line curve, where the
surface wraps out of view. The green lines represent the front of the surface (positive
surface normal), and the gray lines represent the back of the surface (negative surface
normal).
3
Notes:
• This function is often used with mold-making.
• This function uses the construction plane (Cplane) to determine what line(s) to
create.
es
i pl
ty
ult
ali
qu
ir
t1
t2
dm
pa
in
rve
t1
t2
fse
fse
Jo Fin
k
Pi c
Se
Se
Cu
Of
Of
The following graphics show two shaded intersecting surfaces, and the same surfaces
in wireframe view.
218 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The red lines in the wireframe picture are the curves that were created along the
surface intersections.
TIP: When this ribbon bar first displays, its options are unavailable until you
select both sets of surfaces, as indicated by the interactive prompts that
appears in the graphics window.
If you choose to intersect only surfaces, you may select them in one set containing a
minimum of two surfaces. In this case, Mastercam attempts to create curves by
pairing each surface in the set with every other surface in the set. In certain instances,
however, having only one set of surfaces could prove more time consuming.
For example, if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor in one set,
Mastercam looks for intersections between all walls and the floor. If, however, you
select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set of surfaces,
Mastercam looks for intersections only between each wall and the floor.
Creating Primitives
Mastercam makes it easy to create primitive surfaces. You can sketch them in 3D,
enter specific values, or use a combination of these techniques. If your installation
includes Mastercam Solids, you can optionally create solid primitives. In this section,
you will learn to use the following functions to create primitive shapes.
3
After creating the selected primitive shape as a surface or as a solid model, use the
dialog box fields to set or modify its dimensions, extensions, base point, primary axis,
radius, or sweep.
Create Block
Use this function create a block primitive as a solid or surface model. To
draw the block, click in the graphics window to set the base point, drag
outward to set the length and width, then drag up or down to set the height.
While the block is live, use the dialog box fields to adjust the dimensions, extend it in
any of the three directions, select a new base point, rotate it, or change the primary
axis.
220 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Create Cone
To create a cone primitive as a solid or surface model, choose this function.
To draw the cone, click in the graphics window to set the base point, drag
outward to set the radius, then drag up or down to set the height. While the
cone is live, use the dialog box fields to adjust the dimensions, extend it in
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Primitives • 221
two directions, select a new base point, change the primary axis, set the top radius, or
change the sweep to create a slice of a cone.
Figure 3-61: Create primitive cone dialog box (expanded)
3
222 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Create Cylinder
You can create a cylinder primitive as a solid or surface model using this
function. To draw the cylinder, click in the graphics window to set the base
point, drag outward to set the radius, then drag up or down to set the height.
While the cylinder is live, use the dialog box fields to adjust the dimensions,
extend the cylinder in two directions, select a new base point, change the primary
axis, or change the sweep to create a slice of a cylinder.
Figure 3-62: Create primitive cylinder dialog box (expanded)
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Primitives • 223
Create Sphere
This function allows you to create a sphere as a solid or surface model. Draw
the sphere by clicking in the graphics window to set the base point. Then
drag outward to set the radius. While the sphere is live, use the dialog box
fields to change the base point, radius, and sweep angle.
Figure 3-63: Create primitive sphere dialog box (expanded)
Create Torus
Choose this function to create a torus as a solid or surface model. Draw the
torus by clicking in the graphics window to set the base point, and dragging
outward to set the major radius. After setting the major radius, drag the
minor radius to the position you want then click to set the minor radius and
create the torus. While the torus is live, use the dialog box fields to change the base
point, major and minor radius, sweep angle and the axis.
224 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
height of the upper rail is set at a height above the top of the solid, and a minimum Z
height of the lower rail at a height below the bottom of the solid.
Note: By default, Autosync Rails selects all lines in your part as sync lines. Before
you begin to create rails using this function, it is recommended that you move
any existing lines in your part to another level and don't display that level while
using the Autosync Rails function.
The Autosync Rails function is only available in installations that include Mastercam
Wire. For additional information, please see topics for AutoSync Rails in Mastercam
Help.
226 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
chapter 4
Modifying Geometry
Mastercam offers a variety of functions and techniques you use to modify geometry.
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Editing Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 227
Transforming Entities (Xform) . . . . . . . . . . . . page 237
Analyzing Entities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 263
Changing Entity Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 278
Editing Entities
Choose basic editing functions from the Edit menu or Trim/Break toolbar in order to:
Modify or join lines, arcs, splines, and drafting entities.
Convert certain types of entities to NURBS splines and NURBS surfaces.
Simplify splines by breaking them into arcs and lines.
This topic introduces these functions and includes examples of how to use them.
TIP: To trim a surface, choose one of the Trim Surface functions from the
Create, Surface submenu. For more information on working with surfaces, see
“Surface Creation” on page 286.
Trim/Break Submenu
Accessed from the Edit menu, the Trim/Break submenu provides functions for
trimming entities. These functions trim entities by cutting them back or extending
them at their intersections.
IMPORTANT: If the 2D/3D Status bar toggle is set to 2D, the entities you
choose to trim or break must lie in the same Cplane. If the intersection
between two entities offers variable solutions, be sure to select each entity on
the part you want to keep. When trimming or breaking entities in 3D, the
curves must have an actual intersection; otherwise a message informs you
that the entities do not intersect and cannot be modified.
In this section, you will learn about each Trim/Break submenu function, including:
Trim/Break/Extend (page 228)
Trim Many (page 232)
Break Two Pieces (page 233)
Break at Intersection (page 233)
Break Many Pieces (page 233)
Break Drafting into Lines (page 234)
Break Circles (page 234)
Close Arc (page 234)
Trim/Break/Extend
Use this flexible function and ribbon bar to:
Trim 1, 2 or 3 selected entities
Trim to a selected point or position
Trim, break or extend an entity to a specified length
Divide entities, based in the nearest intersection
Break and automatically extend selected entities
Figure 4-1: Trim/Break/Extend ribbon bar
Di 3 e ties
s
h
Tri e itie
int
gt
Tri 2 en ty
m nti
m ti
en
vid nt
po
Tri 1 e
l
to
to
k
ea
m
m
Tri
Tri
Tri
Br
When this ribbon bar appears, you can begin trimming to one entity by selecting the
entity to trim then selecting an entity in the location you want to trim to. Or, you can
trim two entities by selecting the first entity then double–clicking the second. For
other ribbon bar options (for example, Trim 3 entities, or Trim to length), choose the
option, then select one or more entities and specify parameters, as necessary.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Editing Entities • 229
Trim 1 Entity
The following examples illustrate how to use the Trim 1 option to select and trim a
vertical line to a horizontal line. The result varies depending on where you select the
vertical line (the entity to trim) before selecting the horizontal line (the entity to which
you are trimming). The visual cue (+) in the left-most image shows where you select
the vertical line; the right-most image shows the resulting trim after you select the
horizontal line.
Example 1
Example 2
Trim 2 Entities
The next examples show how to use the Trim 2 option to select and trim two lines to
their intersection. Again, the result varies depending on where you select the lines.
230 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Trim 3 Entities
The following example illustrates how to use the Trim 3 option. The first two entities
that you select are trimmed to the third, which acts as a trimming curve. The third
entity is then trimmed to the first two. This function is useful for trimming two lines to
a circle that is tangent to both lines. You select the arc last, and the results vary
depending on whether you click the top or the bottom of the arc (the portion you
want to keep).
Figure 4-4: Example Trim 3
Divide Entities
When you choose the Divide function and select an entity in the graphics window,
Mastercam uses the nearest two intersections on each end to divide the entity. It trims
the line or arc into two disjointed segments by removing the segment that lies
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Editing Entities • 231
between two dividing intersections. The following example shows a line trimmed
between two arcs.
Figure 4-5: Example Trim Divide
Note: If only one intersection exists, the selected entity is trimmed to the single
intersection. If no intersection is found on the selected entity, or the point of
intersection is an endpoint of the selected entity, the entity is deleted.
Trim to Point
4
Use this option to trim or extend an entity to a point or any defined position in the
graphics window. If the point that you enter does not lie on the selected entity,
Mastercam calculates the closest position on the entity and trims the entity to that
point. The following example shows an arc that is trimmed (in this case, extended) to
a point that does not lie on the curve.
Figure 4-6: Example Trim to Point
Trim to Length
This option makes it easy to trim or extend a selected entity based on a specified
length. To use this option, first type a value in the Length field. Then select an entity
endpoint in the graphics window. The specified value will be added to or subtracted
from the endpoint of the selected entity.
To extend the entity beyond the selected endpoint, type a positive number.
To trim the entity from the selected endpoint, type a negative number.
232 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: If you select the entity before setting a value in the Length field, the default
value is used (0.1 inch or 1 mm, based on the current configuration unit
setting).
Trim/Break
Use these buttons to toggle between trimming or breaking the entities you have
selected in the graphics window. Selecting Break automatically extends selected
entities that do not intersect.
Trim Many
The Trim Many function and ribbon bar lets you trim (or break) multiple
lines, arcs, or splines to a selected entity without modifying the trimming
curve.
Figure 4-7: Trim Many ribbon bar
t
k
lec
ea
m
p
Se
Tri
Br
Fli
After choosing this function, select one or more entities to trim. Then choose the
entity to trim to and indicate the side of the trimming curve you want to keep. You can
preview the results before accepting the changes. Before accepting the change, you
can also flip the results from one side of the trimming curve to the other, and switch
the results between trimming or breaking the selected entities. The example below
shows four arcs that are trimmed to a line. The dashed line shows the portion of each
arc that is trimmed, which varies depending on which side of the curves you select to
keep.
Note: When you choose the Break option rather than Trim, it disables the Flip
function and the option to select a side of the trimming curve to keep.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Editing Entities • 233
Break at Intersection
Use this simple function to select one or more intersecting line, arc, or
spline entities and break them at each intersection. First, select one or more
intersecting entities to break. Then, press Enter or choose the end selection
function in the General Selection ribbon bar to break the selected entities
where they intersect. 4
Break Many Pieces
Use this function to break selected lines, arcs, and splines into uniform
segments based on the specified number of segments or the distance
between them (segment length).
Figure 4-8: Break Many Pieces ribbon bar
nk
Bla
ce
an
/
de ce
ep
ist
un tan
Ke
dd
ce
Ro t dis
e
er
e/
ran
an
mb
let
ac
es
st
cs
le
Nu
De
Ex
Lin
Di
To
Ar
When breaking an entity, you choose to delete, keep, or blank the underlying
geometry.
Use the Lines and Arcs options to switch between breaking the selected
entity into multiple lines or arcs.
For splines, you can enter a segment Number and Distance or you can
specify a Tolerance based on chord height.
The Exact distance option creates segments of the exact length specified in
the Distance field. If the selected entity cannot be divided evenly, Mastercam
creates as many segments of the exact length as possible, along with a
shorter “remainder” segment.
The Rounded distance option changes the entered Number and/or
Distance values so that the function creates segments of all equal lengths.
234 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
CAUTION: Numbers and letters break into small, individual lines, arcs and
splines that, typically, are not collinear and cannot be rejoined.
Break Circles
This last function in the Trim/Break submenu allows you to break circles
into any number of equal length segments you specify. After choosing the
function, select one or more circles to break, type the number of arcs you
want to break the circles into and press Enter.
TIP: Use the Close arc or Join entities functions to join arcs into circles.
Close Arc
Use this function to select and convert all arcs that are less than 360 degrees
to complete circles by extending their ends to close the arc.
Edit Menu
In addition to the trim/break/extend functions, the Edit menu also includes the
following functions you use to join and modify entities.
Note: For more information on working with surfaces, see “Displaying Surfaces
and Solids” on page 280 and “Working with Surfaces and Solids” on page 280.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Editing Entities • 235
Join Entities
This function is useful when you want to join collinear lines, arcs that have
the same center and radius, or splines that were originally created as the
same entity.
Note: If the two entities you select to join have different attributes, Mastercam
creates a new entity using the attributes of the first entity you select. For
example, if you select a dashed line and a solid line, the lines are joined to create
a single dashed line.
Modify Spline
Use this function to change the shape of a NURBS or parametric spline
entity. From Mastercam's menu, choose Edit, Modify Spline, and then
select a spline entity. All entity control points appear in yellow and remain
4
visible for as long as you work with the selected entity.
To modify the selected entity, click and drag a control point. Mastercam draws the
modified shape or surface using a dashed line style in the highlight color. This
drawing style lets you easily distinguish the modified entity from the original.
Before accepting a change, preview the modification, based on the new control point
position. To accept the new position, click again to release the control point. Continue
to select control points, or exit the function by pressing [Enter].
Note: When you choose to modify a parametric spline, the Modify Spline ribbon
bar displays. Use the End point tangent buttons on the ribbon bar to maintain
tangency conditions.
Convert NURBS
This function allows you to:
Convert lines, arcs, and parametric splines to NURBS splines.
Convert curve-generated and parametric surfaces to NURBS
surfaces.
When you choose this function, no ribbon bar appears but the function is active and
you are prompted to select a line, arc, spline or surface to convert to a NURBS entity.
After selecting one or more entities, press Enter to convert them.
236 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: To change the shape of a NURBS entity, use the Modify Spline function.
Simplify
You can create arcs based on the geometry of circular-shaped splines by
using the Simplify function to convert them to arcs. When working with
arcs instead of splines, you can more easily and accurately reference the
centers of the circular geometry or dimension the circles.
You can also use this function and ribbon bar to convert splines that define lines into
line entities.
Figure 4-9: Simplify ribbon bar
nk
Bla
/
ep
Ke
e c
e/
an
t
lec
let
ler
De
Se
To
Notes:
• Use this function when working with file conversions if geometry that is
supposed to denote circles, arcs, or lines appears as splines.
• The Xform menu provides additional functions you can use to modify entities.
For more information on using Xform functions, see “Transforming Entities
(Xform)” on page 237.
Set Normal
Use this function to set the direction of multiple surface normals to the current
construction plane (Cplane). You can select surfaces before or after choosing the
function.
Figure 4-10: Select normals ribbon bar
No als
als
de m
rm
Hi Nor
t
l ec
ow
p
Se
Sh
Fli
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 237
Change Normal
This function makes it easy to view and reverse a surface normal. When prompted,
select a surface. A normal direction arrow displays.
Figure 4-11: Change normal ribbon bar
Click the surface to reverse its normal. You can then select another surface, or click
OK to finalize your changes.
stretching, rolling, and dragging. With some transform functions, you can also join
the copied entities to the originals to easily create more complex geometry.
Mastercam lets you preview and modify the results of most transform functions
before accepting them. Previewing shows a detailed live image in the graphics
window of the move, copy, or join transformation. The previewed entities are placed
in the position you chose in the function dialog box or ribbon bar. To conserve
resources, Mastercam may display the preview image as a 3D cube or a 2D rectangle
sized in proportion to the results-set area. This occurs most often when transforming,
scaling, mirroring, or rotating larger models (for example, those containing multiple
solids and surfaces or a large number of entities).
When you perform a transform function, Mastercam creates a temporary group from
the original entities and a result from the transformed entities. The system-generated
group and result are indicated by a color change that stays in effect only until you use
the Screen, Clear Colors option or perform another transform function. The default
colors are red for the original group and purple for the result.
Access transform functions from the Xform menu or toolbar. In this section, you will
learn to use the following functions to modify geometry:
TIP: When you translate and join entities, duplicate lines sometimes result
and can interfere with chaining. You can configure Mastercam to automatically
delete duplicate lines created during a join operation by setting this default in
the CAD Settings page of the System Configuration dialog box. For more
information on this and other configuration options, see “Setting Configuration
Defaults and Preferences” on page 836.
Creating the transformed entities on a different level and in a different color from the
original entities can make them easier to identify. To create transformed entities using
the attributes of the original entities, deselect this option.
Translate
Choose the Translate function to move, copy or join entities within the
same view (plane) without altering their orientation, size, or shape. You can
translate all geometric and drafting entity types using:
Rectangular coordinates (X, Y, Z)
Polar coordinates (vector and length)
Between two points (base and new base)
Before accepting the translation, you can preview and flip the results from the first
direction, based on the specified values, to the opposite direction or, choose to create
results in both directions.
240 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: To make the new geometry easy to identify, use the Attributes check box
and fields to create it in a unique color and on a specified level.
Notes:
• To translate between different views (planes), use the Translate 3D function.
• When you translate and join entities, duplicate lines sometimes result and can
interfere with chaining. You can configure Mastercam to automatically delete
duplicate lines created during a join operation by selecting Delete duplicate
entities in File, Open on the Files property page in the System Configuration
dialog box.
• When performing a transform function, Mastercam creates a temporary group
from the originals (red) and a result (purple) from the transformed entities.
These system groups appear in the Groups dialog box. However, they stay in
effect only until you use the Screen, Clear Colors function or perform another
transform function.
• If you are transforming multiple solids, multiple surfaces, or a large number of
lines or arcs, and the Preview check box is selected, Mastercam displays a 3D
cube (for 3D geometry) or a 2D rectangle (for 2D geometry) as a preview. The
final geometry only displays when you choose OK or Apply.
• All edit fields are reset to 0 (zero) each time you enter the dialog box. You can
enter a value or select a value from the MRU (most recently used) drop-down
list.
• When translating entities, if intersecting entities have been partially selected
using a window selection method, you can optionally stretch (lengthen or
shorten) selected lines. Lines are stretched when they cross or intersect the
window used to select the entities. The line endpoints that lie within the
selection window are translated, while the endpoints that lie outside the
selection window maintain their original positions.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 241
The translation result remains live until you accept it. This flexibility allows you to
preview and flip the direction of the results, or create results in both directions.
Translate 3D
Use this function to move or create copies of selected entities between
views (from one plane to another) without altering their orientation, size,
or shape.
242 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To move, rotate, and translate geometric and drafting entity types in 3D, select the two
views you want to work with and define a translation vector using the distance and
angle between any two points you choose in the graphics window. Mastercam
automatically calculates the vector between the views. The first point that you choose
is relative to the first view (source plane). The second point is relative to the second
view (destination plane).
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 243
Mirror
You can create mirror images of geometric and drafting entities with this
function. The entities are reflected symmetrically with respect to the axis
you choose, including:
Horizontal axis of the current construction plane
Vertical axis of the current construction plane
Specified angle
Selected line
Theoretical line defined between two points
Figure 4-14: Mirror dialog box
4
244 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: If your selection contains one or more drafting notes or labels, select the
Mirror label and note text check box to mirror the text relative to the selected
positions. To prevent mirrored text from being turned upside down or
reversed, deselect this option.
When mirroring entities, you can move, copy or join the original entities within the
drawing. First, choose the entities you want to work with. Then, select the type of
mirror image to create. If necessary, you also select specific reference points in the
graphics window where you want to place the mirrored entities.
Rotate
This function makes it easy to move, copy, or join selected geometric and
drafting entities around a center point. You can translate or rotate the
entities around the selected center point by a specified angle. Translating
will rotate the transformed entities without changing the axis orientation.
Rotating transformed entities changes the axis orientation.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 245
The angle is calculated relative to the horizontal axis of the current construction
plane. Entering a positive angle results in a counterclockwise rotation, and a negative
angle results in a clockwise rotation.
When creating more than one copy of the selected entities, you can apply the
specified angle between each copy, or to the entire sweep of copies. You can also
choose to remove selected copies from the results set.
246 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Scale
Scaling allows you to increase or decrease the size of entities by a factor or
percentage relative to a defined point. You can scale all geometric and
drafting entity types using either a uniform or XYZ scale method.
Uniform: Scales the entities by a single factor or percentage on all
three axes. The entities change size while maintaining their original shape.
XYZ: Applies a different scale factor or percentage to each of the axes (XYZ).
The entities not only change size but may change shape as well, appearing to
be stretched or squeezed from their original shape.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 247
When scaling selected entities, you can also choose to move, copy or join them.
Note: If you apply XYZ scaling to a solid, the solid’s history is lost and the
resulting entity is a brick.
Dynamic Xform
Use Dynamic Xform to manipulate geometry orientation and location
through the use of an interactive gnomon in the graphics window. The
gnomon is made up of three axes connected at the origin. There are five
selection points along each axis.
248 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Each segment of the axis line is used to produce a different type of transform motion.
Through the gnomon interaction, you have the ability to translate in both XYZ and
polar format, rotate in a plane about a perpendicular axis, translate along an axis, and
align geometry to other entities.
The major advantage of working with Dynamic Xform is the interaction in the
graphics window. This provides a dynamic visual representation of Mastercam's
transform/translate movements as changes are being made. You also have access to
translate, translate 3D, and rotate all within one powerful function.
Unique to the Dynamic Xform ribbon bar are the Move to origin and Align with axes
options.
Figure 4-20: Dynamic Xform ribbon bar
try
me
M ulat xes
s
eo
in
e
a
ax
g
rig
an te
ov e
oo
th
M pula
M s
Sin iple
wi
ng
et
Se ct
gle
ip
e
i
ign
py
tti
ult
an
ov
le
Se
Co
Al
Select the origin or axes from the drop-down menu, click the appropriate button, and
the gnomon or geometry will move in one easy step.
Translate XYZ/Polar
Use this function to translate entities through XYZ (Delta) or Polar inputs using an
interactive gnomon. The translation can be applied to the gnomon or to geometry
depending on the option selected on the Dynamic Xform ribbon bar.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 249
try
me
M lat xes
Co ve geo
s
te
ip u a
al
a
an te
e
din
nt
M pula
Inc ute
M s
me
Sin iple
or
ng
Se ct
gle
Co
Po a
so
i
py
re
lar
tti
ult
an
le
lt
o
Ab
De
Se
M
Figure 4-22: Translate XYZ/Polar ribbon bar
(when Polar is selected)
try
me
M lat es
Co ve geo
ipu ax
an te
e
4
M pula
M s
Sin iple
ng
th
Se ct
gle
gle
Po a
i
py
lar
ng
tti
ult
an
le
lt
o
An
De
Se
Le
M
Select the axis origin of the gnomon to enter the Translate XYZ/Polar mode. The
positions to move from and to can be entered using the AutoCursor, typing values in
the ribbon bar data fields, or simply by sketching points on the screen. The 2D/3D
construction mode is also respected in the function.
Translate Along
Use this function to translate entities along an axis using an interactive gnomon. The
translation can be applied to the gnomon or to geometry depending on the option
selected on the Dynamic Xform ribbon bar.
Figure 4-23: Translate Along ribbon bar
try
me
M lat es
Co ve geo
ipu ax
an te
e
M pula
M s
Sin iple
ng
th
Se ct
gle
i
py
ng
tti
ult
an
le
o
Se
Le
M
Select the first leg of the axis on the gnomon to enter the Translate Along mode. A
scale is displayed indicating the along direction as well as snap increments which
control the position. The snap increments are controlled through the Gnomon
Settings dialog box. A Length field is available for input on the ribbon bar. The
gnomon or geometry will be translated this length along the selected axis.
250 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Xform Rotate
Use this function to rotate entities about an axis using an interactive gnomon. The
rotation can be applied to the gnomon or to geometry depending on the option
selected on the Dynamic Xform ribbon bar.
Figure 4-24: Xform Rotate ribbon bar
try
me
M lat es
Co ve geo
ipu ax
an te
e
M pula
M s
Sin iple
ng
Se ct
gle
gle
i
py
tti
ult
an
le
p
Se
An
M
Fli
The Xform Rotate mode can be entered in two ways. You can select the axis label to
produce a rotation about a perpendicular axis or you can select the second leg of an
axis to rotate about the opposite axis. AutoCursor selections can be used in rotate as
well as 2D/3D construction modes. The rotation increments are controlled through
the Gnomon Settings dialog box.
Xform Align
Use this function to align entities to existing geometry using an interactive gnomon.
The alignment can be applied to the gnomon or to geometry depending on the option
selected on the Dynamic Xform ribbon bar.
Figure 4-25: Xform Align ribbon bar
try
me
M lat xes
Co ve geo
ipu a
an te
e
M pula
M s
Sin iple
ng
Se ct
gle
i
py
tti
ult
an
le
p
Se
Fli
Select the axis arrow head to enter the Xform Align mode. You can align the selected
entities to a line or solid edge, an arc or spline, or a surface or solid face. The
alignment varies depending on the geometry selected to align to. All forms of
alignment provide a flip option to reverse the direction of the axis. Use the [F] shortcut
key to perform the flip, or you can use the Flip button on the ribbon bar. AutoCursor
positions can be used for alignment.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 251
Move to Origin
Use this function to quickly move all visible geometry to the current WCS
origin based on a point that you select with the AutoCursor.
The Move to Origin function respects the 2D/3D construction mode. In 2D
mode, the point you select with the AutoCursor moves to the XY origin, but
all entities retain their original Z value. In 3D mode, the point that you select with the
AutoCursor moves to 0,0,0 and the Z values of the other entities update respectively.
There is no dialog box for this function. Once you select a point with AutoCursor, the
visible geometry moves to the origin relative to that position.
Note: Translate, Translate 3D, Rotate and other Xform functions offer more
advanced and precise transformation methods.
4
Offset
Use this function to offset one entity at a time. You can move or copy a
single entity parallel to the original; displacing it by a defined distance and
direction. The direction is perpendicular to the entity along every point,
and relative to the current construction plane.
252 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You can create multiple copies and use the Direction button to create parallel entities
on either side of the selected entity or on both sides.
Offset Contour
Use the Offset Contour function to move or copy one or more chained
entities; displacing them by a defined distance and direction and,
optionally, a depth.
Offsets are created perpendicular to the selected entity chains at every
position, relative to the current construction plane.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 253
Choose one of the following Corners options to manage the gaps that result
when you offset a chain of curves outward:
None: Extends the entities until they connect when offsetting the
boundary outward.
Sharp: Creates arcs at sharp corners to connect the entities when
offsetting the boundary outward. A sharp corner has 135 degrees or less.
All: Creates arcs at all corners to connect the entities when offsetting the
boundary outward.
Note: When you offset the boundary inward, the system trims the boundary at
corners.
Project
When you choose this function, Mastercam offers a variety of different
methods you can use to project selected entities, including:
Depth: Projects selected entities to the Z-depth you choose in the
current construction plane.
Plane: Projects selected entities in various positions in 3D space and
squashes them into a flat, 2D plane. Mastercam converts NURBS splines if
they are not parallel to the construction plane.
Surface: Projects curves onto surfaces and solids.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 255
When projecting points onto surfaces, select the Points/Lines check box and button
to access the Project Points dialog box.
256 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Rectangular Array
This function makes it easy to quickly create an array (grid) of entities by
copying selected entities simultaneously in one or two directions, relative
to the construction plane. For each direction, you can specify a unique
number of copies to create, and the offset distance and angle.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 257
Roll
Use the Roll function to wrap lines, arcs, and splines about an axis as
though around a cylinder, or unwrap rolled entities to make them lie flat.
258 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To roll or unroll entities, Mastercam breaks the entities relative to a specified angle
tolerance or two points you select in the graphics window. The points are used to
calculate the translation distance of the rolled/unrolled entities.
The new geometry, called target geometry, is created based on the break points. Use
the Type field to choose the type of target geometry to create, for example Line/Arcs,
Points, or Splines.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 259
Drag
Use the mouse with the Drag function and ribbon bar options to select
entities and dynamically move or copy them to a new position by dragging
and translating or rotating them.
Figure 4-32: Drag ribbon bar
ta e
M e
Ro slat
tch
ipl
te
t
M le
lec
Co e
py
ign
ult
g
re
n
ov
Sin
Tra
Se
St
Al
When translating entities, if intersecting entities have been partially selected using a
window selection method, you can optionally stretch (lengthen or shorten) selected
4
lines. Lines are stretched when they cross or intersect the window used to select the
entities. The line endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated, while
the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original positions.
Notes:
• You cannot drag shaded surfaces.
• The Translate, Rotate, and other Xform functions offer more advanced and
precise transformation methods than are available by dragging entities.
• When rotating geometry, you can use the AutoCursor’s Angular snap setting.
Stretch
Use this function to stretch entities within a single, 2D plane. You can stretch
all geometric and drafting entity types using:
Rectangular coordinates (X, Y, Z)
Polar coordinates (vector and length)
Points (between two locations)
Before accepting the stretch, you can preview and flip the results. You can even create
results in both original and flipped directions.
260 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: To make the new geometry easy to identify, use the Attributes check box
and fields to create the geometry in a unique color and on a specified level.
When performing a stretch function with the Preview option selected, Mastercam
creates a temporary group from the original entities (red) and a result (purple) from
the transformed entities. These system groups appear in the Groups dialog box.
However, they stay in effect only until you use the Screen, Clear Colors function or
perform another transform function.
Note: All edit fields are reset to 0 (zero) each time you enter the dialog box. You
can enter a value or select a value from the MRU (most recently used) drop-
down list.
Stretching Entities
The following examples show a rectangle that is stretched out of its original shape
using the Stretch function. First, use the AutoCursor window selection method to
select two of the rectangle’s intersecting lines. In the Stretch dialog box, specify the
translation position for the selected entities.
Figure 4-33: Example 1, Windows selection
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities (Xform) • 261
Xform STL
STL is an acronym for StereoLithography, a 3D model file type developed by
4
3D Systems, Inc. An STL file is a large collection of oriented triangles that
represent surface and solid models. If you work with STL files, you use this
function to mirror, rotate, scale, offset, and translate STL files.
Select the Bounding Box check box and button to access the Bounding Box dialog
box, and create rectangular or cylindrical boundary around the STL file.
262 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You can save the results to the same file or to a new file.
Chain geometry from the current MCX file or import geometry from
another file.
Set minimum part quantity.
Create filler parts or fill all sheets.
Set margins and spacing.
3 Fine tune to increase yield.
Use the step angle option on the Parts tab to control part rotation.
Change the spacing between parts.
When material surface finish is the same on both sides of the material,
use Mirror to flip parts horizontally.
TIPS:
• Have Mastercam create as many sheets as needed to accommodate the
number of parts by choosing Create necessary sheets on the Sheets tab.
• On the Parts tab, use Fill all sheets to have Mastercam automatically create
4
parts to fill up the material (up to 3500 parts per sheet). Use Filler Quantity
to create a specific number of parts within the nested area.
• Use colors and levels to organize results by setting these options in the
Nesting configuration dialog box.
• Save common sheet sizes to sheet libraries or in individual MCX files.
• Save common parts in MCX files.
• When you require a controlled number of each part in the nesting results,
create a group.
• Use bump nesting to manually edit the nested results while maintaining the
“part-to-part” distance. Click the Delete, Drag, and Customize buttons in
the Nesting Results dialog box to access bump nesting features.
• To read a detailed report about the nesting results, choose Details in the
Nesting Results dialog box.
Analyzing Entities
Use the Analyze menu functions to retrieve analytical data for most elements that
appear in the graphics window. This includes the following entity information:
entity type properties contours positions
database properties distances chains
2D and surface areas angles
264 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
For most functions, you can modify some or all of the information in analyze dialog
box fields.
This topic defines each analyze function and provides you with general instructions
for its use. Analyze menu functions include:
Analyze Entity Analyze Position
Properties (page 266)
(page 264)
Analyze Distance Area/Volume Submenu
(page 267) (page 268)
Analyze Chain Analyze Contour
(page 269) (page 271)
Analyze Angle Analyze Dynamic
(page 272) (page 273)
Number/Database Test Surfaces and Solids
Submenu (page 274) Submenu (page 276)
Changing Entity
Attributes
(page 278)
When you select more than one entity to analyze, a single properties dialog box
appears for the first entity type. The left and right arrow buttons in the dialog box
indicate that you are analyzing more than one entity, and allow you to cycle through
the previous or next entity in the selection group.
266 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The Analyze function remains active until you press the Esc key or close the
properties dialog box, allowing you to select and analyze additional entities.
Entity attribute fields for Level, Color, line Style and Width, or Point style appear in
all properties dialog boxes. Use these fields to modify the attributes of a single entity,
or use the Propagate Attribute Changes apply button to assign the same attributes to
all selected entities. (This button is available only when multiple entities are selected
or when attributes are changed.)
Analyze Position
You can view the XYZ coordinates of a selected position or point entity
using the Analyze Position function.
Figure 4-37: Analyze Position dialog box
This function remains active until you close the dialog box so you can continue to
select and analyze different points or positions.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Analyzing Entities • 267
Analyze Distance
Use this function to analyze the distance between two selected entities or
positions by creating one or more theoretical lines.
Figure 4-38: Analyze Distance dialog box
Based on your selections, you can view information on the point positions (XYZ
coordinates), angle between points or entities, and either the 2D and 3D lengths or,
the minimum and maximum distance. The 3D XYZ delta values (differences) between
the selected points or entities also displays.
268 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: This function does not create geometry or update the properties of the
selected entities.
Area/Volume Submenu
This submenu offers functions for analyzing 2D and surface areas and, if Mastercam
Solids is installed, for analyzing solid properties.
Analyze 2D Area
Use this function to analyze an area you define by selecting curve
boundaries relative to a specified chord height tolerance.
Figure 4-39: Analyze 2D Area dialog box
You can view details on the boundary and perimeter areas, center of gravity, and
moment of inertia about the X and Y axes and about the center of gravity. You can save
the data to a specified file type, filename, and location.
You can optionally save the resulting data to a specified file type, filename, and
location.
TIP: A smaller chord height tolerance value results in a more precise analysis
and a more accurate calculation of area.
Analyze Chain
This function allows Mastercam to analyze the chains you select in order to
identify one or more subtle problems that might be overlooked, including:
Only overlapping entities that are adjacent or all overlapping
entities, regardless of their relative position.
270 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Positions where the chain reverses direction by a value that exceeds the
minimum angle you specify.
Short entities; those with a length smaller than the maximum length value
you define.
Figure 4-42: Analyze Chain dialog box
After analyzing the selected chains, Mastercam reports the number of each type of
problem it finds and highlights the problem areas in the graphics window.
Figure 4-43: Example: Analyze Chain summary
You can optionally create geometry to mark problem areas as they are detected during
the analyze process. This geometry helps you zoom in on problem areas in order to fix
them. Mastercam creates red arcs (circles) for overlapping entities, yellow point
entities for direction reversals, and blue arcs (circles) for short entities.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Analyzing Entities • 271
Analyze Contour
Use the Analyze Contour function to generate a text report containing the
properties of all the entities in one or more chained curves. The curves can
contain lines, arcs, or points (no splines). You can analyze either 2D or 3D
contours. For 2D contours, you can analyze a contour which is offset from
the chained curve, and which uses cornering options, simulating a simple contour
toolpath.
Figure 4-44: Analyze Contour dialog box
4
272 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The generated report opens in your default text editor and lists the properties of each
entity in the chained curves. Before saving the file to a specified location, you can
view and edit the data or add comments, as necessary.
Analyze Angle
This simple function lets you analyze the angles between two lines or three
point that you select in the graphics window. Mastercam displays values for
the first angle and the supplementary angle.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Analyzing Entities • 273
Note: If the lines do not lie in the same plane and do not intersect, only the
Cplane option is available; the 3D option is unavailable.
Analyze Dynamic
You can dynamically view information on any position you choose along
an entity. When you select the entity, you use the cursor to move the arrow
endpoint that appears along the entity to the position you want to analyze.
274 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The information that appears in the dialog box fields for the selected entity type
includes:
Lines—Point and tangent XYZ coordinates.
Arcs and splines—Point and tangent XYZ coordinates and the radius of
curvature.
Surfaces and solid faces—Point XYZ coordinates, the normal XYZ
coordinates, and the minimum radius of curvature.
In the Vector section, you can type a length to view the corresponding endpoint XYZ
coordinates of the vector.
Number/Database Submenu
This submenu offers functions you use to view information based on an entity’s
database properties. Each function and its use is described below.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Analyzing Entities • 275
Analyze Number
Use this function to easily identify and view the properties of an entity
using only the entity number (a database property automatically assigned
to all entities).
Figure 4-48: Analyze Number dialog box
When you type the number of the entity you want to analyze and choose OK, the
properties dialog box for the entity appears and the selected entity is highlighted in
the graphics window.
4
Notes:
• You can also use the Analyze Entity Properties function to select one or more
entities to analyze in the graphics window.
• To identify the entity number of a specific entity, use the Analyze Database
function.
Analyze Database
This function provides database-related information about a selected
entity. You can view the entity number, creation date and time, and number
of references for associations to the entity including:
Geometry (surfaces and dimensions)
Solids
Toolpaths
276 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
This function remains active until you close the dialog box, allowing you to continue
to select and analyze the database properties of different entities.
4
Analyze Check Solids
If Mastercam Solids is installed, you use this function to identify error
conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling operations. If errors
are detected, the Check Solid dialog box appears and lists the default
maximum number of errors (10).
278 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
If no errors are detected, a confirming message appears. When errors are detected,
you can select an error from the list to highlight its location in the graphics window.
TIP: It is possible that there are more errors than can be displayed, based on
the maximum number of errors you set in this dialog box. Reset the Maximum
number of errors to a high value and recheck the solid to see if additional
errors exist.
To modify entity attributes for one or more selected entities, use one of the
following methods:
In the Status bar, position the cursor in the attribute field you want to
modify; this activates the right–click mouse option, indicated by a
change in the mouse pointer. Right–click to choose the option, then select
4
the items to change. When you press Enter, the dialog box for the selected
attribute displays, allowing you to make and apply changes to all selected
entities.
Choose a function from the Analyze menu. Entity attribute fields for level,
color, line style and width, or point style appear in all analyze properties
dialog boxes. You can modify the attributes of a single entity, or use the
Global apply button to apply the attributes to all selected entities.
TIP: You can also use the Status bar Color, Point style, Line style, Line width,
and Level fields to modify the specific attribute for selected entities, or for
entities you will create in the current session.
chapter 5
Working with Surfaces and
Solids
This chapter provides information on Mastercam functions and concepts that are
required to create more complex parts. You will find information on:
Displaying Surfaces and Solids . . . . . . . . . . . page 280
Surface Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 286
Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 313
Additional options that appear in the Shading toolbar area are available only for
Solids. These options include:
dimmed wireframe
no hidden wireframe
outlined shaded
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Displaying Surfaces and Solids • 281
To set the parameters that control shading for the current Mastercam session: 5
Choose the Shade Settings button on the Shading toolbar, or choose
Screen, Shade Settings. For more information, see “Shading Settings” on
page 282.
Choose the Shaded button from the Shading toolbar (if shading a solid,
choose Outlined Shaded), or choose Screen, Shade Settings, and select Shading
Active.
TIP: Press [Alt+S] to toggle shading on or off. This shortcut key does not affect
the type of shading, nor the wireframe outline setting.
282 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Shading Settings
Shading settings control the appearance of shaded surfaces and solids. The Shading
Settings dialog box provides this control. Choose Screen, Shade Settings to open the
Shading Settings dialog box:
Figure 5-3: Shading Settings Dialog Box
Activate or deactivate
shading; shade all entities
or only selected entities.
Define characteristics of
and turn on/off spot lights.
Entity Selection
You can shade all surfaces and solids in the current job or only selected entities.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Displaying Surfaces and Solids • 283
TIP: If you want to shade all surfaces of a three-dimensional object, make sure
you select all surfaces.
Colors
To control the shading color, choose Screen, Shade Settings, and then:
To use the color of the entity as the shading color, choose Entity color. 5
To select a shading color from the color palette, choose Select color. The
current shading color displays. To change it, choose the Colors button, and
then select a color from the palette.
To use a material color, choose Material, and then select a material from the
list. You can create or edit material color settings using the Material dialog
box.
Defining Material Colors
You can define shading colors that simulate materials. Several standard material
definitions are provided (brass, bronze, chrome, copper, gold, silver, various colors of
plastic and rubber). You can edit the standard materials and create new ones.
The material color definitions consist of amounts of red, green, and blue for each of
three kinds of light: ambient, specular, and diffuse. You can also define a shininess
value.
a To edit an existing material, choose the material from the list, and then
choose Edit Material.
b To create a new material, choose New Material.
5 Enter the desired values and name.
Parameters
Lighting
Mastercam provides many lighting options that allow you to create shading effects:
Ambient light is diffuse light shining onto the entity from all directions.
Spot lights are directional lighting. Spot lights can simulate the
diffuse light from a light bulb, or a focused cone of light from a
conventional spot light. You can light the entity using multiple spot
lights.
You can control the intensity and color of both ambient and spot lighting.
Note: You can turn on more than one spot light at a time. A yellow image in the
spot light angle display indicates that the light is on.
286 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Surface Creation
Mastercam offers a wide range of surface creation functions you access from the
Create, Surface menu or toolbar:
In this section, you will also learn about surface modification functions, including:
TIP: Use other Create menu functions to make simple surface rectangles,
rectangular shapes, polygons, ellipses, and primitives. For more information,
see “Creating Miscellaneous Shapes” on page 182.
Surface Representation
Mastercam can represent surfaces in three ways:
parametric
NURBS
curve-generated
Not all surface types are appropriate for all surface creation methods.
A parametric surface is analogous to a parametric spline. A parametric surface
expands each curve segment in another direction, resulting in a patch. A patch is a
surface area bounded by four segments of the generating curves. A parametric surface
requires a large amount of data storage space.
A NURBS (non-uniform rational B-spline) surface is analogous to a NURBS curve or
spline. A NURBS surface expands a string of control points in another direction,
resulting in a grid. It requires less data storage space than a parametric surface but
5
takes longer to process.
A curve-generated surface stores a direct reference to the original curve. It requires less
data storage space than either a parametric or a NURBS surface. Swept, net, and
blend surfaces cannot be curve-generated.
Note: You define the default surface type by choosing Settings, Configuration,
CAD Settings, and then selecting a Spline/surface creation type.
Note: Use the Settings, Configuration, Tolerances properties page to set the
maximum surface deviation. The default is 0.001 inch.
288 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Base Surface
When Mastercam creates a trimmed surface (for example, a fence surface or flat
boundary surface), it also creates an untrimmed, blanked base surface or parent
surface. It uses the base surface for future modifications of the surface. In some cases
(flat boundary surfaces, for example), the base surface boundaries may extend
beyond the visible surface boundaries.
In most cases, you will not use or be aware of the base surface. The following sections
note occasions when the base surface has an effect on an action.
Surface
Base surface
Surface Display
In addition to the shading settings, you can control the appearance of surfaces and
solids by setting:
Surface drawing density.
Highlight on the back of surfaces (wireframe only). Displays the side
opposite the surface normal in a different color (the surface background
color).
Surface background color. Used in wireframe display to highlight the side of
the surface opposite the surface normal.
Surface motion color.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Surface Creation • 289
fte
Ch
Ru
Lo
290 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
When you select curves for a ruled surface, the selected ends of each pair of curves
(curve one and two, two and three, and so on) compose one edge of the surface. When
you select a curve or chain of curves, a temporary arrow displays at the closest
endpoint to show which end is selected.
TIPS:
• To better match curves, or chains of curves, select the curves using the
Sync chaining method (Chaining Options dialog box). This method allows
you to match curves manually or by entity, branch, node, or point.
• As long as the surface is live, you can rechain the curves and switch the
surface between ruled and lofted.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Surface Creation • 291
gle
le
an
ng
file
da
art
is
p
Pro
Ax
En
St
Fli
le
an
ng
file
da
art
is
p
Pro
Ax
En
St
Fli
292 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
ne
Tw a l T
pla
Ro late
No e
rm
eC
tat
ain
ns
Tra
Us
Ch
You can define a swept surface using the following combinations of across (section)
and along (path) chains.
1 across/1 along - Mastercam sweeps one across curve down one along
curve. You have the option to translate or rotate the across curve chain along
the path.
2 or more across/1 along - Mastercam transitions from one across curve to
the next in the order in which you define them while following one along
curve. This is known as a linear blend.
1 across/2 along - Mastercam proportionally scales one across curve
between two along curves.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Surface Creation • 293
5
Creating Net Surfaces
A net surface is created from a network of intersecting curves, generally a
minimum of two across curves and two along curves; there is no
maximum. The curves need not be trimmed, and may be chained in any
order. You can also define an apex point, which is necessary when two or
more of the curves meet at a single point.
Figure 5-17: Net surface ribbon bar
int
po
ain
ex
yle
Ap
Ch
St
294 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: The maximum angle allowed in chaining is 10 degrees. This will prevent
partial chaining from succeeding if you enter an angle value of more than 10
degrees. A warning message will display and you will need to create smoother
chains (10 degrees or less for a maximum angle).
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Surface Creation • 295
od
fac
t
th
igh
gle
ht
ur
le
me
eig
ts
he
an
ng
nd
lec
ain
dh
da
art
art
p
Ble
Se
Ch
En
En
St
St
Fli
TIP: If the curve used to create the fence surface is not trimmed to the base
surface, the fence surface will not be trimmed. Trim the curve before creating
the fence surface.
5
Figure 5-20: Example: Fence surface, cubic blend, untrimmed
You can also flip the surface, reversing the taper angle relative to the chain, and split
the draft surface, which orients it at midplane relative to the chain.
Figure 5-21: Draft Surface dialog box
Note: The resulting draft surfaces are not trimmed nor filleted.
5
298 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Filleting Surfaces
In this section, you will learn to use the following functions in the Create, Surface,
Fillet submenu to fillet selected surfaces:
Fillet Surfaces to Surfaces (page 298)
Fillet Surfaces to Curves (page 300)
Fillet Surfaces to a Plane (page 300)
In some cases, having only one set of surfaces could prove more time-consuming.
For example, if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor all in a
single set, the system looks for intersections between all walls and the floor. If,
however, you select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set
of surfaces, the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the
floor.
300 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Select the surfaces you want to fillet and press [Enter]. Chain the curve to which
you want the surface to be filleted. Click Apply or press [Enter] when done.
Select the surfaces you want to fillet and press [Enter]. Select the plane to which
you want the surface to be filleted. Click Apply or press [Enter] when done.
302 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIPS: Choose Options ( )in the selected fillet surface function dialog box
to set filleting parameters. In the Fillet Surface Options dialog box, you define:
• the type of entities to create
• how closely each resulting fillet surface fits the surfaces to which it is
tangent
• whether Mastercam trims the surfaces
• other parameters that further affect the resulting geometry
Trimming Surfaces
In this section, you will learn to use the following functions in the Create, Surface,
Trim submenu to trim selected surfaces:
Trimming Surfaces to Surfaces (page 302)
Trimming Surfaces to Curves (page 303)
Trimming Surfaces to a Plane (page 303)
When trimming a surface, the trimmed surface is created as a new surface and you
choose to keep or delete the original (base) surface. When trimming surfaces to
surfaces and surfaces to curves, you can also choose to extend the intersection curve
to the edge of the surface (or both surfaces), and split the selected surfaces into
separate surfaces at their intersecting curves.
ce
e
th ce
(tr nd se
dg
bo rfa
th co ce
od to E
Bo se urfa
ce
es
rfa
m s
co ce
Sp Curv
el
tri st
su
Se urfa
2 ( m fir
nd
M
nd
e
s
let
De p
tri
st
lit
te
e
Ke
1(
Fir
Ex
When you choose this option, you are prompted to select the first set of surfaces
you want to trim. When you finish selecting surfaces, press [Enter]. Repeat these
steps on the surface to which you want the first one to be trimmed. Use the ribbon
bar options to modify the selections and click Apply or press [Enter] when done.
e
dg
oE
M es t
ur v s
t c ace
es
v
el
Sp Cur
lec urf
od
Se ct s
al
nd
e
rm
let
De p
lit
le
te
e
Vie
No
Ke
Se
Ex
Use current construction attributes
Select the surface you want to trim and press [Enter]. Chain the curve to which you
5
want the surface to be trimmed and click the part of the surface you want to keep.
You can also choose whether to extend the curves to the surface edge as part of the
trim function, or to split the trimmed surface into multiple split surfaces, based on
the number of intersection curves formed from the trim. Click Apply or press
[Enter] when done.
If the trimming curves do not lie directly on the surfaces, Mastercam projects them
onto the surfaces in order to calculate the intersection where the surface will be
trimmed.
e
ne
let
rfa
ep
lit
De
Sp
Su
Ke
Use this ribbon bar to trim surfaces to a plane. Select the surface you want to trim
and press [Enter]. Select the plane to which you want the surface to be trimmed.
Click Apply or press [Enter] when done.
d
t
r
fse
un
ite
p
Ro
Of
M
Fli
In the graphics window, select a surface, and then select the edge to extend. To extend
the entire edge, press [Enter]. Alternatively, choose a second edge point, to extend the
portion of the edge between the two selected points. Use the Flip button to switch
which portion of the edge that Mastercam extends.
Mastercam extends the edge by the value you enter in the Offset field. Use the Miter
and Round buttons to choose the type of outer corners to create on the new surface.
When extending an edge with the Extend Trimmed Surface Edges function,
Mastercam does not modify the original surface. Instead, Mastercam creates a new
trimmed surface for the extended area.
Extending Surfaces
Choose Create, Surface, Extend to extend a surface by a defined length or to
a selected plane. You can extend the surface linearly or following the
curvature of the surface.
After you select the surface to extend, Mastercam displays a temporary
arrow on the surface. Move the base of the arrow to the location where you want to
extend the surface, and then click to set the extension location.
Figure 5-31: Surface Extend ribbon bar
ar
e
lin
th
e
No r
ne
ea
let
ep
n-
ng
Pla
Lin
De
Ke
Le
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Surface Creation • 305
When Mastercam extends a surface, it creates the extended surface as a new surface,
and you can choose to keep or delete the original surface. You can extend trimmed
surfaces only along untrimmed edges.
When you choose Create, Surface, From Solid, the Surface from Solids ribbon bar
displays. Use the ribbon bar’s buttons to create surfaces with the system or solid
attributes. You can also choose to keep the solid or to delete it after the surface is
created.
s
te
bu es
tri ibut d
t
A ttr lid oli
So te S
t
m
ts e lid A
lec
p
e l e
se
Sy So Ke De
Re
306 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: When it creates the trimmed flat boundary surface, Mastercam also
creates a blanked, untrimmed base surface that extends beyond the boundary of
the trimmed surface. Although you will rarely use this base surface, it can affect
how holes are filled in trimmed surfaces. For more information, see “Filling
Holes with Surfaces” on page 307.
A single closed chain defines the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface. Chains
nested entirely within this boundary form holes in the surface. If the chain is not
completely enclosed within the first boundary chain, Mastercam creates a separate
surface. You can create multiple surfaces by selecting chains that are not nested.
If you select open chains, Mastercam prompts you to close them automatically. You
can close the chains or remove the open chains from the calculation of the trimmed
surface. If you close the open chains, Mastercam calculates (but does not create) a
curve between the two open endpoints for the purpose of defining the closed
boundary.
Figure 5-32: Flat Boundary Surface ribbon bar
s
ain
ch
in
ha
w
s
ain
lC
ne
ch
ua
ct
an
le
d
Ad
Se
TIP: When you create a flat boundary surface, Mastercam keeps the entities
that were chained to create it and places the new surface in the same location
as those entities. To work with or view the new flat boundary surface more
easily, either delete, hide, or move the original entities, or move the new
surface.
In the Flat Boundary Surface ribbon bar, click Manual Chain ( ) to open the
Chain Manual ribbon bar.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Surface Creation • 307
ce
ran
ol e
ct
pT
le
Ga
Se
Use this ribbon bar to select surface edges and curves, and to set a gap tolerance
between flat boundary surfaces.
When filling holes in a flat boundary surface, if you select the outer boundary as the
boundary to be filled, Mastercam fills the area between the outer boundary of the flat
boundary surface and the blanked base surface, which extends beyond the flat
boundary surface.
Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary, this dialog box does not
display. Mastercam closes the hole by creating a trimmed surface within it.
If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary
does not touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface
308 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface
of a flat boundary surface always extends beyond the outer boundary of the
flat boundary surface.
If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary
does touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of
whether the base surface is currently displayed or is blanked), the hole that
gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed
boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the
untrimmed boundary, as shown in the following example.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Surface Creation • 309
Note: The Fill Holes with Surfaces function differs from the Remove Boundary
from Trimmed Surface function in which Mastercam removes the trimmed
boundaries and recreates the surface; it does not create a new surface to fill the
holes.
Note: This function differs from the Fill Holes function in which Mastercam
creates trimmed surfaces to fill the holes. When using Fill Holes, no trimmed
boundaries are removed.
5
Splitting Surfaces
When you split a surface, you break it along one of its constant parameter
directions, which are the two directions Mastercam uses to generate the
surface. Mastercam then creates two trimmed surfaces within the same
boundary. If the break point you select permits the surface to be broken in two ways,
Mastercam prompts you to select the direction along which you want to split it.
Figure 5-35: Split Surface ribbon bar
s
tri s
te
At te
)
bu
ce ibu
n
tio
rfa ttr
ec
Su m A
dir
(sp ip
st e
Fl
lit
Sy
Use this ribbon bar to break a surface at a fixed position along one of the surface
directions. Select the surface to split. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the
surface. Select surface or system attributes to determine the properties of the split
surface. This selection will set color, level, line style, and line thickness.
310 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
(You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view.)
Use the cursor to move the base of the arrow to the position you want the split to pass
through on the surface (the fixed position), then click to set the position. The surface
is split when you click Apply or OK.
Untrimming Surfaces
When you untrim a trimmed surface, Mastercam returns the surface to its
base surface.
Figure 5-36: Untrim Surface ribbon bar
e
os
ep
sp
Ke
Di
Use this ribbon bar to untrim previously trimmed surfaces. As soon as you select a
trimmed surface, Mastercam untrims it and returns its base surface to the graphics
window. Use the Keep and Dispose buttons to set whether to keep or dispose of the
trimmed surface.
Blending Surfaces
In this section, you will learn to create blended surfaces using functions in the Create,
Surface submenu. These functions allow you to smooth out part of a surface model
by eliminating unwanted features.
5
When you choose one of these blend functions, Mastercam prompts you to select the
first surface. When you make your selection, Mastercam displays a temporary arrow
on the surface. Move the base of the arrow to where you want to blend the new surface
to the existing surface. Then click to set the blend location. You can type [F] to flip the
curve, or press [Enter] to select the curve as is. You can also click another surface to
select it. This action finalizes the previous curve selection. When you have picked all
required surfaces, the Surface Blend dialog box displays, and the surface appears as a
“live” entity. Use the dialog box to perform further editing.
312 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The following examples illustrate blends created from the same two surfaces using
different parallel and perpendicular blend directions.
This function is useful for rounding the corners of a filleted box. It is similar to
blending three surfaces. However, the location where the blend surface(s) are tangent
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 313
to the fillet surfaces is calculated, not selected. When you choose this option, you are
prompted to select the three intersecting surface fillets in the graphics window. Before
blending the selected filleted surfaces, use options in the 3 Fillet Blend dialog box to:
reselect the three surface fillets, as necessary
indicate whether to create a blend surface with three or six sides
optionally trim surfaces and keep lines
Solids
Unlike wireframe and surface models, which consist of multiple curves and surface
entities, a solid model is a single entity, regardless of its complexity. However, a solid
model may consist of several solid bodies.
You work with a solid model as a whole, like molding a piece of clay. For example,
whether you add fillets to a solid, hollow it out, or combine it with another solid, the
resulting solid model remains a single entity. Each Mastercam function you perform
on a solid entity is saved as a separate operation on the solid. In the Solids Manager,
you can view a complete history of the operations used to create a solid, and move,
edit, or delete them.
Because a solid is a closed, organized model, Mastercam manages the interior and
exterior of the model for you, handling the complexities of the model “behind the
5
scenes.” This makes it easy to work with solid modeling. When you create or edit
operations on a solid, Mastercam automatically determines the surfaces to keep or
trim in order to maintain the solid as a single entity.
Basic solid model functions include extrude, revolve, sweep, loft, fillet, and shell. This
section provides an overview of how to create, select, and perform operations on solid
models. You will also learn to use the Solids Manager and its right–click menus to
manage and modify solids and their operations. Topics in this section include:
Creating a Solid Model: Process Overview (page 314)
Solids Associativity (page 315)
Selecting Solids (page 317)
Combining Solid Operations (page 318)
Working with Solid Functions (page 319)
Solids Manager (page 345)
Editing Solid Models (page 350)
314 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Solids Associativity
Solids associativity is the dependent relationship between a solid, the operations that
define it, and any geometry selected in its definition. When you perform a solid
operation such as extrude, fillet, or draft face, Mastercam associates the operation
with the solid that it creates or modifies. This association can be broken only by
deleting the operation.
Because an operation is associated with the solid that it creates or modifies, you
cannot copy operations or move them to a different solid. For example, when
rechaining a fillet operation, all of the new edges that you select must be on the same
solid where the operation was originally defined. To fillet edges on a different solid,
you must create a new fillet operation on that solid.
5
Associativity eliminates the need to recreate a solid each time you modify it. After
editing an operation’s components (geometry and parameters), you can regenerate
the solid to incorporate your changes. The following terms describe a solid operation
and the current state of its associativity.
Figure 5-39: Solids Manager operation states
Clean operation
Dirty operation
Invalid operation
316 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: When you delete a Boolean operation, Mastercam restores the operation's
tool bodies as distinct, active solids. You can also duplicate a tool body to obtain
an active copy of the solid.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 317
Selecting Solids
Use the General Selection ribbon bar to select entities in the graphics window. This
ribbon bar operates in two different modes: Standard Selection and Solid Selection.
The availability of either mode is based on the types of entities that are in the current
file and the functions you choose from Mastercam menus and toolbars.
If there are no solids in your file, the Solid Selection mode is not available; you can use
only Standard Selection options.
Figure 5-40: Standard Selection mode
If you choose a Mastercam function specific to a solid entity, the General Selection
ribbon bar automatically switches to the Solid Selection mode. Mastercam solid
selection is very flexible. In Solid Selection mode, you can choose from a variety of
solid selection options, including select edge, select face, select body, select from
back, and select last.
5
Figure 5-41: Solid Selection mode
Note: The Verify, UnSelect All, End Selection, and Help options are always
available, regardless of the current selection mode.
For example, if the part file you are working with contains a surface and a solid entity,
and you want to create toolpaths for both entities, choose a toolpath function from
the Toolpath menu. Then use the Activate Solid Selection and Standard Selection
options to toggle between the two modes and select the appropriate entities.
TIP: When creating toolpaths in files that contain both solids and other entity
types, the order in which you select and chain entities is defined by the
options you choose in the Surface options dialog box.
Note: A brick is a solid body with no history. Brick solids may be imported, may
be the result of a file conversion or translation from other solid modeling
software, or may be created by trim or Boolean (Remove, Common) operations
that result in a body being split into more than one piece. In the Solids Manager,
a brick is identified as a solid in which the word “Body” is the first entry in its
operation history (added when a brick is edited).
Chamfer Functions
(page 328)
(page 338)
Solid Extrude
The Solid Extrude function allows you to extrude planar chains of curves
and create:
One or more new solid bodies
Cuts on an existing body
Bosses on an existing body
Mastercam extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves along a linear
path using a specified direction, distance, and other parameters that further define
the results. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of
chains that you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine
operations, and what construction method you use.
320 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• With both thin-wall and non-thin-
wall extrusions, you can reverse the
normal direction.
• The extrusion direction cannot be parallel to the plane defined by the selected
chains of curves because you cannot extrude a chain sideways.
Notes:
• The Extrude operation can have more than one chain only if there is an
outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains, and
all of the nested chains are in the same plane. The chains that are nested
within this boundary form cutouts in the solid. You cannot use the thin-wall
construction method in this case.
• You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of
curves, which defines the outer boundary, or cross section, of the solid.
• Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new
operation or solid.
Solid Revolve
You can revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid
bodies, cuts on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. This
function revolves chains of curves by driving the shape of the curves about
a selected axis, using the start and end angles, and other parameters you
322 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
provide. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of
chains that you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine
operations, and what construction method you use.
Figure 5-43: Solid Revolve dialog boxes
Note: The rotation direction follows the right-hand rule, with the axis direction
vector representing the positive Z axis.
Notes:
• You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of
curves, which defines the outer boundary, or cross section, of the solid.
• The Revolve operation can have more than one chain only if there is an
outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. The
chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid and lie in
the same plane. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case.
• To edit the rotation axis of a revolved solid, cut, or boss, you must edit the
solid’s parameters.
Solid Sweep
Use the Solid Sweep function to sweep closed, planar chains of curves,
called section chains, to create one or more new solid bodies, cuts on an
existing body, or bosses on an existing body. Mastercam sweeps chains of
curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire
distance of a single chain of curves, called the path chain. The angle between the
section chains and the path chain is maintained throughout each resulting swept
solid. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of
chains that you select, whether the chains are nested, and whether you combine
5
operations.
Figure 5-44: Solid Sweep dialog box
Notes:
• You cannot delete the base chain.
• The Sweep operation can have more than one section chain only if there is an
outermost chain that defines a closed boundary around the other chains. The
chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts in the solid.
Solid Loft
You can loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body, a cut on an
existing body, or a boss on an existing body. When you use this function,
Mastercam performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more
chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or
ruled (linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last chains
with solid faces. The start point of each chain and the sync method that you use when
selecting the chains affect how Mastercam aligns the selected chains as it transitions
between them.
Figure 5-45: Solid Loft dialog box
For a Loft operation to succeed, the selected chains of curves must meet the following
criteria:
Each individual chain of curves must be planar; however, the set of chains
that you select does not have to be planar.
Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary.
All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction.
You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation.
A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 325
IMPORTANT: Fillets that you create on the edges of selected faces or whole
solid bodies are associative. If you add edges to or remove them from a
filleted face or body, the entire face or body remains filleted, regardless of the
change.
The faces within each set need not be contiguous with each other nor adjacent to the
faces in the other set. The resulting fillet blends the first face in each of the two sets
and continues across other faces in the sets to the extent that a single continuous fillet
can be created.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 327
The Face-Face Fillet Parameters dialog box options allow you to create both rolling-
ball and constant curvature fillets by selecting the constant radius, constant width,
constant width-ratio, single hold line or double hold line methods. Use other options
5
to propagate fillets along tangent faces and designate a Help Point.
Figure 5-50: Face-Face Fillet Parameters dialog box
328 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Chamfer Functions
A chamfer, or beveled edge, is a type of edge blending that has a linear cross section.
You chamfer solid edges by introducing new faces that add material to or remove
material from the selected edges and that are not tangent with the adjoining faces of
the original edge. You determine the extent of the chamfer by specifying distances
and, optionally, an angle to offset the chamfer from the selected edge on the adjoining
faces.
Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are
associative. If edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body, the
entire face or body remains chamfered, regardless of the changes.
Mastercam provides three functions you can use to define where the chamfer is
positioned along the edge faces:
One Distance
Two Distances
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 329
If you create a chamfer using either the Two Distances or the Distance and Angle
function and you select an edge to chamfer, you must also select a reference face to be
used to calculate the resulting chamfer. The reference face can be either one of the
two faces that are adjacent to the selected edge, also referred to as edge faces.
Mastercam uses the reference face to make the following calculations, according to
the chamfer method that you select:
For chamfers created using the Two Distances function, the reference face is
used to measure the value of the Distance 1 parameter from the selected
edge. Mastercam then applies the second value (Distance 2) to the other
edge face.
5
For chamfers created using the Distance and Angle function, the reference
face is used to measure the specified distance and angle from the selected
edge.
When you select an edge to chamfer, Mastercam highlights the default reference face
and displays the Pick Reference Face menu to give you the option to select the other
edge face.
You are not required to select a reference face in the following cases:
For selected faces. Mastercam chamfers all edges associated with the face
and uses the face itself as the reference face for all of the edges. If you select
two faces that share an edge, the first face that you select defines the
reference face for the shared edge.
When the One Distance chamfer function is used. A chamfer created with
this method is symmetrical, and the same chamfer distance is used for both
edge faces.
Solid Shell
To hollow solid bodies with the Solid Shell function, choose the material to
remove and, optionally, select the faces you want to remain open. The
remaining faces are thickened by the amount you specify. You can re-select
the geometry that defines a shell operation for editing.
Figure 5-51: Shell Solid dialog box
Note: When editing the geometry that defines a shell operation, changes that
would result in the creation of a new operation or solid are not supported.
If you select individual faces on a solid, Mastercam hollows the solid, opens the
selected faces to form entry holes into the solid, and thickens the remaining faces to
form the solid’s shell.
If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces, Mastercam removes the
material from the interior of the solid, which leaves a void, and thickens the solid’s
faces to form the solid’s shell.
When you shell whole solids, there are no entry holes into the solid, and you cannot
see into the solid if it is shaded. However, you can view the void in the interior of the
solid if you use translucent shading. Similarly, you can turn on the display of hidden
lines to distinguish the solid’s inner walls. For more information, see “Displaying
Surfaces and Solids” on page 280.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 331
Solid Trim
Use the Solid Trim function to trim selected solids to a plane, to a surface,
or to an open sheet body. You can also choose whether or not to keep what
was trimmed as new bricks (solid bodies with no history) and change the
trimming direction.
Figure 5-52: Trim Solid dialog box
5
Solid Thicken
The Solid Thicken function allows you to thicken an open sheet solid and
thereby convert it into a closed solid body. You can use this function in
conjunction with the From Surfaces (stitch surfaces into solids) function to
turn selected surfaces into a solid that can be managed like any other solid
created in Mastercam.
Note: For more information on stitching surfaces into solids, see “Solid From
Surfaces” on page 340.
332 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
5
You can draft virtually any solid face, regardless of whether the solid was created in
Mastercam or imported from an external file format. For example, a filleted face can
be drafted, which changes its geometry from cylindrical to planar, like a chamfered
face.
When a face is drafted, the adjacent faces are trimmed and/or extended to
accommodate the new geometry of the drafted face. If the adjacent faces are unable
to accommodate the new geometry, the operation fails. Failure is more likely to occur
with larger draft angles or if adjacent faces are tangent (or near tangent) and are not
also being drafted. In some cases, drafting results in faces being deleted from the
solid.
The Draft Faces function provides various methods you can use to draft solid faces.
The method that you choose determines where a drafted face hinges. Each method is
described below.
Draft to Face—Drafts solid faces using a planar reference face. You select the planar
reference face that is used to calculate where the drafted face hinges and the draft
direction. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face
selected to be drafted) and the reference face. The hinge point can be located on or
off the solid. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference face, and the
draft angle is measured with respect to the direction.
334 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Face to be
drafted
Planar reference face
Drafted face
Original face (replaced
by drafted face)
Faces extended to
accommodate
drafted face
Draft to Plane—Drafts solid faces using a defined reference plane. You define the
reference plane used to calculate where the drafted face hinges and the draft
direction. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face (the face
selected to be drafted) and the reference plane. The hinge point can be located on
or off the solid. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference plane, and the
draft angle is measured with respect to the direction.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 335
Draft to Edge—Drafts solid faces using one or more reference edges. You select one or
more edges on each face being drafted. The reference edges that you select define
the hinge points for the drafted faces. The draft direction is defined by a selected
linear edge or planar face. For a linear edge, the draft direction follows the edge.
For a planar face, the draft direction is perpendicular to the face. The draft angle is
measured with respect to the direction. The following examples show a face that is
successfully drafted using multiple reference edges that were selected along the
5
bottom of the left-most face.
Figure 5-59: Example 1: Draft to Edge
336 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Draft Extrude—Drafts solid faces for an extrude operation. This option is enabled
when all of the faces in your selection are lateral faces (walls) swept out during an
extrude operation. You select these lateral faces. The drafted faces hinge at the
intersection of the original faces (the faces selected to be drafted) with the planar
chains of curves that defined the original extrude operation. The draft direction
follows the extrusion direction, and the draft angle is measured with respect to this
direction. The following examples show an extruded solid whose lateral faces have
been drafted along the extrusion direction. The curves that defined the original
extrude operation form the hinges for the drafted faces.
Figure 5-61: Example 1: Draft Extrude
Boolean Operations
You can construct a solid using combinations of two or more existing solids using
Boolean functions to add solids together, remove solids from one another, and find
the common region defined by overlapping solids. For a Boolean Remove or Common
operation, you can choose whether or not to maintain associativity.
Boolean operations are a set of functions (Add, Remove, and Common) that enable
solid construction using combinations of two or more existing solids. Solids can be
added together, and removed (subtracted) from one another. Common regions
defined by solids can be kept while all other material is removed. For each Boolean
function, a target body and one or more tool bodies must be selected. The result of a
Boolean operation is always a single solid, regardless of the number of tool bodies
5
selected.
To initiate a Boolean operation that maintains associativity, choose Boolean
Add, Boolean Remove, or Boolean Common from the Solids menu.
Boolean Add Boolean Remove Boolean Common
Whichever function you choose, you must then identify a target body. This is the solid
that material is added to, removed from, or overlapped. Next you select one or more
tool bodies, which are the solids that are added to, removed from, or overlapped with
the target body. To perform the operation, choose the End selection option from the
General selection ribbon bar.
338 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
In Mastercam, you cannot create disjoint bodies and maintain associativity between
them. If a Boolean Remove or Common regions operation fails because it would
create a disjoint body, you are informed and asked if you want to create a non-
associative Boolean (a brick solid). To continue the Boolean operation and display the
Solid non-associative Boolean dialog box, choose Yes. To cancel the Boolean
operation, choose No.
When operating on a brick, the Find Features function modifies the solid by removing
5
features and adding operations to its history, while maintaining the modified brick as
a solid body at the top of the history tree. The Find Features function only recognizes
features on imported brick solids or on brick solids created in Mastercam from
stitching, Boolean, or trim operations.
IMPORTANT: The Find Features function does not recognize solid bodies
with dirty, invalid, or suppressed operations. Regenerate these solids and
restore them to a clean state before using the Find Features function. For more
information on using the Solid Manager Suppress function, see “Suppress
Solid Operations” on page 346.
If Mastercam cannot create a closed solid body, a message asks if you want to create
edge curves on open edges.
To select a color for the edge curves and create an open sheet body with
edge-curve geometry, choose Yes.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 341
To create the open sheet body without edge-curve geometry, choose No.
You can change an open sheet body into a closed solid body by using the Thicken
function to thicken it. For more information, see “Solid Thicken” on page 331.
TIP: To set default stitching parameter values for the Stitch Surfaces into
Solid(s) dialog box, from the Mastercam menu choose Settings,
Configuration, Solids.
Layout
The Solid Drawing Layout function lets you create a layout of different part views (for
example, top, side, front, and isometric), arranged within a page you define.
Figure 5-66: Example: Solids Drawing Layout
You can set the page size and orientation, and select the view layouts to
include. Standard layouts, include:
4View DIN: bottom, front, left, and isometric views
4View ANSI: top, front, right, and isometric views
3View DIN: bottom, front, and left views
3View ANSI: top, front, and right views
You can choose from a list of standard page sizes, or select a template file to define the
page. Mastercam adds borders and any other entities in the template to the drawing
layout.
Use the following guidelines to create a solid drawing layout.
Define basic layout parameters in the Solid drawing layout (create) dialog
box.
342 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Place the drawing layout on its own level to keep it separate from the part
entities.
Before creating the layout, Mastercam automatically displays the Levels
dialog box, where you select the level to use.
If your part file contains multiple solids, after choosing the drawing layout
level use General Selection to select the solids to include.
Then use the Solid drawing layout (edit) dialog box to further customize your
layout. You can add or remove views. You can also add a cross-section or a
detailed area to the drawing.
Figure 5-67: Create Solid Drawing Layout dialog box
Once you create the basic layout from this dialog box, you can use the Edit Solid
Drawing Layout dialog box options to customize it further by editing settings such as
Hidden Lines, Paper Size, or Scale Factor. You can also add, remove, and modify views.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 343
To add a cross-section view to the drawing layout, choose the Add Section
button. You can define the cross-section view based on a straight horizontal
or vertical line through any point in the part, a zigzag cross-section, or a 3D
plane. In addition to selecting the point(s) or plane where you want the
section to divide, you can set a color, scale factor, and location for the section
view. When you create a section view, short line segments are added to all the
applicable views, showing the precise location and orientation of the section.
Use the Add View button to add a defined view to the drawing layout, and
optionally, choose a color and scale factor for the new view.
344 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The Add Detail button allows you to create detail drawings that zoom in on
small sections of a part. You can define a detail view using a rectangle or
circle. In addition to defining a zoom area for the detailed view, you can set
the color, scale factor, and location of the new view.
TIPS:
• You can create multiple drawing layouts in the same part file. Each time you
create a new layout, make sure you select a new level for it (unless you
want to replace an existing layout).
• Use the Radial display angle check box in the Create Drawing Layout dialog
box to add or remove radial display lines. These lines represent the
surfaces of closed, circular solids (cones, cylinders, spheres, tori). When
selected, the angle you set defines the position and number of radial lines
that are created.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 345
Solids Manager
Use the Operations Manager pane in the Mastercam window to access the Solids
Manager tab and view information on each solid in the current file.
Figure 5-69: Solids Manager
5
You can expand the tree structure of a solid to view all operations that were performed
to construct the solid and view any toolpaths that were created on the solid.
Besides listing the operations that define a solid, the Solids Manager tab provides
options for managing and editing solids and solid operations. To access these options,
right–click a solid or operation in the list. The following section describes how to use
the Solids Manager and some of the functions you can perform.
Note: Solids that you import from other applications have no operation history
and are referred to as “bricks”; the Solids Manager tab reflects only the
operations that you perform on the imported solid once it is in Mastercam.
IMPORTANT: You cannot use the Undo Event function, available from the
Edit menu, to reverse changes made from the solid operation history tree.
Topics in the next section introduce the tools you use to work with solid models,
including:
346 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To suppress an operation:
1 From the Solids Manager tab, select the solid operation to suppress.
2 Right–click and verify that the operation is not already suppressed (no check
mark appears next to this option in the menu).
3 Choose Suppress. This activates the feature for the selected operation and
removes the operation from view in the graphics window. In the right–click
menu for the selected operation, a check mark indicator appears next to the
Suppress function and the icon in the Solids Manager appears unavailable.
To restore a suppressed operation, select it from the Solids Manager, right–click and
choose Suppress from the menu. Mastercam restores the operation to the graphics
window and removes the check mark from the function in the menu.
Notes:
• While an operation is suppressed, you cannot edit its parameters or geometry
or select it for use in any other operation.
• This function is not available for base operations.
• If an operation does not appear in the graphics window but does not have a
check mark next to the Suppress option, it is dependant on a prior operation
and that operation is suppressed. The dependant operation can be viewed
(unsuppressed) only by unsuppressing the operation on which it is dependent.
TIP: When a solid is rolled back, operations that you perform are added to the
end of the active operations in the model (before the stop point) instead of at
the end of the operation list. Therefore you may find the roll back function a
useful way to insert an operation in the middle of the operation list instead of
adding it to the end of the list and then dragging it to the correct position,
which sometimes fails due to operation dependencies.
Notes:
• The stop operation is inserted after the operation on which you release the
mouse button.
• To return the solid to its original state, drag the Stop Op icon to the last
operation in the list. When you release the mouse button, the operation is
inserted after the final operation in the list.
348 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: You can also rename an operation by editing the operation’s parameters
and entering a new name in the Name field.
Mastercam matches the selected geometry with the operation defined by the
geometry.
5
This function is particularly useful when you are working on a complex solid that has
a large number of operations. You can quickly identify the operation you are looking
for rather than checking multiple operations using highlighting.
operations, you can edit only their geometry. To change the actual Boolean and Trim
operations, you must delete and recreate them.
Note: Although they appear in the dialog box, the Line Style and Line Width
fields are not currently used with solid models.
4 To accept your changes and exit the dialog box, choose OK.
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 353
TIP: You can also use the Analyze function from the Analyze menu to edit the
level and color attributes of a selected solid. For more information, see
“Changing Entity Attributes” on page 278.
Note: When you delete operations, Mastercam marks the corresponding solid
with a dirty status. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the
model.
Regenerate Solids
Regeneration is the process of rebuilding a solid so that it matches its associated
operations. This is required whenever a solid becomes dirty or invalid due to changes
to the parameters and/or geometry of one or more of its operations. When you
regenerate a solid, Mastercam incorporates your changes into the solid and restores
the solid to a clean state, if possible. Regeneration fails if a solid has one or more
invalid operations. You must edit and correct invalid operations before you can
successfully regenerate them.
354 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: To regenerate all operations, choose the Regen All button in the Solids
Manager or choose Regen All Solids from the right–click menu.
Duplicate Solids
You can make exact copies of solids, including tool bodies. Each copy is an active solid
that you can select and edit. This function is particularly useful if you want to use the
same tool body to affect different target solids.
To duplicate a solid:
1 From the Solids Manager, select the solid to copy.
2 Right–click and choose Duplicate Solid. The duplicate solid and all
operations appear directly below the original in the Solid Manager tree.
Note: The Duplicate Solid option appears in the right–click menu only when
you have selected a solid—not a solid operation—in the Solids Manager.
3 Use Rename and other functions to edit the cloned copy of the solid, as
necessary.
change the order by dragging operations to new positions in the operation list.
Mastercam automatically rebuilds the solid based on the new operation order.
The selected operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it. As you
drag an operation, the cursor changes to a downward arrow if the move is allowed or
to a circle with a slash through it if the move is not allowed.
Observe the following guidelines when repositioning operations:
A base operation cannot be repositioned; it is fixed as the first operation in
the list. No other operation can precede it.
If you move an operation that is dependant on one or more operations, it
must occupy a position below its “parent” operations.
If you move an operation on which other operations are dependant, you
must position it above its dependant operations.
5
356 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
chapter 6
Working with Toolpath
Operations
This chapter provides an overview of the machining process within Mastercam and
discusses some of the ways in which you set up your machining jobs. You will also
learn how to work with basic and advanced toolpath functions, including:
Mastercam Machining Workflow. . . . . . . . . . page 359
Choosing a Machine Definition . . . . . . . . . . page 360
Opening/Importing/Merging Part Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 361
Creating Machine Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 369
Toolpath Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 386
Selecting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 403
Using the Toolpath Parameters Right-Click Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 407
Editing Toolpath Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 407
Managing Toolpath Operations . . . . . . . . . . . page 422
Multi-Threaded Toolpath Processing . . . . . . page 433
Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 438
Backplotting Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 449
Verifying Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 453
Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 460
Power User Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 465
358 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
3 Set the machine group properties, including file, tool, stock, and safety zone
settings.
4 Use the following guidelines to create toolpaths and apply them to geometry.
a Choose a toolpath type from the Toolpaths menu.
b Using the dialog boxes and prompts that display, chain geometry or select
points or other entities, as necessary.
c Select the tool and refine the tool parameters.
d Set toolpath parameters to define and create the toolpath operation.
TIP: You can also select pre-defined toolpath operations from a library and
apply the operation to selected geometry. For more information, see
“Importing Operations” on page 468 and “Exporting Operations” on page 469.
5 Verify and edit the toolpaths using the Toolpath Manager, Backplot, and
Verify functions.
6 Post process the selected machine group operations to create the NC code
output for your machine control.
definition, so that when you select the machine definition, the control gets selected
with it.
When you select a machine from the Machine Type menu, several other things
happen:
A post processor is automatically selected.
Mastercam loads a set of operation defaults (.DEFAULTS file).
Mastercam’s interface changes to match the selected machine. If you select a
lathe, for example, the Toolpaths menu lists only Mastercam Lathe
toolpaths. In addition, the toolbars change to match the selected machine.
For example, when you select a lathe machine definition, toolbars for lathe
toolpaths and functions are displayed instead of mill functions.
Use the Files of type drop-down list to choose the format of the files you want to view
and select from. This limits the files you can view to only files in the selected format.
If you select a non-native file type from the Files of type list, Mastercam enables the
Options button. Use this button to open a dialog box of read parameters for the
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Opening/Importing/Merging Part Files • 363
selected file type. Mastercam uses the parameters to import and convert the chosen
file. The example below illustrates options for opening and importing an SAT file type:
Note: The default values in read parameters dialog boxes are based on settings
defined in the Settings, Configuration, Converters properties page. For more
information, see “Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences” on page 836.
To navigate to the location of the file you want to open, use the Look in drop-down list
located at the top of the Open dialog box. Or use additional options in this dialog box
to view and select the file: 6
Back: Return to a previously viewed folder.
Up one level: Navigate and view files in the next highest level directory/
subdirectory.
View Menu: View files in list, tile, icon, detail, or thumbnail format.
364 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Previewing a File
In the Open dialog box, activate the Preview and Descriptor panes with the Preview
and Descriptor check boxes. Use the Preview pane to see a thumbnail of a selected
file. The Descriptor pane shows the text descriptor associated with the file. To browse
files faster, deselect the check boxes to turn off the Preview and Descriptor options.
Figure 6-3: The Preview and Descriptor panes
Notes:
• If you do not have Mastercam Solids installed, you can still machine an
imported solid. However, Mastercam Solids must be installed to modify a solid,
or create additional solids (with the exception of primitives).
• You can also save .MCX files out to any supported file format. For more
information on the files types you can import and export, see “Opening and
Translating Files” on page 56.
Note: Mastercam part files from X3 and the initial version of Mastercam X are
not compatible, even though they both have an .MCX extension. Mastercam
automatically translates older Mastercam X files to the X3 format when you
open them.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Opening/Importing/Merging Part Files • 367
TIP: If you also want Mastercam to check for and delete duplicate entities at
the same time, use the Settings, Configuration function Start/Exit properties
page to set this default. Duplicate entities interfere with entity selection,
particularly chaining.
Note: In addition to geometric entities, such as lines, surfaces, or solids, you can
import annotated data, such as drafting dimensions. However, toolpaths
cannot be imported due to their complex nature.
3 Select the file containing the entities you want to add to the current file and
choose OK. The entities in the selected file are added to the file in the local
origin position (X0, Y0, Z0) and the Top view. The merged entities are “live”
so that you can edit them.
4 Use options in the Merge/Pattern ribbon bar to select a new base point for
placing the merged entities and to define their scale, rotation angle, and
mirror axis (X, Y, or Z).
Figure 6-4: Merge/Pattern ribbon bar
s
te
bu
tri
at
nt
te
t
or
l ec
ale
rre
ta
irr
Se
Ro
Sc
Cu
Notes:
• Use the Select option to create a point that positions the center of the pattern
file.
• Pattern entities are created in the current Cplane.
You can also choose to assign the current attributes in the Status bar fields to
the imported entities. Because the merged entities are live, as you choose
values for the Merge (file) ribbon bar fields and options, the results show
immediately in the graphics window.
5 To accept the new entities and continue importing the same set of entities
from the pattern file to a different location in the current file, click the Apply
button.
6 To accept the new entities and exit the File Pattern function, press Esc, or
choose another Mastercam function.
IMPORTANT: Each time you merge a set of pattern entities into the current
file, Mastercam identifies the entities as a group in the database for future use.
Mastercam names the group using the pattern file name and a sequential
number to ensure the uniqueness of the group name.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Creating Machine Groups • 369
TIPS:
• Consider storing the files containing pattern entities in a separate directory,
such as \Patterns, so they are easy to locate when you use this function.
• To remove merged entities in the order in which they were added to the
current file, choose Undo from the Edit menu or toolbar.
When you use any of these methods, Mastercam creates a new machine group for the
selected machine definition and a new toolpath group directly below the new
machine group.
The new machine group and toolpath group are inserted where the red insert arrow is
positioned in the Toolpath Manager list.
Both groups are assigned a unique default name, such as Machine Group-1, Machine
Group-2, Toolpath Group-1, Toolpath Group-2, and so on.
You can create as many different machine groups as you need in the same part file. By
using machine groups to organize toolpath operations, you can include operations
for different machines in the same part file, even for different machines types. For
example, if some part features will be cut on a mill and others on a lathe, you can
include all of the operations in the same Mastercam file by creating different machine
groups for each set of mill and lathe operations.
You can also create groups of toolpaths on the same machine that you will want to
post separately.
To do this, use the Groups functions in the Toolpath Manager right–click menu to
create toolpath groups. Toolpath groups inherit all the properties of the parent
machine group. The parent machine group is defined as the machine group that is
positioned immediately above the toolpath group in the Toolpath Manager list.
You can nest toolpath groups to create an operations hierarchy with several different
layers of operations.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Creating Machine Groups • 371
Each property type corresponds to a tab in the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
To open the Machine Group Properties dialog box, select a property type (Files, Tool
settings, Stock setup, Safety zone) from the Toolpath Manager list. Then use the tabs
in the dialog box to view and edit the settings.
372 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Default values for many machine group properties are saved in the toolpath defaults
(.DEFAULTS) file. Use the Files tab to edit them:
Files Tab
Use the Files tab to view and define the file names and data paths used by operations
in the selected machine group. These settings affect default values, posting, and tool
and operation libraries.
The default tool library for a new machine group is set in the machine definition as
part of the General Machine Parameters. You can use the Files tab to change the
default library for the selected machine group. No matter what the default tool library
is, though, when you create a new toolpath you can always open any tool library and
select tools from it.
Note: Many of the default paths and filenames that display in the Machine
Group Properties, Files tab are values you initially set in the Control Definition
Manager, Files and Operation Defaults properties pages. For more information
on these settings, see “Files” on page 785 and “Operation Defaults” on page 803.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Creating Machine Groups • 373
To learn more about the Files tab, review the following information:
Defining the Toolpath (NC File) Name (page 373)
Setting up Machine Group Files (page 374)
Editing the Machine Definition (page 374)
Setting up Comments (page 374)
Defining the Toolpath (NC File) Name
In the Toolpath name field, type the default path and filename of the NC file you want
to create when posting operations from this machine group, or choose the Open
button to select a file. You can post only operations from a single machine group at
374 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
one time although you can select one or more operations in the group you want to
post.
Note: The combined length of the NC file name plus its path (for example,
c:\mcamx\nc_files\program.nc) cannot be more than 120 characters.
IMPORTANT:
• If you select a different machine for the machine group, the files and data
paths are replaced with default values from the control definition used by
the selected machine.
• If there are already operations in the machine group, be very careful when
selecting a different machine to ensure the new machine supports all the
toolpath features that have been programmed.
Note: The control and post processor are displayed only for information
purposes. To change them, you must edit the machine definition. For more
information, see “Choosing a Machine Definition” on page 360.
Setting up Comments
In the Machine Group Properties Files tab, use the Output comments to NC file
section to choose the types of comments to include in the NC file. In Mastercam, you
can still view the comments that you choose to exclude from the NC file.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Creating Machine Groups • 375
To record comments that apply to all the operations in the selected machine group,
select the Output group comments to NC check box.
Notes:
• To set the defaults and enter the maximum number of characters allowed for
comments, use the Control Definition Manager, NC Output properties page.
For more information, “NC Output” on page 787.
• When editing tool parameters, you can use the Comment field in the Tool
parameters tab (Toolpath parameters tab for Lathe) to enter operation-specific
comments.
• You can also enter machine-specific comments when setting up the machine
definition.
6
376 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Figure 6-6: Tool Settings tab (Machine Group Properties dialog box)
To learn more about the Tool Settings tab, review the following information:
Numbering Tools Sequentially (page 376)
Calculating Default Feed rates (page 379)
Setting Other Toolpath Configuration Parameters (page 379)
Assigning Sequence Numbers (page 379)
Using Advanced Options (page 380)
Numbering Tools Sequentially
Tool numbering options are properties of the machine group. You can choose to have
Mastercam automatically number your tools sequentially, or you can choose to read
the tool number stored in the tool definition.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Creating Machine Groups • 377
Figure 6-7: Using the Machine Group Properties to number tools sequen-
tially
6
Use the Tool settings tab of the Machine Group Properties dialog box to
number your tools sequentially, instead of using the tool number stored with
the tool definition. The setting shown above applies only to operations
created in the current machine group. See “Setting a default tool numbering
method” on page 378 to make this the default setting for future machine
groups.
Use the Tool settings tab of the Machine Group Properties dialog box to tell
Mastercam your preference, as shown in Figure 6-7. When this option is not
selected, Mastercam reads the tool number from the tool definition stored in
the tool library when you select the tool.
Typically, this setting applies only to the current machine group. You can make this
the default setting for future machine groups by completing the following procedure.
378 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
3 Scroll up to the top of the window and click Tool settings in the Properties
section.
5 If you work with other .defaults files, select a new file from the drop-down list
and repeat Step 4. In particular, if you program in both inch and metric units,
you should edit both inch and metric .defaults files.
6 Click OK to close the Edit Operation Defaults dialog box, and close the
Machine Group Properties dialog box.
Calculating Default Feed rates
Use the information in this section to define the method used to calculate the default
feed rate for an operation.
The tool definition for each tool contains default plunge and feed rates.
Select From tool to use these values as the default value for each operation
when a tool is selected.
Select From material to calculate feed rate based on the material
characteristics stored in the material library. After choosing this option,
make sure to Select a material in the Materials section of this tab.
Select From defaults to use the feed rate stored in the operation defaults file.
The Feed section of the control definition contains important defaults for calculating
feed rates and sets how the control will interpret the feed rate values that are entered
for each toolpath, including how to Adjust feed on arc move.
TIP: To override the default feed rate, spindle speed, or the calculation
method that is used, simply type in a new value when creating an operation.
6
Note: For information on Lathe Stock Setup options, see page 383.
Selecting Stock Model Types—There are several ways you can create stock models.
Choose Rectangular or Cylindrical to create simple stock models that are not
defined by actual geometry. All dimensions are entered in this dialog box and
no geometry is added to your part file. You can choose whether or not to
Display the stock on the screen.
Choose Solid to use a solid model inside the current part file as the stock.
Choose File to use a solid model from an STL file as the stock model.
382 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Setting Stock Dimensions—You can use several techniques for setting the stock
dimensions. Type the dimensions directly into the X, Y, and Z fields, or use one of the
following methods when the exact dimensions are unknown:
Choose Select corners to return to the graphics window and select the two
opposing corners of a 3D rectangle.
Choose Bounding box to calculate the furthest points in the part geometry.
Choose NCI extents to calculate the furthest points in the toolpaths, based
on just the feed rate moves.
Mastercam automatically calculates the stock dimensions and displays them in the
fields. You can then edit them, as necessary.
Setting Stock Origin—Use the stock origin to locate the stock relative to your part.
First, choose a point on the stock to use for the stock origin. In the dialog box, the
cross shows you where the stock origin is:
The default position is the middle of the stock. Select a corner of the part to set it as
the stock origin.
Next, type the coordinates of this point in the Stock origin fields, or click the Select
button to choose a point from the graphics window.
Setting Stock View—Select a stock view to properly orient the stock model with
respect to the part. This may be necessary if you create toolpaths in a work coordinate
system (WCS) other than Top and want to align the stock model to your part, or if you
have several toolpaths in the machine group that use more than one WCS. The stock
view keeps the stock model constant when the WCS changes. You can align the stock
model to any named view saved in the part file.
To do this, click the Stock View button and select a view from the View Selection
dialog box. The edges of the stock model are parallel with the axes of the selected view.
Note: If you change the stock view, you might need to reset the stock origin.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Creating Machine Groups • 383
Defining and configuring stock boundaries, chuck, tailstock, and steady rest for lathe
machine groups lets you take advantage of many other Mastercam Lathe features:
When you define a stock model, Mastercam automatically updates it across
several operations, intelligently calculating rapid moves to and from the
home position, between operations, and auto entry/exit vectors. The stock
models you create are also used by the Backplot and Verify functions.
To avoid collisions and gouges, Mastercam reads the boundaries for the
stock, chuck, and other peripherals when calculating toolpaths.
You can view the stock and other peripheral boundaries in the graphics
window with the part geometry.
384 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: Use the Settings, Configuration, Colors properties page to set stock
colors. See “Colors” on page 843 for details.
6
Setting the Safety Zone view—Similar to setting a stock view, you can orient the safety
zone with the part by assigning a specific view to the safety zone. To do this, click the
Safety Zone View button and select a view from the View Selection dialog box. The
edges of the safety zone are parallel with the axes of the selected view.
You can select and further define the best fitting type of safety zone (spherical,
cylindrical, or rectangular) for the part you are machining.
IMPORTANT: You must enable retract moves in the toolpath to activate the
safety zone. To do this, access the Toolpath Parameters tab by choosing
Parameters in the Toolpath Manager list, and then select retract options.
386 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Toolpath Chaining
Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so that they form
the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. This fundamental Mastercam concept
has important applications in both design and machining functions.
When you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves (lines, arcs, and
splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Chaining differs from other selection methods
because it associates order and direction to the selected curves. Chaining order and
direction affect the way Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.
Most toolpaths require geometry to be chained. Usually you chain the geometry that
is used in a single operation, such as a contour toolpath or pocket toolpath. Chaining
determines the direction of tool travel during machining.
You set chaining defaults in the Settings, Configuration, Chaining properties page.
You can use the Chaining dialog box to override these settings, as necessary.
However, you can chain together separate sets of entities to be cut in a single
operation. For example you can chain together the entities for separate parts to be cut
from the same workpiece in the same operation.
When a selected function requires chaining, Mastercam displays the Chaining dialog
box. If the current part file contains wireframe and solid entities, you can use the
buttons at the top of the dialog box to choose the type of entities you want to chain.
Otherwise, the entity type is pre-selected.
Figure 6-11: Chaining dialog box, selection type buttons
This section provides you with general information on chaining geometry, including:
Chaining Wireframe Geometry (page 387)
Chaining Solids (page 391)
Working with Open and Closed Chains (page 392)
Chaining Direction (page 393)
Synchronizing Chains (page 393)
Editing Toolpath Chains (page 395)
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Toolpath Chaining • 387
6
388 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Use the following functions in the Chaining dialog box to change or correct chains as
you create them.
6
available only for open and partial chains.
Chain Feature
The feature chains are added based on the initial chain and the
settings you define in the Chain Feature Options dialog box. To access
this dialog box, choose the Chain Feature Options button in the Chain
dialog box.
390 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
If the chain stops unexpectedly, choose Chain from the Analyze menu to
check for overlapping entities. You can then use trim functions in the Edit
menu to trim adjacent entities together in order to chain them.
Chaining Solids
In Solids mode, the Chaining dialog box provides options to chain solid entities.
Figure 6-14: Solids Chaining dialog box
6
The chain solids buttons act as toggles, allowing you to include or exclude certain
types of solid elements from chain selection, including:
Edge: Select solid edges on a model or exclude them from selection.
Loop: (available only when chaining solids for toolpath creation) Create
a closed chain (with no branch points), in which you select an edge, a
reference face, a resulting loop, and a start point.
392 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Partial Loop: (available only when chaining solids for toolpath creation)
Create an open chain, in which you select a starting edge, a reference
face, and an ending edge.
From back: Select solid edges or faces only on the back of a model.
When deactivated, you can select solid edges or faces only on the front
of a model.
Use other options in this dialog box to unselect and re-select solid chains, reverse
chaining direction, and move the start of a chain.
In an open chain, the start and end points are different coordinates. Examples of open
chains are single lines or arcs. An open chain may consist of a single entity or several
contiguous entities. Partial chaining is a method of selecting entities as open chains.
In a closed chain, the start and end points share the same coordinates. Closed chains
typically consist of several entities that have adjacent end points and that form a
closed boundary. Examples of closed chains are rectangles or circles.
Mastercam determines chaining direction differently for open chains and closed
chains.
In an open chain, the start point is placed at the end of the chain closest to
the selection point, and the chain direction points to the opposite end of the
chain.
In a closed chain, you set default values in the Chaining Options dialog box
that determine whether the chaining direction is clockwise,
counterclockwise, or based on the cursor position.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Toolpath Chaining • 393
TIP: When creating open and closed chains, use options in the Chaining
dialog box to reverse the chain direction and move the start or end position of
the chain.
Chaining Direction
All chains have a direction. Direction for closed chains is either clockwise or
counterclockwise, while the direction for open chains points toward one of the chain
endpoints. The chaining direction determines the direction of tool movement in a
toolpath.
Chaining arrow
Synchronizing Chains
Many Mastercam functions, such as surface creation and ruled toolpaths, use chain
synchronization. Choose a synchronization mode (sync mode) if you have attempted
394 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
to create a toolpath and found that it twists as shown below in the center picture. The
twisting could affect the surface of the part, making it unmachinable or irregular.
Original geometry
Manual/density: Matches the chains that you specify and allows you to
assign a density for each chain. If an area has small radii, use a higher density
(such as 2) for a better finish.
To access the Chain Manager, click the Geometry icon in the Toolpath Manager
for any toolpath that contains chains for its underlying geometry.
Notes:
• Drill, surface, point, and multiaxis toolpaths do not contain chained geometry.
When you choose the Geometry icon on these toolpaths, Mastercam displays
the appropriate dialog, such as Surface Selection for a surface toolpath.
• If you are working in Mastercam Wire, you can configure Mastercam to open
the Chain Manager dialog box immediately after you create a contour
wirepath. To do so, select the Wire check box in the Settings, Configuration,
Toolpaths properties page, and save the settings to your configuration file.
Use the Chain Manager to perform the following chain management and editing
functions:
396 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Select Chains: Click a chain in the list to select it. To select an additional
chain, or unselect a selected chain, [Ctrl+click] the chain (hold down the
[Ctrl] key while clicking). To select a range, click the first chain to select it,
and then [Shift+click] the last chain in the range.
Identify Chains: When you select a chain in the list, Mastercam highlights
the corresponding chain geometry in the graphics window. Conversely, you
can select a chain from its geometry by choosing the Select button (above
the insert arrow buttons) and clicking a chain in the graphics window.
Mastercam selects (highlights) the corresponding chain name in the Chain
Manager list.
Re-Order Chains: Select and drag a chain to a new position in the list.
Manage the Insert Arrow: Arrow buttons, located along the right side of the
dialog box, let you move or find the Insert Arrow, which indicates where new
chains are added in the Chain Manager list.
Use the arrow buttons to move or locate the Insert Arrow as follows:
Click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button to move the Insert Arrow.
Click the Right Arrow button to position the Insert Arrow immediately
after the currently selected list item.
Click the Scroll button to scroll to the Insert Arrow's current location in
the list.
Edit Chains: Use the right–click menu options to add, delete, replace,
reverse, sort, and analyze chains, as well as perform other chaining
functions. Right–click anywhere in the dialog box to access these functions.
Add chain: Opens the Chaining dialog box and lets you select one or more
chains to add from the graphics window.
Change side: Swaps the cutter compensation for all chains in the operation
from one side to the other. Cutter compensation refers to the tool offset from
the toolpath (right or left). This option has no effect on pocket toolpaths or
toolpaths that do not use cutter compensation.
Rechain all: Lets you replace all chains in the list with one or more chains
you select from the graphics window.
6
Resync all: For some toolpaths, lets you select an alternate synchronization
method from the Sync Mode drop-down list, which displays near the top of
the dialog box.
Sort options: Opens the Sorting dialog box, where you can re-sort chain
order (by start point).
Delete chain: Deletes one or more selected chains from the list. You can also:
Use the [Delete] key to delete one or more selected chains in the list.
Choose the Select button, select a chain in the graphics window, and
press [Delete] to delete the chain.
Rechain single: Lets you replace a selected chain in the list with a chain you
select from the graphics window.
Analyze chain: Opens the Analyze Chain dialog box, where you can select
problems for Mastercam to identify in selected chains.
Change at point: Opens the Change at point dialog box so that you can edit
the selected point. You can change the depth, coolant options, retract or
398 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
clearance height, insert canned text, and make other changes that apply to
either the selected point or from that point forward.
Reverse chain: Reverses the direction of the selected chain.
Start point: Opens the Chaining Start/End dialog box, where you can use the
Forward and Back buttons to move the start or end (open chains only) of a
chain from one entity endpoint to another.
You can also move the start or endpoint of a chain to any position along an
entity, without restricting the start/end to an entity endpoint. If Break
entities in Dynamic is selected in the Chaining Options dialog box or the
Settings, Configuration, Chaining properties page, using this function
automatically breaks the entity at the start/end position. Choose Dynamic
move start/end of chain (button between the Start and End controls), and
then click the start or end point of a chain, and drag it to a new position.
Edit tabs: For contour toolpaths, lets you edit tabs using the Edit tabs ribbon
bar. Use the ribbon bar options to move, add, or delete tabs on the chain. You
can also access the Tabs dialog box to modify tab parameters.
Multi-Select: (Wire only) Works in conjunction with the Change at point
right–click menu item. Multi-Select allows you to choose multiple points on
the active chain before the Change at point dialog box displays. Press [Esc] to
end point selection.
Reset Chain: (Wire only) Removes all Change at point data on the active
chain.
Rename: Lets you change the name of the selected chain. Alternatively, you
can click a selected chain and type a new name directly. Use either method to
assign meaningful names to chains in the toolpath.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Toolpath Chaining • 399
Dynamic Chaining
You can eliminate unnecessary toolpath moves (“cutting air”) by dynamically
adjusting the start and end points of chains. When you are chaining and click to set
the start and end points on the geometry, a green arrow and a red arrow display on the
part as shown in the following picture.
The crosshair at the bottom of the green arrow indicates the starting point. The green
arrowhead points in the chaining direction (the direction the tool will travel along the
chain). The crosshair at the base of the red arrow indicates the end of the chain, and
the red arrowhead also points in the chaining direction.
By adjusting one or both of these chain points, you can dramatically increase your
cutting efficiency. Adjust these points using the Start, Dynamic, and End buttons on
the Chaining dialog box. You must expand the Chaining dialog box to view these
buttons.
Use the Start and End buttons to move the start and end points of a chain from one
entity endpoint to another.
400 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: These buttons are unavailable on open chains. They are also unavailable
if Break closest entity to thread point in the Chaining Options dialog box is
selected.
Use the Dynamic button to move the start or end of a selected chain to any
position along an entity, without restricting the start/end to an entity endpoint.
Choose the Dynamic button, and then click the start or end point of a chain and drag
it to a new position.
Notes:
• If Break entities in Dynamic is selected in the Chaining Options dialog box or
Chaining property page, using this function automatically breaks the entity at
the start/end position.
• The Dynamic button is disabled for Wire chaining.
The following image shows a sample part after a roughing operation without
dynamically moving the chain for the next back turn operation. Notice the
unnecessary cutting movement on the approach.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Toolpath Chaining • 401
By dynamically adjusting the chain to move the start point for the back turn operation
(shown below), you can eliminate the “cutting air” portion of the toolpath.
This image shows the operation after using dynamic chaining to adjust the start point.
6
402 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You can also use Mastercam's dynamic chaining feature after the toolpath has been
created. Click the Geometry icon for the toolpath (in the Toolpath Manager as shown
below) to open the Chain Manager.
In the Chain Manager, right–click the chain to edit, and choose Start point to use the
options in the Chaining dialog box.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Selecting Tools • 403
Selecting Tools
In this section, you learn about selecting tools and setting feeds, speeds, and other
general toolpath parameters.
For most tree-style toolpath dialog boxes, you select tools in the Tool page, listed in
the tree below the Toolpath Type page.
Figure 6-17: 2D High Speed Tools page
6
For tabbed toolpath dialog boxes, you select tools in the Toolpath Parameters tab.
The Toolpath parameters tab options vary, based on the selected toolpath type.
However, there are many common fields for all toolpath types.
404 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Both tree and tab style toolpath dialog boxes display after you chain or select
geometry, solids, or surfaces for a new toolpath.
You can also access either style of toolpath dialog box (tree or tab) by clicking the
Parameters icon in the Toolpath Manager list.
Mill and Router toolpath parameters are very similar. Lathe toolpaths share some Mill
and Router toolpath parameters, but also include many that are unique to lathe
machine tools. The method you use to select a tool is basically the same.
Use the large area in the Tools page or Toolpath parameters tab to select a tool for the
operation. All tools that have been added to, or are used in the current machine group,
display in this area by default.
To change the tools display, right–click in this area and choose an option from the
View menu.
If you display tools using the Details option, you can sort the list by clicking on
column headers. To reorder the columns, click and drag them to new positions.
Use one of the following methods to select a tool:
In the tool display area, click the tool you want to use.
6
If the tool you want is not displayed, choose Select library tool. This opens
the Tool Selection dialog box where you can select a tool from the current
tool library or from any tool library you choose.
Use the right–click menu option to Create new tool and define the tool.
IMPORTANT: Any new tool definitions you create are stored only in the
current machine group, unless you save them to a tool library.
406 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIPS:
• To simplify the display, choose Tool Filter and define criteria that will limit
the display to only tools that meet your criteria.
• You can select a tool from the library just by entering its tool number,
provided that in the Machine Group Properties dialog box Tool Settings tab,
the option to Search tool library when entering tool number is selected. To
configure this setting, click the Tool Settings icon in the Toolpath Manager
list.
• Double–click a tool to edit its tool definition, or choose Edit tool from the
right–click menu.
Use this dialog box to select tools from a tool library and add them to the current
machine group. Adding tools to the machine group allows you to select and use them
in a toolpath.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Using the Toolpath Parameters Right-Click Menu • 407
Double–click a tool to add it to the current operation and close the dialog
box.
To list tools from a different library, select one from the drop-down list
located in the upper left corner. If the library you want to use does not
appear in the list, click the folder button (next to the drop-down list) then
navigate to the library file location and select it for display.
You can also filter the tool list by a number of different criteria to make it
easier to find the right tool. Select Filter active to apply a defined tool filter,
or click the Filter button to define or edit the selection criteria, then apply it.
When you select a tool, the other fields in the Toolpath parameters dialog box tabs
update with default values that you can override. Default parameters can come from
the tool definition, machine and control definitions, and the operation defaults. The
machine group properties define the source of the default values for many of the
parameters.
TIPS:
• Mastercam Mill and Router toolpath types can use tools and tool libraries
interchangeably.
• While working in the tool display window, click and drag columns to
rearrange them, or sort the tools by clicking on a column header. Use the
right–click menu to access more display options.
Mill/Router Mill/Router
(Tab style dialog box) (Tree style dialog box)
Lathe
Create new tool: Create a new tool instead of selecting one from the list. The
tool definition you create is stored only in the current machine group unless
you save it to a library.
Edit tool: Edit the tool definition for the selected tool. Unless you save the
changes to the library, they are stored only in the machine group and do not
affect the tool definition in the library.
Get block drill: (Router) This option is available only when you create or edit
a block drilling toolpath. Use it to access the Drill Block Selection dialog box
where you can view, select, or edit the drill blocks defined for the machine
type. Drill blocks must be predefined for the selected machine type using the
Machine Definition Manager.
Get angled head (Mill), Get aggregate (Router): Access the Aggregate dialog
box, where you can select an aggregate tooling block and set tools in the
block.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Editing Toolpath Defaults • 409
Tool manager: This menu item includes the current tool library file name.
Use it to access the Tool Manager dialog box and view and manage tool
libraries, the tools in your part file, and tool definitions.
Load tool on machine: Automatically create a tool component based the
selected tool, and add it to the machine definition. (Used only for
simulation.)
View: Display the tools as large icons, a simple list, or a detailed list.
Arrange tools: Sort the tools by tool number or tool name. These options are
helpful if you have the tools displayed as icons without any column headers.
Popup tool: (Lathe) Set options to view a larger picture of the tool and
control the popup action by hovering the mouse over a tool icon in the
Toolpath parameters tab.
Import operations: (Mill/Router) Import one or more operations from an
operations library and automatically apply them to the current geometry
selection.
Feed/speed calculator: (Mill/Router) Use the calculator to calculate feeds
and speeds including surface speed or feed per tooth.
Save parameters: Save all parameters defined in the Toolpath parameter
dialog box tabs to the operation defaults file (.DEFAULTS) used in the
machine group. This overwrites the values stored in the operations defaults
file only for the selected toolpath type. (Tab style dialog boxes only)
Reload parameters: Restore the values in the Toolpath parameters dialog
box tabs with those defined for the toolpath type in the machine group’s
operation defaults file. (Tab style dialog boxes only) 6
Notes:
• To save or reload parameters when working with toolpaths that use tree style
dialog boxes, click the buttons at the top of the dialog box.
• You set the operation defaults file using the Files tab in the Machine Group
Properties dialog box. Initially, the .DEFAULTS file that displays in the Files tab
is associated with the selected control definition. To view this setting, and other
machine group defaults, click the machine group Files icon in the Toolpath
Manager list.
product (Mill, Lathe, Router, Wire). Typically, these are stored in the \ops folder for
each product. In addition to toolpath and operation defaults, the .DEFAULTS file also
stores default values for many machine group properties.
Because the operation defaults are stored separately from the machine and control
definition, you can use the same .DEFAULTS file for all of your machines or machine
groups. Users in larger shops or with more sophisticated programming needs can
create different .DEFAULTS files for different machines or applications and
automatically load them with each machine definition (see “Creating and Using
Machine-Specific .DEFAULTS Files” on page 413).
To learn more about default values for other types of settings, see the topic “Working
with toolpath defaults” in the online help.
However, you can save default values for Mastercam’s standard multiaxis
toolpaths.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Editing Toolpath Defaults • 411
2 Click the Edit button in the Operation Defaults section of the Machine
Group Properties, Files tab.
3 In the Edit Operations Defaults dialog box, if necessary, load the .DEFAULTS
file to edit by selecting it from the drop-down list. Use the folder buttons to
select a .DEFAULTS file from a different folder.
4 Perform any of the following tasks:
6
To edit the default parameters for an operation, find the operation in the
list, and click on its Parameters icon.
6 Click OK when you are ready to exit. Mastercam automatically saves the file.
6
You can do this while creating an operation or editing an existing operation.
7 Repeat Step 6 for both inch and metric .defaults files. Mastercam
automatically uses the proper file depending on the units that you are
working in.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Editing Toolpath Defaults • 415
8 Save the control definition. All machine definitions that use the control
definition will automatically load the selected .defaults file when you create a
new machine group with them.
A copy of the Edit Operations Defaults dialog box opens in the Control
Definition Manager.
2 Edit your operation defaults as you normally would. You can open any
.defaults file or create new ones.
3 Because the .defaults file is separate from the control definition, you need to
6
save your new settings with the Save default settings button.
4 Exit the Control Definition Manager and save the control definition as you
normally would.
If you then select a 0.375-inch tool, many of the cutting parameters automatically
update:
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Editing Toolpath Defaults • 417
Even if you have edited some of the cutting parameters, the edited values will be
overwritten when you select a new tool. This happens even if the new tool has the
same dimensions as the old one.
However, Mastercam includes an option that you can use to control this behavior. On
the Toolpaths page in the System Configuration dialog box, deselect Automatically
calculate HST defaults.
This disables the automatic update feature so that when you select a new tool,
Mastercam does not update any of the cutting or linking parameters. Instead, you will
see a new button on the Tool page:
6
Click Recalculate values to have Mastercam update the cutting and linking
parameters based on the current tool dimensions. In this way, you can control when
values are updated.
This also lets you use values from your .defaults file more like other Mastercam
toolpaths. Whether or not the Automatically calculate HST defaults option is
selected, you can still store HST default values in your .defaults file. However, if
Automatically calculate HST defaults is active, many of the defaults will be
overwritten as soon as you select a tool. When this option is not active, the default
values will persist until you explicitly choose to recalculate them.
418 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The formulas for calculating the default values for surface high speed toolpaths (HST)
are stored in files with .FORMULA extensions. Typically, these are stored in the
following folder:
\mcamx\mill\formula
Please note that if you have installed Mastercam to a directory other than MCAMX,
that the route of the path shown above will reflect your customized install.
Mastercam installs a default.formula file that contains the system defaults. If you
wish, you can select a different set of defaults. Typically, different default files are
created for different materials. For example, for softer materials, you might use more
aggressive cutting parameters.
3 Mastercam displays the active .FORMULA file in the Quick View Settings
window:
TIP: Depending on the XML editor you use, it might be easier to open and edit
the files if you first change the extension to .XML before editing the file, and
changing it back to .FORMULA after you are done.
1 Even if you’ve never used XML files, the .FORMULA files are easy to understand.
They consist of a series of nested objects that correspond to the parameter pages in
your HST dialog box.
Each toolpath type is represented by a <toolpath> object.
Each toolpath contains a collection of parameter pages. Each parameter
page is represented by a <page> object. Most toolpaths contain Cut
parameters, Linking, and Transition pages.
Each page contains <group> objects. Each group contains a set of
parameters.
Each field on each page is represented by a <param> object.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Editing Toolpath Defaults • 421
2 Each object has a name and a target. When you need to refer to a field in a
formula, you refer to its target.
3 Each <param> object has a value. This represents the default value for that field.
To change the default value for a field, you need to locate the <param> object for the
field and change this value. Sometimes this value is just a single number. That means
the default value is a constant that does not depend on the tool or any other
parameter.
Notice that the value is not enclosed by angle brackets < >.
Building formulas
The default value for each field can be either of two types:
Constant. This means that the default value will not change with a new tool
and is not linked to any other parameter.
This example sets the default stock-to-leave amount at 0.05 inches:
Formula. This means that the default value is dynamically calculated based
on the selected tool or another parameter.
This example sets the default stepdown to 10% of the tool diameter:
6
Formulas can be any conventional mathematical expression. Follow these rules:
The entire formula must be enclosed within ( ) parentheses. You can nest
parentheses to create more complicated expressions.
To refer to another field, use its target with an @ symbol.
Use standard mathematical operators: + / – * ^
The following standard math and trig functions are available: sqrt( ),
tan( ), sin( ), cos( ), atan( ), acos( ), asin( ).
Use degrees for angles, not radians. Pre-defined constants #RadToDeg and
#DegToRad let you convert between the two.
Other named constants are #Pi and #E.
422 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
IMPORTANT: If any default values use constants, you will need to create
separate files for inch and metric values.
Toolpath Manager
functions
Note: If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, use the Solids tab to access
the Solids Manager. In addition to listing the features that define a solid, the
Solids Manager tab provides options for managing and editing solids. In the Art
tab, you can use the Art Manager to view the details of any Art models in your
part. However, the Mastercam Art add-on is required to use most of the
functions available in the Art Manager and from the Mastercam Art menu.
Use the Toolpath Manager to generate, sort, edit, regenerate, verify, backplot, and
post selected operations, including associative and non-associative toolpaths.
The Toolpath Manager list is a nested hierarchy of folders that organize the following
types of information:
Machine group
Toolpath group
Toolpath subgroup
TIP: When you position the cursor in the Toolpath Manager, the Toolpath
Manager options become active; any keyboard commands you enter are
executed in the Toolpath Manager. When you move the cursor outside of the
Toolpath Manager pane, the focus shifts and different options become active.
424 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIPS:
• Mastercam saves the most recently used plane, view, and WCS selections
for each machine group, and restores them whenever you activate the
machine group. For example, if one machine group has toolpaths on the
front of the part, and another machine group has toolpaths on the side of
the part, when you activate a machine group, Mastercam automatically
activates the views and planes you were using the last time the group was
active.
• To activate a machine group when working in Mastercam Design (choose
Machine Type, Design), select the machine group in the Toolpath Manager.
Then right–click and choose Make machine group active. This loads the
associated Mastercam application (Mill, Router, Lathe, Wire).
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Managing Toolpath Operations • 425
Move up one item. Position below last item in the selected operation / group.
Move down one item. Scroll Toolpath Manager view to insert arrow position.
In the Toolpath Manager, each operation has a name that describes the type of
machining action it includes, such as Surface Rough Flowline. A single part can have
many operations within one or more machine groups and toolpath groups.
Each operation has at least four parts:
Figure 6-24: Operation details in Toolpath Manager
Tool definition: Information about the size and shape of the tool.
Part geometry: Contains the geometry selections for the part or section
you are machining.
To view and edit this information, click an icon in the Toolpath Manager list.
Operations that are more detailed and specific to a selected machine and toolpath
type provide additional icons representing information you can view and edit.
Lathe-specific—For lathe toolpaths, click the Update Stock/Do not update stock
icon to enable or disable this feature. When enabled, as shown below, Mastercam
Lathe provides you with feedback on the stock shape as it is machined.
Figure 6-25: Lathe Operation details
Surface toolpaths—For surface toolpaths, you can click additional geometry icons to
view and edit information on the Drive surfaces, Check surfaces, Containment
boundaries, Start points menus, and CAD files used in the operation.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Managing Toolpath Operations • 427
Flowline toolpaths—For flowline toolpaths, which follow the shape and direction of
the surfaces, you can also view and edit flowline information for the toolpath by
selecting the Geometry - Flowline Data icon.
Figure 6-27: Flowline Operation details
Parameters icons
Toolpath parameters: Opens the Toolpath Parameters dialog box where
you can select a tool, set feeds, speeds, and other general toolpath
parameters.
428 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Tool icons
Tool parameters: Opens the Define Tool dialog box where you can
define the tool and its parameters for the operation.
Lathe tool parameters: Opens the Lathe Tools dialog box where you
can define the tool type, insert, holder, and cutting parameters.
Solid/Surfaces icons
Solid/Surfaces: Indicates that the operation contains a solid, a
surface, or a combination of solids, surfaces, and geometry. Use this
option to open the associated editing function, such as the
Toolpath/Surface Selection dialog box.
Check surfaces: Opens the Edit Check Geometry dialog box where you
can make changes to drive surfaces.
Start points: Identifies start points of surface geometry and allows you
to reselect a start point.
CAD file: Indicates that a CAD file was selected for a surface toolpath.
Use this option to select a different CAD file.
Toolpath not restored: The file has not been restored (via a toolpath
regeneration) since the file was opened with the “restore NCI” option
deselected. (Icon is light blue.)
Toolpath locked, display off: The toolpath is locked (see above) and
the display for that operation is off. You can turn on the toolpath
display again even if the toolpath is locked. See “Displaying Toolpaths”
on page 431 for additional information on turning the display of
toolpaths on and off in the graphics window.
Posting off: Posting is turned off for the toolpath. To reverse the
posting status, click the Post button located at the top of the Toolpath
Manager.
Batch: Indicates that in the Tool parameters tab the operation has
been marked “to Batch.” The operation is set to batch mode and will
be processed separately from other operations. (This parameter is not
available in Mastercam Wire.)
Displaying Toolpaths 6
When you generate a toolpath, the tool motion is drawn in the graphics window.
Sometimes the display of multiple toolpaths can obscure the geometry and each
other. You may find it simpler to work with toolpath display turned off.
Use the following Toolpath Manager options to simplify the display of toolpaths and
associative geometry in the graphics window.
Figure 6-28: Toolpath Manager tab, display options
432 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Only display selected toolpaths: Displays toolpaths only for the selected
operations.
You can also use the Toolpath Manager and shortcut keys to show and hide all
toolpaths, or only selected toolpaths.
Showing/Hiding All Toolpaths—To show or hide the display of all toolpaths in the
graphics window, position the cursor in the graphics window, and press the [Alt]
key and the [T] key at the same time [Alt+T]. This key sequence toggles the
visibility of all toolpaths on and off in the graphics window.
Showing/Hiding Selected Toolpaths—To change the display state of one or more
toolpaths, select one or more toolpath operations in Toolpath Manager and type
[T]. Mastercam turns off the toolpath display for the selected toolpaths. To turn
the display back on, type [T] again. This is especially helpful if you are working
with a complex part and want to view only specific toolpaths. When you use this
technique to turn off the display of individual operations, they are not affected by
typing [Alt+T] in the graphics window. They remain “hidden” until you type [T]
again when the cursor is positioned in the Toolpath Manager.
Notes:
• Toolpath Manager display options override all other toolpath display states
and settings.
• You may need to repaint the display after toggling the toolpath display on/off.
See “Changing the Graphics Window Display” on page 106 for more
information.
• Toolpaths are not displayed for operations marked dirty until they are
regenerated.
Note: If the operation being copied or moved is not compatible with the
machine group settings, a message informs you and asks if you want to cancel
the copy/move or accept Mastercam's attempt to modify the operation to fit the
machine definition.
IMPORTANT: The text you enter in this manner overwrites any comment text
you have already entered for that operation.
To hide most of the text that appears next to the list icons, use the Display
options command in the right–click menu.
When you activate multi-threaded processing, you do not have to wait for toolpath
regeneration to complete for these toolpaths before starting another Mastercam
function. Once the toolpaths have been sent to the Multi-Threading Manager (MTM),
Mastercam processes them “in the background”.
You enable/disable multi-threaded toolpath processing as part of your Mastercam
configuration (Settings, Configuration, Toolpaths page). See “Toolpaths” on
page 868 for more information.
The Mastercam Event Logger, located in your system tray during an open
Mastercam session, keeps a log of Mastercam error and warning messages, and
program processes. This log includes information on the toolpath operations that are
multi-threaded and the time it takes to process each thread, as well as the total
processing time for an entire multi-threaded regeneration. This information can help
you compare the processing time of a set of toolpaths using single-threaded and
multi-threaded modes.
When in multi-threaded mode, the Toolpath Manager displays two icons to indicate
that toolpaths are being processed as threads in the Multi-Threading Manager. The
icons are green or yellow spools of thread.
Green icons indicate threads that are being processed in the MTM.
Use this dialog box to view the toolpath processing threads created every time
Mastercam generates or regenerates 3D surface high speed toolpaths (HST) and
multiaxis toolpaths (excluding advanced). All existing threads display in the MTM,
along with their current states, progress bar indicators, and processing status.
Display Options—The Multi-Threading Manager displays “on top” of all other
windows (Mastercam or any other program). This characteristic allows it to be “thread
safe” in a manner similar to the Windows Task Manager. The MTM runs
independently from Mastercam.
436 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Changing the priority of a thread can make it run faster or slower (depending
on whether you raise or lower the priority), but it can also adversely affect the
performance of other threads.
Choose from the following options:
Realtime
High
AboveNormal
Normal (default)
BelowNormal
To apply the same option to multiple threads, use standard Windows
selection methods to choose threads in the list. Then right-click and select
an option.
Configuration Options
The Configure button opens the Multi Thread Settings dialog box where you
set the maximum number of toolpath threads Mastercam is allowed to process
simultaneously. The value you define remains set until you change it.
6
Notes:
• If multi-threading is not enabled for your Mastercam configuration, the MTM
title bar displays a message informing you that it is disabled in the Settings,
Configuration, Toolpaths page. Select the check box on that page to enable the
feature. Then save the setting to your configuration file.
• Or, select the Toggle Multi-Threading icon to activate multi-threading for only
the current Mastercam session.
• Initially, the multi-threading icons are located in the Mastercam What's new
toolbar. However, you can use the Settings, Customize function to add these
icons to any toolbar. For more information, see “Customizing Toolbar Settings”
on page 810.
438 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Editing Operations
Toolpath Manager icons and right–click menu functions offer many flexible methods
you can use to edit operations. So far in this chapter, you have learned about using
Toolpath Manager icons to:
Choose a machine and control definition (page 360)
Set machine group properties (page 369)
View and edit toolpath operations (page 422)
This section provides information on how to use the Toolpath Manager right–click
menu and its Toolpath Editor and Edit selected operations submenu functions.
In this section, you will learn about:
Using the Toolpath Editor (page 438)
Editing Selected Operations (page 443)
TIP: Make all other necessary changes to the toolpath (such as tool or
parameter changes) before using the Toolpath Editor. The Toolpath Editor
locks the toolpath after you edit it. Locked toolpaths are not updated by
Mastercam. To further modify the toolpath, you must unlock it. If the toolpath
is regenerated after editing, any custom modifications will be overwritten.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Editing Operations • 439
Click the up and down scroll arrows, or click in the field and use the
mouse wheel or arrow keys to scroll.
Enter a number directly in the field.
Click a position in the graphics window.
The selected position appears highlighted in the graphics window toolpath
display. The display changes as you use other Toolpath Editor options to
move, edit, or delete the selected toolpath point, cut, or pass.
Pass and Cut Position fields are unavailable for Lathe toolpaths. For other
toolpath types, Pass is available only if multiple passes are used in the
toolpath, and Cut is available only if depth cuts are used.
When adding a new point, select the Before check box to
insert the new point before the point position in the toolpath.
Deselect it to add the new point after this point position.
Use the options in the Show section of the
Edit Toolpath dialog box to set toolpath
display options in the graphics window. You
can view only the pass or cut you enter in the
corresponding Position field, or display all cuts and passes in the toolpath.
The Delete Section option lets you remove a defined section of the toolpath,
based on the starting and ending point positions you choose. For more
information, see “Deleting a Toolpath Section” on page 442.
Click Cancel in the Edit Toolpath dialog box to cancel all changes you made
to the toolpath during a single session in the Toolpath Editor, including those
made in the Section and Edit Point Parameters dialog boxes.
3 Use the fields in the Edit Point Parameters dialog box to change the toolpath
motion at the selected point and modify other toolpath actions at that point,
such as turning coolant on or off and changing cutter compensation.
Notes:
• If you change the feed rate, use the Change options to apply the new feed rate
as either a Modal change (effective until a different feed rate is encountered in
the toolpath), or to a defined Section of the toolpath. The section begins with
the point you chose to edit in Step 2 and ends with a position you choose later
in the Section dialog box.
• Rapid move is unavailable for arcs.
• Feed rate is disabled for rapid moves.
4 When you finish entering changes for the selected point position, click OK to
return to the Edit Toolpath dialog box.
5 If you entered a feed rate change in Step 3 and chose Section as the Change
6
type, use the Section dialog box to enter the endpoint for the new feed rate.
As you choose the endpoint, the defined section is highlighted in the
graphics window. To accept it and exit the dialog box, click OK.
6 Continue editing, or click OK to accept all changes made to the toolpath in
this session of the Toolpath Editor and exit the Edit Toolpath dialog box.
3 Click Add point and, when prompted, select a position in the graphics
window. The new point is added to the toolpath and appears highlighted
(red) in the graphics window.
4 Continue using Toolpath Editor options to edit the toolpath, or click OK to
accept all changes made to the toolpath in this session of the Toolpath Editor
and exit the Edit Toolpath dialog box.
Click the up and down scroll arrows, or click in the field and use the
mouse wheel or arrow keys to scroll.
Enter a number directly in the field.
Click a position in the graphics window.
When you choose an endpoint, the defined section is highlighted in the
graphics window. To change the endpoint, simply choose another one.
4 To delete the defined section and return to the Edit Toolpath dialog box, click
OK.
5 Continue editing the toolpath, or click OK to accept all changes made to the
toolpath in this session of the Toolpath Editor and exit the Edit Toolpath
dialog box.
The large area in the left side of the dialog box lists all selected operations in
ascending order by operation number.
Use the check box next to each field in this dialog box to select the fields to edit. This
flexible design lets you implement changes to one field, all fields, or any combination
of fields you choose. When you click OK or Apply, only selected (activated) fields and
their associated values are used to edit the operations in the list.
TIPS:
• Use the Enable all and Disable all buttons located in the lower
left corner, to quickly select/deselect all fields.
• To deselect (disable) the Clearance or Retract fields for all edited
operations, select the check box next to the field and choose Disable from
the Use drop-down list.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Editing Operations • 445
Note: If a change does not fit an operation in the list, it is ignored during the
update process. For example, changes to Feed plane do not affect a drilling
operation. Also, before accepting a change, the update process verifies that the
change can be supported by the machine group’s Machine Definition and
Control Definition. If it cannot, a message identifies the field and conflict, and
no change occurs.
After selecting a field, use one of the following methods to change it:
Type a value in the field.
Click the field button, and set parameters in the related dialog box.
Select a value from a drop-down list.
To update the operations with your changes, click OK or Apply.
Use the Abs/Inc drop-down list to choose a plane setting for the selected field and
specified value. Most toolpaths provide Clearance, Retract, Feed plane, Top of stock,
and Depth parameters you enter in either absolute or incremental values.
Absolute values are always measured from the origin.
Incremental values are relative to other parameters or chained geometry. For
example, incremental Depth and Top of Stock parameters are relative to the
location of the chained geometry. The Clearance, Retract, and Feed plane are
relative to the Top of stock.
Selecting Tools
All tools added to or used in the active machine group appear in the large area below
the Tool Selection check box. To choose a tool and apply it to all selected operations,
6
start by selecting the Tool Selection check box. This activates the Tool Selection
option. Then select a tool by clicking it. Use the Tool Filter check box and button to
modify the tool display. To access the Tool Selection dialog box and its options, click
the Select library tool button. You can also pick additional options from the menu
that displays when you right–click in the Tool area.
Figure 6-32: Edit Common Parameters, Tool right–click menu
Propagating Changes
Use the Propagate button in conjunction with the operations list to copy one or more
selected fields from one operation to all other operations in the list. First, select the
446 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
operation you want to copy fields from by clicking it in the list. The operation is
highlighted to indicate its selection. Click Propagate to update all common
parameters fields with values from the selected operation. Then select one or more
fields to apply, edit them as necessary, and click Apply. The selected fields and values
are applied to all operations in the Edit Common Parameters list. To use another
operation to propagate and update additional fields, repeat this procedure. To accept
the changes and exit the function, click OK rather than Apply.
TIP: To update the common parameter values with those used in a selected
operation, rather than select an operation and click the Propagate button, you
can simply double–click the operation.
The post processor uses the program number for machine tools that require program
numbers rather than program names. The program number displays next to the NC
file name in the Toolpath Manager.
Renumbering Tools
The Renumber tools function makes it easy to renumber the tools used in the
selected operations, and optionally those that have been saved with the part file but
are not used in any of its operations. For example, you might use this function when
reprogramming a job for a different machine tool.
The Starting tool number and Tool number increment fields are required
fields; others are optional.
To renumber all the tools that have been saved to the part file, regardless of
6
whether they are used in its operations, select the Also renumber tools not
used in any operation option. Deselect this option to renumber only the
tools that are included in the selected operations.
448 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The Starting work offset number and Work offset number increment fields
are required fields; others are optional.
When you apply your changes, any work offset information previously
defined for the selected operations is updated with the renumbering
information you provided.
Reversing Toolpaths
The Reverse toolpath function allows you to transpose the machining direction and
swap the side where cutter compensation in control is applied for selected
operations. If cutter compensation in control is off in the toolpath, it remains off; only
the machining direction is reversed.
After reversing a toolpath, the NCI file is automatically locked to prevent you from
regenerating the toolpath.
Recalculating Feeds/Speeds
Use this function to adjust the feed rate, plunge rate, retract rate, and spindle speed
for multiple toolpaths based on a new stock material. This process requires that the
feed calculation be set to “From material.” You set this value in the Machine Group
Properties, Tool settings tab.
Backplotting Operations
Use the Backplot function in the Toolpath Manager to simulate tool motion for
6
selected operations. This animated display allows you to view the cutting process in
the graphics window in a manner similar to stepping through or running a video file.
450 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Backplot helps you find any errors in your program before physically machining the
part. To begin backplotting, select one or more operations in the Toolpath Manager
list. Then click the Backplot button located at the top of the Toolpath Manager.
To move forward and backward through the backplot simulation, use the Backplot
VCR bar, located above the graphics window.
Figure 6-38: Backplot VCR bar
Tra t for ard
Ru ce ard
ep ck
s rw
w
You can run Backplot in Run mode, which displays the toolpath as the tool moves
along, or Trace mode, which displays the entire toolpath and the tool moves over it.
The direction of each tool move is highlighted as the backplot progresses. The default
colors are light blue at the start and red at the end of each move, but you can set them
to any color you choose.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Backplotting Operations • 451
Use the Options button to customize backplot settings in the Backplot Options
dialog box, such as setting the tool display, holder display, and tool motion colors.
Figure 6-39: Backplot Options dialog box
6
As you step through the toolpath, the Details tab of the expanded Backplot dialog box
displays information on the type of move, and the Info tab displays information such
as cycle time and path length for the selected operation.
452 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Backplot dialog box and Details Backplot dialog box, Info tab
tab (default)
The Restrict drawing buttons let you remove all currently plotted
toolpaths from the screen or restore all toolpaths to the display. When you restrict the
display, only the remaining toolpaths are plotted. Use the Turn off restricted button
to reset all toolpaths to their unrestricted states.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Verifying Operations • 453
Verifying Operations
Use the Verify function in the Toolpath Manager to create a 3D simulation of
machining selected operations. The model created by this function represents the
surface finish. It also shows collisions, if any exist, and enables you to find and correct
program errors before they reach the shop floor.
Figure 6-40: Verify
6
Toolpath verification provides two modes of operation: Standard and TrueSolid.
Standard mode uses pixel-based technology to represent the machined
part. If your installation does not include the TrueSolid verification add-on,
you must use Standard mode for 3-, 4-, and 5-axis toolpath verification. For
information on purchasing TrueSolid verification, contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
TrueSolid mode uses solid modeling technology for toolpath simulation.
TrueSolid also uses OpenGL® graphics for dynamic 3D solid rendering and
animation. After verifying a part in TrueSolid mode, you can rotate and
magnify the part to more closely check features, surface finish, or scallops.
Because of these enhanced capabilities, TrueSolid verification is the best
choice for toolpath simulation.
454 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You will learn more about configuring the Verify function for a specific mode of
operation and setting other verify options in “Configuring Verification Parameters” on
page 456.
Notes:
• In Mastercam Lathe, use TrueSolid mode for best results.
• The Turbo feature shows the machined part without simulating the tool
motion. Selecting Turbo for either Standard or TrueSolid verification may
produce results more quickly. TrueSolid Turbo is available only for 3-axis
toolpaths in Top view and does not support WCS or simulate part indexing.
Use the control buttons located at the top of the Verify dialog box to start, pause,
rewind, step through, and fast forward through the verify simulation.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Verifying Operations • 455
ion
s
te
at
ina
ns
d
rd
off
pe
ee
oo
/
om
on
sp
nc
e
rat
rc
nt
le
de
io
ind
ola
tte
sit
ed
co
Sp
Co
Cu
Po
Fe
G-
When you stop the verification process, either by using a selected stop option or with
the VCR controls, this ribbon bar displays read-only information about the tool move
that occurred just prior to the stop position. The coordinates for the stop position also
display. If you close the Verify controls dialog box, the ribbon bar also closes.
Note: While a verification is in progress, you cannot change the tool display
mode. You must wait for the verification process to finish, and then choose
Restart.
Then use fields in the Verify Options dialog box to customize the following:
Stock shape, file, boundaries, initial size source
Tool profile, MCX and NCI file selection, tool and STL tolerances
Color settings for stock, collision, tool, and cut stock
Miscellaneous options for TrueSolid simulation, cutter compensation, axis
display, STL file comparison, chip removal, tool color and display, and screw
thread simulation
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Verifying Operations • 457
Note: If you are verifying the current part file (MCX) and do not set stock
6
dimensions in the Verify configuration dialog box, the stock values that are
specified in the part file are used (Machine Group Properties, Stock Set up tab).
If stock values cannot be used from the part file, the stock dimensions in the NCI
file associated with the part file are used. If you are verifying a different NCI file,
Mastercam scans the specified NCI file for the stock dimensions.
Note: If you are using an Undefined tool type, the part file is not scaled.
Tool simulation in TrueSolid Turbo mode—Verify does not simulate all tool shapes in
TrueSolid Turbo mode. When verifying in TrueSolid Turbo mode, the program
simulates the tool shape by extruding it upward from the tool tip. To properly simulate
tools that perform undercutting, do not use TrueSolid Turbo mode. Instead, verify
parts that use undercutting tools in TrueSolid tool simulation mode.
To view the part model against the geometry contained in the STL file, choose
Compare. In addition to the comparison, you can show the machined model and the
STL model separately or together.
You can set the colors in the STL Compare dialog box to denote areas on the part
where material is being left or where the part is gouged.
Each color represents a range of values for the amount of stock left on the part or
removed from the part. For example, the first color can represent material greater
than 0.003 left on the part. The next color can represent any material left between
0.003 and 0.002. The horizontal shading boundary near the middle of the dialog box
indicates the color used to show zero stock left (a correct toolpath). Values and colors
460 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
above this boundary denote areas above the stock; values and colors below this
boundary denote areas in the stock.
To change range settings, enter numeric values in the text boxes on the left. To change
the color mapped to a range, enter a value in the text box or choose the color palette
button and select a color from the Colors dialog box.
Post Processing
Post processing refers to the process by which the toolpaths in your Mastercam part
files are converted to a format that can be understood by your machine tool’s control
(for example, G-codes). A special program called a post processor reads the
Mastercam file and writes the appropriate NC code. Generally, every machine tool or
control requires its own post processor, customized to produce code formatted to
meet its exact requirements and user preferences. In addition, you can customize a
post processor to reflect job or shop preferences–for example, safety blocks or
tolerances.
Post processors have two components.
An executable file such as MP.DLL, which is provided with Mastercam. This is
often used “as is.” Custom executables can be developed for advanced
applications, as necessary.
A post customization script (.PST) which is used by MP.DLL to customize the
post output for your machine tool. It includes format statements, processing
logic, miscellaneous integers and custom variable definitions, system
variables, and so on. Mastercam includes a wide variety of working posts for
common machines and NC controllers, which can be further customized for
specific needs.
A single post executable (such as MP.DLL) produces NC output for a wide variety of
machines by reading different .PST files. You can use one post executable with one or
more .PST files.
Post processors do not read Mastercam part files directly. Instead, Mastercam creates
an NCI file as an intermediate file format to be used by the post processor. You can
choose to save the NCI files in a text format so that you can review them directly. This
can be very useful when customizing posts, debugging post problems, or analyzing
problems with the NC code for a particular part, because it lets you see the exact data
that the post is reading.
The machine definition file (.MMD, .LMD, .RMD, or .WMD) describes the
physical capabilities of your machine. These include the linear and rotary
axes that are mounted on the machine; the types of linear, rapid, and rotary
motion the axes are capable of, including limits; coolant options; axis
orientation; tool changers; and spindles, turrets, and chucks.
The selected control definition (.CONTROL) for the machine definition
provides information to the post processor about the processing capabilities
of the control. These include machining tolerance values; machine cycles
and subprograms; feed rate dimensioning; and many other settings. The
control definition also includes defaults for file locations, operation defaults
files, tool settings and offsets, and other referenced files.
The .PST file reads the information from the machine and control definition
and contains the processing logic and format statements to generate the
proper G-codes, M-codes and other commands for your machine. It also
contains information that Mastercam reads to customize its interface to
support the post.
Each control definition includes a list of post processors that have been configured for
the control. Use the Machine Definition Manager to select the specific post that will
be used with the machine or for a specific job. Mastercam's modular architecture
makes it easy to share a single control across multiple machines; define several posts
for a single machine; or update components when your equipment changes.
Notes:
• Mastercam also supports binary post processors. These are posts in which the
processing logic is encapsulated in a special binary file with a .PSB extension,
which cannot be edited in a standard text editor. Post text and similar data can
still be written to a separate .PST file, though, using the Control Definition
Manager.
• For more information on MP post processors, see the MP Post Processor
Reference Guide, available on CD from your Mastercam Reseller.
Note: Operations for which posting has been disabled are not posted even if they
are part of a batch job.
Select toolpath operations for batch processing from any Mastercam file, not
just from the current file.
Automatically submit toolpath operations for batch processing by selecting
the To batch option on the Toolpath parameters tab.
Create, save, and rerun batch files (.BCH), and edit batch files directly using a
file editor.
Automate toolpath regeneration and file saves of batched operations.
Set time limits on batched operations.
Log batch processing operations.
To begin a batch processing job, right-click in the Toolpath Manager and choose
Batch. The Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box opens, where you can create and
customize the batch job. In this section, you will learn about:
Selecting Files for Batch Processing
Selecting Operations from a Batch File (page 466)
Selecting Batch Operations from Mastercam Files (page 467)
Tagging Operations for Batch Processing (page 467)
Running Batch Jobs (page 467)
Reviewing Batch Processing Log Files (page 468)
Note: When you open a batch file, its contents overwrite whatever is already in
the window. You can only list the contents of one batch file at a time.
If you do not want to add any other operations to the list from the batch file, you can
click OK now to run the job.
TIPS:
• Save the Mastercam file before opening the Batch Toolpath Operations
dialog box. It reads the toolpaths from Mastercam files on your hard drive,
not from system memory, so until the current file is saved, it does not know
about its toolpaths.
• Operation types whose toolpath cannot be regenerated (for example,
Trimmed toolpaths) cannot be processed in batch mode.
• Operations tagged for batch processing cannot be transformed.
• Operations tagged for batch processing are not regenerated when you
regenerate operations in the Toolpath Manager. They can only be
regenerated during batch processing.
• If you clear the To batch toolpath parameter on an existing operation, the
operation must be regenerated.
Importing Operations
You can import saved operations to the current Mastercam file, with or without their
geometry. Import these operations from a previously created operations library.
You can also automatically recalculate feeds and speeds based on the current job
setup, put the operations in specific tool and construction planes, and check for and
eliminate duplicate tools.
Click the operation to select it for import. Mastercam marks selected operations with
a blue check mark. Press [Ctrl] and click to select multiple operations or to deselect an
operation. Press [Shift] and click to select a range. Choose OK to import the selected
operations.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Power User Tips • 469
Notes:
• If you have imported only the operation’s parameters, the operations in the
Toolpath Manager will be marked for regeneration.
• If you import parameters without geometry, the operation will be marked dirty.
You can assign the parameters to other geometry in your current file and then
regenerate the toolpath.
Exporting Operations
6
You can easily export operations from the current Mastercam file to an operations
library. Export these operations with or without their geometry.
You can also automatically check for and exclude duplicate tools from the exported
operations.
Click the operation to select it for export. Mastercam marks selected operations with a
blue check mark. Press [Ctrl] and click to select multiple operations or to deselect an
operation. Press [Shift] and click to select a range. Choose OK to export the selected
operations.
Transforming Operations
Use the Transform toolpaths function from the Toolpath menu to run the same
toolpaths in different locations or at different orientations in the same part file. You
470 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: The transformed operations will be written to the active machine group
(where the red arrow is in the Toolpath Manager), even if the source operations
are from a different machine group. Make sure the transformed operations are
compatible with the machine and control definition in the destination machine
group.
Use the Transform Operations Parameters dialog box to begin creating a transform
operation.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATH OPERATIONS / Power User Tips • 471
Select the source operations, the type of transform, and how you want to organize the
toolpaths which result. After you select the type of transformation, choose only one of
the remaining dialog box tabs (Translate, Rotate, Mirror) to complete the operation.
For example, if you choose a Rotate transformation, the Translate and Mirror tabs are
unavailable.
In this section, you will learn about:
6
Selecting Operations to Transform (page 471)
Choosing Transformation Types (page 472)
Organizing Transform Operations (page 472)
Associating Work Offsets (page 472)
You can select operations from different machine groups, but because each machine
group can have a different machine associated with it, verify that the transformed
operation can be run in the destination machine group.
Choose Off if you do not want to output any offset code, or choose Maintain source
operation's to use the same offset as the original toolpath. You can also choose to
assign a different offset to each new operation, based on the values you enter here. If
you choose Match existing offsets, Mastercam checks to see if an offset has already
been created which matches a particular transform, before it automatically creates a
new one.
Trimming Toolpaths
A trim operation is a special type of operation which lets you select one or more
toolpaths and trim them to one or more closed chains. Trim operations are similar to
containment boundaries or check surfaces, but can be more flexible because:
They let you select a Cplane or view that you can trim relative to.
You can trim any type of toolpath in addition to surface toolpaths.
You can trim more than one toolpath with the same trim operation.
When you create a trim operation, Mastercam stores it in the Toolpath
Manager like any other operation. It also keeps the original source operation,
marking it with a special trim icon.
The trim operation and source operations are associative with each other, which
means you can edit the parameters for each operation separately and update the
other operation by regenerating it. When you post, you only select the source
toolpaths, you do not post the Trimmed operation itself.
To create a trim operation, follow this general outline:
First, create the source toolpaths and the trim geometry. Note that
6
Mastercam will trim the toolpath right to the trim geometry, without regard
to cutter compensation, so you might offset the trim geometry from the
desired boundary by the width of the tool. The trim geometry needs to be a
closed contour, but it does not have to be at the same Z-depth as the part
geometry or tool moves; Mastercam will project it in the trim operation's
Cplane onto the toolpath to calculate the intersections with the toolpath.
Select Toolpaths, Trim toolpath from the menu. You will be prompted to
select the boundary chains, and then a point (called a bias point) which tells
Mastercam on which side of the boundary you want to keep the tool
movements. For example, if you were trying to contain a toolpath inside a
circle, click anywhere inside the circle.
Use the Trimmed dialog box to select the toolpaths to trim. You can also edit
or reselect the bias point. Choose the T/C Plane button to select a different
Cplane to use as the trimming plane, if desired. The Cplane you select
determines how Mastercam calculates the intersection of the boundary
geometry and the toolpath.
474 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Choose OK in the Trimmed dialog box to complete the operation. Both the
original operation and the trim operation appear in the Toolpath Manager.
When you are ready to cut the part, you only choose the source operation for
post processing. If you delete the trim operation, you must regenerate the
original toolpath.
Notes:
• If your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Wire, you can also create
toolpaths (wirepaths) for EDM machines. For more information, refer to the
“Mastercam X4 Wire Getting Started Guide” PDF located in your Mastercam
installation \Documentation folder.
• If Mastercam Art is installed, you can create Art toolpaths for your Art models
using the Art, Toolpath Art Base Surface function from the Mastercam menu.
For more information, refer to the online Help or contact your local Mastercam
Reseller.
Note: Mills that support multiaxis toolpaths also support the other types of
toolpaths described in this section.
TIPS:
• When working with toolpaths, you can use functions to transform, trim, or
wrap the toolpath around a cylinder with axis substitution.
• To wrap the toolpath, choose the Rotary axis check box and button in the
Toolpath Parameters tab for the selected operation.
• For more information on how to transform or trim operations, see
“Transforming Operations” on page 469 and “Trimming Toolpaths” on
page 473.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 477
After creating FBM-generated toolpaths, you can easily change parameters in the
FBM parent operation and regenerate all of the toolpaths. You can also make
customizations to the generated toolpaths before posting.
Associativity is maintained between the FBM parent operation, and the generated
toolpaths. FBM Drill also maintains associativity with the solid model. Mastercam
notifies you when any of these associative entities have been modified, marking them
as “dirty.”
TIP: If you customize any FBM-generated toolpaths, do so only when you are
sure that you will not regenerate the FBM parent operation. Any customization
is overwritten when the FBM-generated toolpaths are recreated.
FBM Requirements
Mastercam Mill Level 1 or Mastercam Router and higher
Mill or Router machine definition selected from the Machine Type menu
At least one solid part model in the current .MCX file. For use with FBM Drill,
the model must have one or more hole features. FBM Mill requires one or
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 479
more open, closed, or through pockets with flat floors and straight walls (90
degrees)
(FBM Mill only) Stock model defined in the Machine Group Properties,
Stock Setup tab
FBM Drill
Use FBM Drill to automatically detect holes in a solid based on your
specified criteria and generate a complete series of drilling and
chamfering operations for the detected features. FBM Drill can also
generate circle mill or helix bore operations for large-hole features
when you activate the Hole milling function.
Hole detection criteria includes holes that are blind, through, co-axial,
and split between faces. FBM Drill also reads hole data from solids
created with the SolidWorks® Hole Wizard®.
You can choose to group FBM-generated drilling operations by tool or
by plane. Use other FBM Drill options to define deep drilling, spot
drilling, and pre-drilling operation parameters.
You control the tool selection by using tools already in the .MCX file, choosing a tool
library, and allowing Mastercam to create tools, when necessary. When you activate
hole mapping for the FBM Drill operation, Mastercam uses data in the selected hole
mapping file to automatically assign specific tools to specific hole features (as defined
by diameter and hole type).
In the Features page, you can review the detected features list and edit or delete
features before generating a complete series of drill operations for the selected
features
FBM Drill generates a series of individual drill and hole milling operations that are
listed in the Toolpath Manager, nested under the parent FBM Drill operation.
You can change parameters in the FBM parent operation and regenerate all of the
7
toolpaths. You can also make customizations to the generated toolpaths before
posting.
Associativity is maintained between the solid model, the FBM Drill parent operation,
and its generated toolpaths.
Mastercam notifies you when any of these associative entities have been modified by
marking the model and operations as “dirty.”
Note: The drill cycles used in each operation are determined by the cycle stored
with each tool definition. Mastercam uses only cycles that have been enabled in
the active control definition on the Machine Cycles page.
480 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Sorting hole map data—To sort hole mapping entries in ascending/descending order
by any column in the table, click in the column heading. To reverse the sort order,
click again.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 481
Navigating—Use the [Tab] key to move between columns. Use the up and down
arrow keys to move the cursor between rows. The [Page up] and [Page Down] keys
positions the cursor in first and last rows, respectively.
Selecting rows—Use [Shift+click] and [Ctrl+click] methods to select
more than one row. Or, use the Select all and Unselect all buttons.
Tips for Working in the FBM Drill Features Page
Use the following guidelines when working in the FBM Drill Features page.
Sorting the list—Click in any column heading to sort the list in ascending/descending
order by the column data. To reverse the sort order, click again.
Selecting more than one feature—Use [Shift+click] and [Ctrl+click]
methods. Or, use the Select all and Unselect all buttons. Other
selection options for common features and co-axial holes are
described below.
Selecting all co-axial hole features—Activate the Select co-axial features check box
to automatically select all co-axial holes in the list (multiple holes that share a
common axis).
Selecting all features with the same attributes (for example, hole type, diameter, tool
plane, and finish tool)—Activate the Select
common features check box. Then click the
button to access the Feature selection filter dialog
box. Select all of the attributes that you want to match in the list and click OK.
Mastercam automatically selects all holes in the list that match your selection filter.
Changing the hole type, tool plane, or finish tool—Select one or more features. Then
right-click in the corresponding column (Hole type, Plane, Finish tool) and choose
one from the list.
Locating hole features—Use one of the following methods:
Choose the Select button to return to the graphics window and
select hole features in the solid model. When you end selection
7
and return to the Features page, all selected holes are highlighted
in the list.
Select one or more features in the list to highlight its geometry
including wireframe face geometry and show the normal direction
in the graphics window. After selecting features in the list, choose
the Hide dialog button to minimize the FBM Drill dialog box and
get a better view of the graphics window. Press [Esc] when finished to
maximize the dialog box.
Suppressing features—Select one or more features in the list. Then right-click and
choose Suppress. No toolpaths are created for suppressed features. However, when
482 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
FBM Mill
FBM Mill analyzes a solid part, detects all machining features
in a specified plane, and automatically generates all of the 2D
milling toolpaths necessary to completely machine the
selected features.
From a common set of parameters, FBM Mill creates the
following types of 2D toolpaths:
roughing and restmill
separate finish toolpaths for walls and floors (optional)
facing if stock in the Z axis is above the top of the part (optional)
2D contour, ramp contour and remachining contour for slug cutting
(optional)
Helix bore or Circle mill for round through hole milling (optional)
outside contours if the stock extends beyond the part in the X and Y axes
(optional)
You control the tool selection by using tools already in the .MCX file, pre-defining up
to 10 preferred tools per operation type, choosing a tool library, and allowing
Mastercam to create tools, when necessary.
FBM Mill machines closed, open, nested, and through pockets. For complex nested
pockets, Mastercam creates a separate zone for each depth and creates the
boundaries required to machine it. In the following example, 6 zones were created
and machined separately.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 483
FBM Mill-generated 2D milling operations are listed in the Toolpath Manager, nested
under the parent FBM Mill operation.
You can easily change parameters in the FBM parent operation and regenerate all of
the toolpaths. You can also make customizations to the generated toolpaths before
posting. Associativity is maintained between the FBM parent operation, and the
generated toolpaths. Mastercam notifies you when any of these associative entities
have been modified, marking the operations as “dirty.”
Note: Currently, FBM Mill detects only pockets with flat floors and straight walls
in a single plane.
The types of toolpaths created for each zone appear in the highlighted (gray) section
of the table. In the Toolpath Manager, Mastercam creates a separate toolpath group
for each zone and its FBM Mill-generated toolpaths.
Notes:
• FBM Mill generates one face toolpath and one outside contour toolpath per
FBM Mill operation if the stated conditions are met.
• Use the FBM Mill parameters pages to control the types of toolpaths FBM Mill
generates for your part
This toolpath supports many powerful entry methods including a custom entry
method, all designed to simplify the programming of complex pocket and standing
core shapes.
Micro lifts on back moves further refine the dynamic milling motion and avoid
excessive heat build up.
Entry methods and the micro lifts support custom feeds and speeds to optimize and
generate safe tool motion. Dynamic mill's flexible retract options support keeping the
tool down in smaller parts, and rapid retract on in larger parts.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 487
This toolpath requires two chains. The outside chain represents the stock boundary,
allowing the toolpath to move freely outside this area. The inner chain defines the
limit of the toolpath.
The toolpath starts from the outside and works its way in towards the inner boundary.
7
488 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Each step takes on the final shape of the part as it steps over while approaching the
final pass.
Climb (or conventional) motion is maintained, and the transitions between cuts
utilize efficient high speed methods.
Figure 7-3: Peel mill toolpath examples: between two contours and
along a single contour
When cutting hardened material, use the peel mill toolpath to make many fast,
shallow cuts, rather than using a straight toolpath to make fewer slow, deep cuts. This
technique avoids burying the tool, easing the cutter into and out of the material.
7
490 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
This machining strategy supports the full depth of the cutting tool, utilizing more of
the cutter's flute length and resulting in less cycle time and tool wear.
Cut parameters let you control smoothing to create the best toolpath, avoiding sharp
corners or direction changes.
Use smoothing options in the Cut parameters page to round the corners of the
toolpath. This lets the machine tool maintain a higher feed rate, resulting in longer
tool life and less wear.
An optional setting allows you to use core mill style passes (begin outside and move
in).
492 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The Arc Filter/Tolerance page has additional settings you can use to further refine the
toolpath motion.
Contour Toolpaths
Use contour toolpaths to drive the tool along a path. This toolpath type is appropriate
for both roughing and finishing applications. Contour toolpaths remove material
along a path defined by a chain of curves; they do not clean out an enclosed area. You
can also cut the contour in depth cuts and/or multiple passes in the cutting plane,
and create remachining operations.
When creating contour toolpaths, you can select an unlimited number of chains for
each toolpath, creating either 2D or 3D contour toolpaths.
2D contour toolpaths cut geometry in a single plane (typically XY) at a
constant depth (Z), although you can create multiple passes at different
depths. Mastercam automatically selects this type if all the geometry lies in
the same plane.
3D contour toolpaths cut geometry in XY and Z, where the Z depth can vary
over the toolpath. Use this type if the geometry for each cutting pass is not
contained within a single plane.
To begin creating a contour toolpath, choose Contour from the Toolpaths menu. After
chaining geometry and selecting a tool, use the Cut parameters page to choose a
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 493
contour type and enter values for different cutting parameters and compensation
options.
Use the pages nested below the Cut parameters page to activate and configure
advanced toolpath features. These let you create lead in/out moves, depth cuts,
multiple cutting passes, and tabs.
To begin creating a chamfer toolpath, choose Contour from the Toolpaths menu.
After chaining geometry and selecting a tool, select 2D chamfer or 3D chamfer from
the Contour type drop list in the Cut parameters page (Mastercam selects 2D or 3D
automatically, depending on the chained geometry). Then set the chamfer
dimensions in the fields provided.
Typically when creating a chamfer toolpath, you will set the Depth (on the Linking
parameters page) to 0.0 relative to the chained geometry and let Mastercam calculate
the tool depth from the chamfer dimensions. Enter a non-zero depth, (+) or (-), only if
you want to locate the top of the chamfer at a distance from the chained geometry.
IMPORTANT: You must select one of the following tool types when creating
a chamfer toolpath; otherwise a warning message displays and the toolpath is
rejected:
• Bull-nose cutter
• Ball (spherical) cutter
• Chamfer mill
To begin creating a ramp contour toolpath, choose Contour from the Toolpaths
menu. After chaining geometry and selecting a tool, choose Ramp from the Contour
type drop list in the Cut parameters page. Then set the chamfer dimensions in the
fields provided.
Notes:
7
• If you base a remachining operation on a previous operation, and then change
the order of the operations in the Toolpath Manager so that the remachining
operation is before the roughing operation, the remachining operation will not
be able to correctly calculate the area of the roughing operation.
• Do not use compensation in control with remachining operations.
• Contour remachining “keep tool down” moves between remachining passes are
not gouge checked! Take the necessary precautions to eliminate the risk of
gouging. This applies only for contour remachining toolpaths, and only if you
choose the option to “keep tool down” for depth cuts or multiple passes.
496 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• The Top of stock that you enter in the Linking parameters tab sets the
maximum Z height for the oscillating contour toolpath. However, the tool will
not exceed the maximum Z depth that you specify in the Cut parameters page.
• The Distance along contour determines how far the tool moves in X or Y before
changing direction in the Z axis.
• If you edit the operation and modify the tool, Mastercam automatically verifies
that the flute length of the tool is sufficient. A message warns you if the flute
length is less than the overall oscillation distance.
Note: For more information on creating onion skin contour toolpaths, refer to
the Mastercam Help.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 497
Mastercam also provides options for editing and cutting off the tabs. Use the
procedures below to learn more about:
Creating tabs
498 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• If a tab position will overlap a corner, the tab will wrap around it.
• Additional options let you specify a size threshold for creating tabs, so that
Mastercam creates only tabs that meet or exceed the dimensions you define.
This avoids creating tabs for smaller parts where they are not necessary.
Choose Manual, and then Position to manually select each tab location
in the graphics window.
Choose Manual, and then Use square point for tab position to place
tabs at each square point along the contour.
3 Configure the tab size. You can create Full tabs or Partial tabs. Full tabs are
the full stock height; at the tab locations, the tool retracts fully from the part.
Partial tabs are less than the full stock height; you use the Tab thickness field
to define how far to pull back from the cut depth (typically, partial tabs are
thin).
4 After choosing the type of tab to create, enter the Width of the tab to define
how far it extends along the toolpath.
5 In the Tab Cutoff page, select the Cutoff Operation check box.
6 Then choose one of the following operation types.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 499
No cutoff operation: Leaves the tabs uncut so that they can be removed
by hand. Typically, when selecting this option, you will create partial tabs
instead of full tabs and use a small tab thickness.
After all contour chains: Cuts the tabs after cutting all the chains in the
operation. For example, if you are cutting several parts, first all the parts
are cut and then all the tabs are cut.
After each contour chain: Cut a contour then cuts the tabs before moving
to the next contour. For example, if you are cutting several parts, the tabs
are cut from the first part before the second part is cut.
If you select this option, you can also choose to Cut tabs with first finish
pass. Consider using this option when your contour toolpath have both
roughing and finishing passes; for example, when you are using depth
cuts. In this case, Mastercam will leave the tabs during the roughing
passes, and cut them off with the finish pass, rather than creating a
separate cutoff pass.
Separate operation: Creates a separate Tab Cutoff operation and
includes it in the Toolpath Manager so that you can edit or customize it.
You can select a different tool, edit the feed rate or coolant options, or
change other parameters that you would like to be different from the
original contour operation, such as the lead-in/lead-out entry and exit
moves.
If you do not create separate Tab Cutoff operations, Mastercam applies
the lead-in and lead-out parameters set in the original contour operation
for each individual tab cutoff operation.
Note: The option to create a separate tab cutoff operation is available only when
you first create the operation. When editing the contour parameters from the
Toolpath Manager, you cannot add a separate tab cutoff operation.
Editing Tabs
Once you have added tabs to a contour toolpath, use one of the following methods to
edit them:
To access the Tabs dialog box, click the Parameters icon for the contour
toolpath in the Toolpath Manager. Use the Tabs page to view and edit the
original tab parameters. Changes you make using this method affect all the
tabs in the toolpath. The only function you cannot access is the option to
create a separate cutoff operation.
500 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To edit individual tabs, click the Geometry icon for the contour toolpath in
the Toolpath Manager. This opens the Chain Manager where you can add,
delete, or move individual tab locations. You can also change the size and
shape of an individual tab.
Note: The Edit tabs option is available only when you right-click on a chain; it
does not appear if you click elsewhere in the Chain Manager dialog box.
ea
Ed b
ab
a
e
e
dt
let
let
it t
ov
De
M
IMPORTANT: If you have created a separate cutoff operation for the tabs, the
changes you make to the tabs in the original operation are not associative;
they do not affect the cutoff operation. Therefore, any additions, deletions or
modifications you make to tabs in the original operation must also be made—
using the same method—in the cutoff operation.
Circle Toolpaths
Circle toolpaths efficiently mill a circle when you select just a single point, or other
circle toolpaths for related applications. After milling the center of the circle,
Mastercam calculates an entry arc before approaching the perimeter and then a
similar exit arc. You can add enhancements such as multiple passes, multiple depth
cuts, and helical plunge moves, and fine-tune the entry and exit arcs.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 501
TIP: Use helix bore toolpaths for operations with non-center cutting insert
cutters.
7
502 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To begin creating a circle mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle Paths, Circmill.
Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select one or more hole locations for
the toolpath.
After selecting the tool, use the properties pages in the toolpath dialog box to enter
values for different cutting parameters and compensation options.
To begin creating a helix bore toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle paths, Helix bore.
Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select one or more hole locations for
the toolpath.
After selecting the tool, use the other properties pages in the toolpath dialog box to
enter toolpath settings.
Note: There is no specific tool type for Felix tools. When creating a tool definition
for a Felix tool, create it as a flat endmill.
7
To begin creating a slot mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle paths, Slot Mill.
The number of active teeth, top of thread, thread depth, and thread pitch parameters
all indirectly determine the number of revolutions that the tool makes while
machining the thread. If the number of revolutions is less than one, Mastercam
automatically adjusts the top of thread to create at least one revolution.
In this example, a slot mill was used to cut the coarse threads around the top of a valve
core:
To begin creating a thread mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle paths, Thread Mill.
Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select one or more hole locations for
the toolpath.
After selecting a tool, use the properties pages in the toolpath dialog box to define the
Taper angle and other thread mill parameters.
Use the following guide to help orient your thread mill toolpath so that it cuts the
threads in the intended manner.
Drill Toolpaths
Mastercam supports many types of standard drill cycles. Standard drill toolpaths
provide flexible options for selecting drilling points, such as selecting either points or
arcs; automatically selecting all the points from a previous operation; or choosing
drilling patterns such as grids or bolt holes without first creating geometry.
Note: You can also customize drilling operations and create entirely new drilling
cycles. For more information, see “Customizing Drilling Operations” on
page 511.
To begin creating a drill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Drill. Then use the Drill Point
Selection dialog box to select one or more hole locations for the toolpath and choose
the sort order.
7
After selecting a tool, use the Cut parameters page to choose a drill cycle from the
Cycle drop-down list, and set drill cycle parameters. Edit the fields and settings in
other drill toolpath pages, as necessary.
506 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• Drill cycle availability is determined by the control definition and is machine-
and control-dependent. For more information on using a control definition
with a specific machine definition, see “Choosing a Machine Definition” on
page 360.
• The post must support the selected cycle.
material chips. Used often with chips that are hard to remove. (Individual
peck drill moves do not backplot – the code only displays after you create the
NC file.)
Chip Break: Drills holes with depths of more than three times the tool
diameter. Retracts partially out of the drilled hole to break material chips
which aids chip removal.
Tap: Taps right or left internal threaded holes.
Bore #1 (feed out): Drills holes with feed-in and feed-out motion. This
creates a straight hole with a smooth surface.
Bore #2 (stop spindle, rapid out): Drills holes with feed-in, stop spindle, and
rapid-out motion.
Fine bore (shift): Stops the spindle at the end of each drill point, then spins
to orient the tool to a pre-defined angle, shifts off the wall of the drill hole,
and retracts.
Custom cycles: Drills holes using customized parameters.
TIP: Multiaxis drill toolpaths (which let you rotate the drill axis and change it
from hole to hole) are an optional feature. For more information, contact your
Mastercam Reseller.
7
508 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Last: Mastercam creates a drill toolpath using the drill points and sorting
order of the previous drill operation.
Masking on an arc—Enter a Diameter value to drill at the center point of all the arcs
whose diameter is within the specified tolerance, or choose Mask on Arc to select an
arc from the graphics window. The selected arc can be either open or closed.
Pattern drilling—Select the Pattern check box and set additional options on this
section for creating a grid of holes or a bolt circle. Predefine points or geometry are
not needed to use these functions.
The 2D sort, Rotary sort, and Cross sort tabs provide various patterns you can
choose for specific application types. Each tab and its application is described below.
510 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To choose a sort pattern, click the button in the selected tab and set additional
options, as necessary.
Choose a 2D sort pattern when the points are generally distributed
in a flat plane. Select the Point to Point option to sort the points by
the shortest distance from one point to the next (Mastercam will
prompt you to select the first point.
Choose a Rotary sort pattern for circular toolpaths.
Choose a Cross sort pattern when the points are wrapped around a cylinder.
The picture on each sort pattern button gives you an idea of how the points will be
sorted relative to the starting point, which is indicated on the button by the red cross.
Hold your cursor over each button to see the name of the sort pattern.
Notes:
• Only the drill points in the current toolpath are sorted, not all drill points in
the graphics window.
• The start point of the drill toolpath is marked with a red point.
Automatic Drilling
Use the automatic drilling functions described below to create a complete series of
drill operations for a set of points or arcs.
Automatic Drill Toolpaths (page 512)
Start Hole Toolpaths (page 513)
TIP: Use FBM Drill to automatically detect holes in a solid based on your
specified criteria and generate a complete series of drilling and chamfering
operations for the detected features. For more information on Mastercam’s
feature-based toolpaths, see “Feature Based Machining (FBM)” on page 477.
Note: You cannot use the Drill Point Manager to edit the “points” of Solids
drilling operations.
Then use the tabs in the Automatic Arc Drilling dialog box to set parameters for the
drill operations that will be automatically created.
The drill cycles used in each operation created for automatic drill toolpaths are
determined by the cycle stored with each tool definition. Only cycles that have been
enabled in the Machine Cycles section for the active control definition can be used.
Note: If you select a flat endmill as the finish tool type, a drill/counterbore drill
cycle is used for the finish drill cycle.
The result of the automatic drilling process is a series of individual drill operations
that display in the Toolpath Manager. The operations are not associative with each
other after they have been generated; if you change one operation after it has been
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 513
generated, Mastercam does not change any others in response. You can use the
Toolpath Manager to view, modify, move, or regroup each operation individually
without affecting the others.
Start Hole Toolpaths
Use the Start Holes toolpath to automatically create drill toolpaths at the plunge
points for one or more selected operations. Mastercam intelligently scans individual
depth cuts and passes for each operation, and creates toolpaths for multiple plunge
points if necessary.
To begin creating start hole toolpaths, choose Toolpaths, Circle Paths, Start Hole.
Then use the Drill Start Holes dialog box to select all of the operations that need drill
start hole toolpaths. Mastercam automatically determines where plunge holes are
required for the selected operations, and will calculate the dimensions of the start
holes based on the sizes of the tools used in those operations.
To create just a simple drill operation, choose Basic.
To include pre-drill or spot drill cycles or use other advanced drilling
features, choose Advanced.
Note: To add space to the start holes so that they are a little bigger than the tool,
use the Additional diameter amount and Additional depth amount fields.
Finally, select the tool library in which Mastercam will look for the drills it needs to
match the sizes of the start holes. If an exact match is not available in the selected
library, a drill whose diameter is within the specified Diameter match tolerance of
the hole will be used.
7
IMPORTANT: Start hole toolpaths are not associative. If you change the
original toolpath, the Start Hole toolpaths are not automatically updated. When
you regenerate the original toolpath after editing it, manually edit the start hole
toolpaths as necessary.
514 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: The Start Holes toolpath function works with all toolpath types but is
especially effective when used together with the Align plunge entries for start
holes feature found in Surface Rough Pocket. This feature organizes all of the
plunge points so that one pre-drilled hole can serve as the plunge position for
multiple depth cuts.
Pocket Toolpaths
With Mastercam pocket toolpath functions, you can integrate roughing and finishing
cuts in the same operation, or simultaneously create separate roughing and finishing
operations. You can create separate entry/exit moves for each type of cut, and choose
from many different roughing patterns, including open pockets and high speed
pocketing with trochoidal loops to minimize tool burial. Finishing options include
feed rate and spindle speed overrides, thin wall finishing, spring passes, and
remachining.
Use the following outline as a guide for creating pocket operations and organizing the
different pocketing options.
Chain geometry and select a tool
Choose Pocket from the Toolpaths menu.
Then, chain the geometry for the pockets. All geometry used to define a
pocket and any islands must be in the same construction plane. You cannot
select a 3D chain for a pocket toolpath. Mastercam automatically interprets
closed boundaries within the chained geometry as islands and adjusts the
toolpath accordingly.
Use the Tool page to select a tool and enter general toolpath parameters.
Note: Consider using a surface pocket toolpath if you need to create a pocket
with complicated geometry.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 515
Mastercam lets you select from several pocket types, which are based on your pocket
geometry:
Standard: Mastercam intelligently analyzes all selected chains and considers
the largest of the closed chains to be the stock to machine. The tool is
constrained by the machined area (the largest closed boundary selected). All
other smaller closed chains within the largest chain are considered non-
7
machinable areas and are avoided.
Facing or Island facing: Mastercam automatically adjusts cut depths for
islands.
Open pockets: Mastercam automatically enters and exits the pocket
through the opening.
Remachining: Mastercam calculates the stock remaining from a previous
operation (or from a roughing tool dimension) and just machines the
leftover stock.
516 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: When you select a pocket type other than Standard, Mastercam displays
additional parameters below the field. Use these parameters to fine-tune the
cutting action.
Use the other options on this page to set other general cutting parameters.
Select a cutting method
Use the Roughing page to select a cutting method and set other options for
the roughing passes. Mastercam offers different cutting patterns so you can
choose the one best suited to your part geometry and application
requirements.
Use additional options in the Entry Motion page nested below the Roughing
page to define tool plunge motion. You can define tool entry motion as
helical or ramp, or you can turn it off for the toolpath.
Create a finishing pass
Use the Finishing page to create a finish pass. You can override the feed rate
and spindle speed and set special options for thin wall pockets. Mastercam
outputs the finish pass as a separate operation so that you can further edit
and refine it separately from the roughing operation.
Use additional options in the Lead In/Out page nested below the Finishing
page to create separate lead in/out moves for the finish pass. These moves
are distinct from the entry moves defined for the roughing passes.
Create additional finishing operation
To add a separate finish operation to the Toolpath Manager after the pocket
operation:
Select the Create additional finishing operation check box on the Cut
parameters page
Then select the Finish check box on the Finishing page to enable finishing
passes for the toolpath.
The new finish operation uses the same parameters and geometry as the original
pocket toolpath, but consists only of finishing passes. This allows you to select a
different tool for the pocket finishing passes.
Wireframe Toolpaths
Use wireframe toolpaths to use surface machining styles without having to create or
select surface entities. Mastercam calculates the surfaces from your wireframe
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 517
geometry. In this section, you will learn about the different types of wireframe
toolpaths you can create from the Toolpaths, Wireframe submenu, including:
Lofted Swept 2D
Toolpaths(page 518) Toolpaths(page 520)
Revolved Swept 3D
Toolpaths(page 518) Toolpaths(page 520)
Note: Creating wireframe toolpaths can be faster and easier than creating and
machining surfaces. However, Mastercam offers you more options and greater
flexibility when creating surface toolpaths. For more information, see “Surface
Toolpaths” on page 533.
Ruled Toolpaths
Use this toolpath type to create a linear blend between chains of curves, simulating a
ruled surface over several chains of geometry.
To begin creating a ruled toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Wireframe, Ruled and use the
7
Chaining dialog box to select between 2 and 100 chains.
After selecting chains and a tool, use the Ruled Parameters tab to enter the toolpath
parameters. First, select a cutting method to define the pattern that the tool will follow
over the part surface. Then enter other toolpath dimensions and compensation
options.
Finally, select the trimming options. You can define up to two trimming planes for the
toolpath. Each trimming plane consists of a value along one of the coordinate axes. If
the toolpath would extend past the trim plane, it is clipped; if the trim plane is outside
the toolpath, the toolpath will be extended to it.
518 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Lofted Toolpaths
Use lofted toolpaths when you want to create a smooth, curved blend between chains
of curves or cross-sections, simulating a lofted surface over several chains of
geometry.
To begin creating a lofted toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Wireframe, Lofted and use the
Chaining dialog box to select between 2 and 100 chains.
After selecting chains and a tool, use the Lofted Parameters tab to enter the toolpath
parameters.
First, select a cutting direction, across the calculated surface or along it, and
enter the step sizes for each cutting pass.
Then select a cutting method to define the pattern that the tool will follow
over the part surface and enter other toolpath dimensions and
compensation options.
TIP: When you are chaining the geometry for ruled or lofted toolpaths, select
the chains in order and make sure that the chaining direction is consistent for
all the chains so that the toolpath does not “twist.”
Revolved Toolpaths
Choose Toolpaths, Wireframe, Revolved to create a surface of revolution from a
cross-section. This toolpath type is calculated in the current construction plane, then
transformed into the current tool plane. You can trim the toolpath to a given height or
width (relative to the construction plane) and generate a convex or concave shape.
You must select a ball endmill for this toolpath type. The following picture shows a
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 519
part profile lying flat in the XY plane, and the revolved toolpath created from the
geometry.
7
To begin creating a coons patch toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Wireframe, Coons and
enter the number of patches to create in both the along and across directions. You can
select up to 50 patches in each direction.
After chaining the across and along contours and selecting a tool, use options in the
Toolpath parameters and Coons parameters tabs to define the tool, and set the
cutting direction, cutting method, and other toolpath parameters and compensation
options.
520 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Swept 2D Toolpaths
Choose Toolpaths, Wireframe, Swept 2D to create 2½D toolpaths by sweeping one
boundary (the across contour) along a second contour (the along contour). A swept
2D toolpath can have only one along boundary. The across and along boundaries are
blended to generate a 2½D toolpath.
Swept 3D Toolpaths
Choose Toolpaths, Wireframe, Swept 3D to simulate a surface with any of the
following sets of boundaries function:
One across boundary and one along boundary. Unlike 2D swept toolpaths,
the geometry does not have to be confined to a plane.
One across boundary and two along boundaries.
Two across boundaries and one along boundary.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 521
These boundaries may consist of any combination of lines, arcs, and splines.
The longer of the two matching boundaries (along or across) is broken into a number
of segments based on the cut distance you define. This number of segments is then
applied to the other matching boundary.
Specialized Toolpaths
In this section, you will learn about the types of specialized toolpaths you can create,
including
Face Toolpaths (page 521)
Point Toolpaths (page 522)
Manual Entry Operations (page 523)
Face Toolpaths
Use a facing toolpath to quickly clean the stock from the top of a part, qualify the top
of the part, and create a flat surface for future operations. You can base the toolpath
on either chained geometry or on the current stock model. Mastercam provides
additional options for controlled engagement, zigzag, and one way cutting methods
to minimize burring or chipping on the final pass along the opposing edge of the face.
7
To begin creating a face toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Face. Then use the Chaining
dialog box to select the part geometry, or simply choose OK without selecting
anything to use the stock model.
After selecting a tool, use the properties pages that display in the toolpath dialog box
to enter the toolpath parameters and complete the toolpath. For more information on
each properties page, click the Help button at the bottom of each page.
522 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIPS:
• When facing the stock, it is important to have the tool overlap the edges of
the part by at least 50% of its diameter to prevent leaving scallops of
material at the edges of the stock.
• To face islands, consider using a pocket toolpath, which includes an
automatic island facing feature.
Point Toolpaths
Positioning the tool at a specific point or making it follow a series of specific points is a
helpful technique you can use to avoid a fixture or clamp, or to get the tool into or out
of a tight area or an awkward shape. You might also use this type of toolpath to
position the tool between cutting operations.
Point toolpaths let you build a series of tool movements by selecting a series of
individual locations in the graphics window, rather than have the tool follow
geometry.
To begin creating a point toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Point and use the Point
Toolpath ribbon bar to create the toolpath.
Figure 7-8: Point Toolpath ribbon bar
e
pid od
Ra e m
e
rat
M ve
p
g
ku
mo
ed
an
ov
d
c
Re
Ch
Fe
Ad
Ba
When you begin creating the toolpath, you are prompted to select the first point to
which the tool will rapid from the home position. To add additional points, click the
locations in the graphics window. Use the G0 (rapid) or G1 (feed rate) buttons to
define the type of move before selecting points, or to edit them afterwards.
For rapid moves to the point, the control definition determines whether the
rapid move is broken up into separate moves for each axis or interpolated in
multiple axes.
For feed rate moves, the tool moves to the new points at the feed rate you set.
Use the Back up button to delete points and back up to the previous point. Click OK
when you finish selecting the points.
Use the Tool parameters tab to select a tool, coolant, and set other toolpath options.
To achieve the desired tool motion, try disabling the reference points feature (deselect
the Ref points check box).
TOOLPATH TYPES / Additional Router Toolpaths • 523
IMPORTANT: You must ensure that the text or codes are appropriate for your
control and post processor and are formatted correctly, and that the post
processor is written to properly handle the comments.
To begin creating a manual entry operation, choose Toolpaths, Manual Entry and use
the Manual Entry dialog box to define the text to insert. You can select a file or enter
the text right in the dialog box (a maximum of 750 characters).
If you select a file, you can choose to copy the text to the part file (saving it
with the part), or create an external link to the source file used when you
post.
If you choose to create an external link to the text file, you can edit the file
whenever you wish without modifying the operations in Mastercam. The
updated text appears in your programs the next time you post.
Saw Toolpaths
Use a saw toolpath to drive a saw blade cutting along a straight line. With Mastercam's
saw toolpath, you can program multiple saw cuts using a single tool plane (for
example, TOP) in a single operation.
Note: Typically, the axis of rotation of the saw blade is parallel to the sheet. Use
the Machine Definition Manager to define a right angle aggregate for the
machine definitions used with this toolpath.
When selecting chains for a saw toolpath, you indicate a kerf direction (cut side) for
each selected chain. Mastercam allows for kerf direction differences on a per-chain
basis within the same operation and stores this data with each chain so you can
modify it as needed.
You also control the arbor side based on the selected cutting direction (Climb or
Conventional).
TOOLPATH TYPES / Additional Router Toolpaths • 525
7
To begin creating a saw toolpath:
1 Choose a Router machine definition from the Machine Type menu.
2 Choose Saw from the Toolpaths menu.
3 Mastercam displays the Chaining dialog box and prompts you to select the
first chain for the toolpath. Select a chain of entities in the graphics window,
and, when prompted, choose a point to set the kerf side for the chain. Repeat
this process until all chains have been selected for the toolpath.
4 When finished selecting chains, choose OK to close the dialog box and
continue.
526 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
5 mm arcs spaced
32 mm apart
Note: Use the Machine Definition Manager to create definitions for drill blocks
or aggregate heads. For more information, see “Machine and Control
Definitions” on page 729.
Drill blocks contain multiple drills and are required to create Block Drill toolpaths in
Mastercam Router. The Block Drill toolpath is specially designed to use multiple tools
for drilling in a single operation. Drill blocks cannot be used for any toolpath other
than Block Drill.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Additional Router Toolpaths • 527
The example below shows a drill block and offsets needed by Mastercam when
defining the tooling.
Lead drill
Offset from
lead drill to Offset from
second drill lead drill to
third drill
Both head and tool position offsets
are relative to the lead drill
In the following section, you will learn to use the block drilling toolpath in Mastercam
Router to filter drilling points by depth, and to drill blind holes using a drill block that
includes brad point drills. If the drill block contains different tool types of the same
diameter as the arcs to drill, Mastercam gives preference to brad point drills when
drilling blind holes.
“Filtering Drilling Points by Depth” on page 528 shows how Mastercam can
filter out arcs in the same location but at different depths. This technique
eliminates the need to delete extra geometry or use masking to remove it
from cabinet parts imported from other CAD programs.
7
“Drilling Blind Holes with the Block Drilling Toolpath” on page 529 shows a
technique for drilling blind holes by adding brad point drill bits to a drill
block, and defining stock.
528 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Mastercam filters out the hole geometry automatically so you can easily avoid drilling
the same hole twice.
Use entity at highest Z depth keeps the drill points at the highest Z
depth and filters out any drill points at other depths.
7
7 Window-select the drill geometry for the toolpath and choose OK.
Mastercam automatically filters the drill geometry, and uses the geometry at the
highest or lowest depth, depending on your selection in the Sorting dialog box.
Set up the drill block by adding brad point drill bits of the diameter of the
blind holes. Drill blocks are the component Mastercam uses to represent
gang tooling.
Set up the stock.
Create a block drill toolpath to drill blind holes.
Setting up the drill block
Blind holes are typically drilled with brad point drills.
Once you have opened the router machine definition, follow these general
steps to add one or more brad point drills to the drill block.
8 Choose OK to close the Drill block properties dialog box, and then choose
OK to close the Machine Definition Manager.
IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive tear-out, Mastercam will not use the brad
point drill tools in a block drill to drill through holes.
3 If the arcs in your geometry look like the following picture, choose Sorting in
the Drill Point Selection dialog box:
4 The Sorting dialog box allows you to filter out either the upper or lower arc so
that the hole is drilled only once. In the 2D Sort tab, choose an option under
Depth Filtering to use the arcs at the highest or lowest Z depth.
Tool stations are mounted on the block and hold individual tools.
Large or complicated routers might have several heads, each of which can contain
several blocks. Each block, in turn, can have multiple tools. When creating an
aggregate head, you work at the block level to define individual blocks and their tool
stations. In some instances, you will find that what is commonly referred to as an
“aggregate head” outside of Mastercam is defined as a block in Mastercam.
Mastercam supports right-angle, compound-angle, and vertical blocks. The offset is
the distance from the center of the block base to a known position on the machine
tool.
The offset is represented as a coordinate position. For example, X100 Y0 Z0 would
place the aggregate block 100mm in X from the reference point.
Z
Y
X
Aggregate position offset
shown in side view
7
Surface Toolpaths
In this section, you will learn about Mastercam’s standard surface toolpaths and
surface high speed toolpaths.
Standard rough and finish toolpaths include parallel, radial, project,
flowline, and contour. Additional roughing toolpaths are available for
restmill, pocket, and plunge strategies. Standard surface finish toolpaths also
include steep, shallow, pencil, leftover, scallop, and blend. Each standard
toolpath type is described in more detail below.
534 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Surface high speed toolpaths produce the smoothest, most efficient tool
motions when machining surface models (or solid faces). For more
information, see “Surface High Speed Toolpaths” on page 547.
When you activate Mastercam's 3D Advanced Toolpath Refinement for your
Mastercam installation, you can refine surface and high speed surface toolpaths,
reducing machining time and improving machined surface quality.
Figure 7-9: Examples: Before (left) and after (right) applying 3D
Advanced Toolpath Refinement filtering and smoothing
Once activated, you can use options in the Refine Toolpaths dialog box to convert the
toolpath originally created using G1, G2, G3 motions to a refined set of “smoothed” G1
motions wherever possible, and within the tolerances you specify. Smoothing
redistributes a toolpath’s node points, avoiding the clustering and grouping of points
that can cause marks and other imperfections. It does this through shifting, removing,
and/or adding node points along an already generated toolpath.
Use one of the following methods to access this dialog box:
Note: For more information on using the Refine Toolpaths dialog box, see “Arc
Filter/Tolerance page” on page 615
You can select different geometry to enhance tool control. Geometry types are
indicated by special icons on the Toolpath Manager, and include:
7
Note: Imported STL entities cannot be used to create flowline toolpaths.
down gradually in the Z axis instead of stepping over in the X and Y axes. Choose this
toolpath type from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish submenu.
7
540 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Rough, Plunge. You can select
one of the following methods to define rough plunge toolpaths:
The zigzag method defines a rectangular grid and the tool plunges at
intervals along it.
The NCI method lets the tool plunge at intervals by following a previously
created toolpath.
is usually used after a finish parallel toolpath. To create this toolpath type, choose
Toolpath, Surface Finish, Parallel Steep.
7
542 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: In the part above, the blend curves are the arcs on either side of the solid.
As the tool moves into the narrow arms of the mold, the toolpath will contain many
sharp changes of direction. The new corner rounding parameters will replace sharp
corners with arcs, resulting in much smoother transitions and tool motion.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 545
These two pictures show the effect of the corner smoothing function.
In the top picture, you can see that as the tool moves into the narrow
spines, many sharp corners are created. The bottom picture shows
the same region with corner smoothing turned on. In this case, the
Max rounding value was 20% of the stepover.
7
Corner smoothing is found on the Finish Scallop Parameters tab.
546 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Use the Angle to specify how sharp a change of direction needs to be for
Mastercam to consider smoothing it. Mastercam will measure the included
angle between the approach to and departure from a calculated tool
position. A larger value will increase the number of locations considered for
smoothing but will increase the toolpath processing time.
Use the Max rounding to control how much smoothing to apply. This is a
linear distance that represents the maximum deviation between the original
calculated position and the smoothed toolpath. The actual size of the arc
that Mastercam inserts into the corner is a function of the Max rounding
distance and the included angle. A typical value is 25% of the stepover
distance.
The following picture shows how to use Max rounding to control the smoothing:
Smoothed
toolpath
Original
toolpath
Max rounding
Not every eligible corner will be smoothed by the Max rounding distance. If the arc
created by Max rounding would gouge the part, Mastercam will attempt to insert a
smaller arc. If, after several such attempts, Mastercam does not find a suitable curve,
it will leave the sharp corner unchanged. Also, if there are several sharp corners close
together, Mastercam will reduce the size of the inserted arcs so that the smoothed
segments do not interfere with each other.
Because this is a 3D toolpath, the smoothing curve can be either an arc or 3D spline. If
the curve does not lie in the XY, YZ, or XZ plane, Mastercam will linearize it to ensure
that the part is not gouged.
If you select check surfaces, and then select a toolpath strategy that does not support
them, Mastercam automatically treats the check surfaces as additional drive surfaces.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 549
You can find this setting in the Toolpaths page of the System Configuration dialog
box.
Core roughing toolpaths are ideal for boss-type parts. On each Z level,
the tool approaches the part from the outside with multiple offset
Core roughing passes can extend horizontally beyond your surface boundaries by a
small distance; this ensures that all the material lying within the boundaries will be
cleared.
Another important feature of core roughing is that Mastercam can change the
machining strategy within the same operation if your part has, for example, a mixture
of bosses and cavities. In these cases, Mastercam will cut the cavities inside to out
(like an area clearance cutting pass), and machine the bosses from the outside like in
the preceding picture. Use the Minimize burial option on the Trochoidal motion page
to have Mastercam automatically insert trochoidal loops in your toolpath in areas
where the tool might be fully buried for example, in the valley between two bosses.
The top set of profiles is not typically included in the toolpath, since Mastercam
assumes that these lie on the very top of the block. To machine these profiles, set the
Minimum depth on the Steep/Shallow page to a Z height above the top of your part
(see page 603).
Area clearance toolpaths
Area clearance toolpaths are designed to rough out cavities, pockets, or other areas
that can be most efficiently machined with an inside to outside toolpath. They are
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 551
generated from a set of surface profiles that describe the shape of your surfaces at
different Z heights, plus a set of offset profiles that rough out stock as the tool moves
away from the center.
Area clearance toolpaths maximize the amount of time that the tool is in contact with
your part, and can result in significantly fewer retract moves than a standard pocket
toolpath. Typically, the only retract moves will be when the tool is moving from one
pocket or cutting region to another.
Figure 7-13: Area clearance toolpaths
Area clearance toolpaths are an excellent choice for any parts that need to be
machined from the inside out, like pockets, cavities, and molds. Mastercam creates
offset surface profiles at each Z level and machines them starting with the innermost
one. You can create a helical entry or create a ramp entry parallel to the cut profile.
Area clearance toolpaths share most of the same parameters as core roughing
toolpaths. The major difference is that area clearance toolpaths cut inside to outside,
7
while core roughing cuts outside to inside.
552 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
For each area of remaining stock, Mastercam calculates area clearance cuts, using the
same machining strategies as the area clearance roughing toolpath.
Mastercam gives you several options for calculating the stock model:
If the roughing operations are in the same Mastercam file as the rest
roughing operation, you can choose to use all the previous operations, or
you can select one specific operation. The previous operations do not need
to be high speed surface toolpaths; they can be any Mastercam toolpath.
If there is no previous roughing operation, you can choose to calculate the
stock left by a roughing tool whose dimensions you enter here.
You can also select a stock model saved to an STL or other CAD file. This is
especially useful for castings.
The following pictures show an example of a rest roughing operation. The part was
roughed out with a core roughing operation. The rest roughing operation cleans out
enough stock in the saddle and the corners so that a finish tool will not encounter an
excessive amount of stock.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 553
Although the entire part was selected for the drive surfaces, Mastercam
limits the cutting passes to only those areas that couldn’t be cut by the
roughing tool. In each area of leftover stock, Mastercam calculates multiple
Z-cuts at a cut depth you specify.
This picture shows the same toolpath using a larger tool—in this case, a
0.375-inch bullnose endmill instead of the 0.250-inch ball cutter used in the
previous picture. Although it still cleans out the saddle and the boundary
around the boss, it stays out of the smaller corners.
554 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Use high speed pencil toolpaths to clean out corners and boundaries
between surfaces. You can define the size of the cutting zone by creating
multiple offset profiles from the surface boundary.
Select a Cutting method to organize and orient the cuts. You can choose to
create one-way cuts in either direction; zigzag cuts in both directions; or up/
down mill.
Control the number of cuts by selecting the Limit # of offsets option and
entering the maximum number of cutting passes that you want created.
When specifying multiple cuts, use the Reference tool diameter as a guide
to what the total machining area will be.
Note that the total number of passes will be twice the number of offsets, plus
one. For example, if you enter 2 for the number of offsets, Mastercam will
actually create five cuts: two cuts on each side of the boundary, plus one cut
along the boundary.
Use the Overthickness and Bitangency angle parameters to control which
areas get machined.
Overthickness lets you calculate the areas to be machined based on a
larger tool size. The amount you enter here is added to the tool radius
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 555
to determine the size of the surface fillets that will be machined. See
“Overthickness” on page 583 to learn more about how overthickness is
applied.
The Bitangency angle lets you control which intersections are to be
machined based on the sharpness of the angle between them. For best
results, use 165 degrees for the bitangency angle.
Bitangency angle - Toolpaths will only
be created for angle within this range
Surfaces to be machined
Reference tool diameter for pencil toolpaths—When creating a high speed pencil
toolpath, it is important to know the size of the machining area, so that you can make
sure that you are in fact machining all of the areas that were missed by the roughing
tool. Mastercam calculates a special parameter called the Reference tool diameter
that can help guide you.
This setting is available on the Cut parameters page for pencil toolpaths when you
specify multiple offsets. When you create several cuts, the area that is machined is a
function of several parameters:
the finish tool size
the number of cutting passes
the stepover between passes
Based on the values that you enter for these parameters, Mastercam calculates the
Reference tool diameter. This is the size of the theoretical roughing tool that would
have machined the cutting zone defined for the pencil toolpath.
In other words, if the Reference tool diameter is smaller than the actual tool you used
for your roughing operation, you can be confident that the pencil toolpath will reach
7
all of the areas that could not be roughed. If necessary, consider increasing the
number of passes until it is larger. You could also increase the stepover, or select a
larger finishing tool.
556 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Figure 7-16: Calculating the reference tool size for pencil toolpaths
stepover
# of offsets
The picture at left shows how the reference tool size is calculated. (In the dialog box,
enter twice the radius to get the Reference tool diameter.)
The picture on the right shows how the theoretical roughing tool defines the
machining zone for the finish toolpath. The calculated Reference tool diameter
should be smaller than your actual roughing tool to ensure that the pencil toolpath
finishes all the area left by the roughing tool.
If you manually override the calculated Reference tool diameter with a different
value, Mastercam will adjust the number of offsets to the proper number. In other
words, if you know how wide your machining zone needs to be, you can enter that
value in the Reference tool diameter field and Mastercam will automatically
calculate the proper number of cutting passes. Once you manually override the
calculated value, though, Mastercam will not automatically change it again.
This distance is measured from each side of the surface boundaries. In other words, if
the Reference tool diameter is 20mm, the machining zone will be 40mm wide with
the surface boundary in the middle.
High speed scallop toolpaths
High speed scallop toolpaths differ from other finish toolpaths in that the stepover
distance is a 3D value which is measured along the surface, instead of parallel to the
toolplane. This ensures a consistent scallop height across the surface, regardless of
the surface direction. This is an ideal strategy to use on the boundaries generated by
rest machining, or in any circumstances where you want to ensure a constant 3D
distance between passes.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 557
Select a Cutting method to organize and orient the cuts. You can choose to
create one-way cuts in either direction; zigzag cuts in both directions; or up/
down mill.
You can express the spacing between cutting passes in terms of either the
7
Stepover amount or the desired Scallop height. The two fields are linked so
that when you change one value, the other automatically updates.
Horizontal area toolpaths
Use a horizontal area toolpath to machine the flat areas of your surface model.
Mastercam will create cutting passes at the Z height of each area. For example, in the
toolpath shown below, there are two flat areas: one at the top of the boss, and another
at the base. Mastercam creates a set of cutting passes at each level. The passes within
each set are at the same Z height, but the tool does not cut as it moves from one area
to the other. Mastercam cuts from inside to out within each cutting area.
558 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Mastercam analyzes the selected drive surfaces and automatically identifies the flat
areas within each surface. This means that you do not need to create special
containment boundaries or other guides to limit the tool to the flat areas. Even if the
drive surface as a whole is not flat, Mastercam will identify and machine only the flat
areas. Mastercam will automatically calculate the toolpath in such a way that the tool
does not exit on a sidewall.
Horizontal area toolpaths act on only completely flat areas (within the cut tolerance).
If a surface has even a small gradient, it will not be detected. You can adjust the
cutting tolerance on the Arc Filter/Tolerance page to control how much deviation
from perfect flatness will be accommodated, or to handle small irregularities in the
surface model.
This toolpath is often used for semi-finish operations, and includes several
parameters to support these applications.
You can specify a number of depth cuts and a stepdown value, if your part
has a large amount of stock remaining.
You can specify an amount of stock to leave on the floor of the part and on
adjacent walls.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 559
You can also use the Minimize burial option to have Mastercam automatically insert
trochoidal loops in your toolpath in areas where the tool might be fully buried: for
example, in the valley between two bosses.
Because the surface profiles created by this toolpath are equivalent to the last set of
profiles created by an area clearance toolpath, this is often a good finish option for an
area clearance toolpath.
Raster toolpaths
Raster toolpaths are comprised of a set of parallel passes with a stepover along a line
at a set angle. This machining strategy is most effective on shallow (nearing
horizontal) surfaces, or steeper surfaces that are perpendicular to the angle of the
passes.
Figure 7-19: Raster toolpaths
7
Raster toolpaths create parallel cutting passes across the surface. You can
adjust the angle at which the passes are oriented to accommodate
different part features.
In the above example, the passes are parallel to the X axis. In the detail on the right,
you can see that the passes are evenly spaced. In the detail on the left, where the
surface is at an angle to the cutting pass, you can see the consistency of the spacing
starts to degrade. In these areas, you can adjust the Machining angle for better results.
560 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Select a Cutting method on the Cut parameters page to organize and orient
the cuts. You can choose to create one-way cuts in either direction; zigzag
cuts in both directions; or up/down mill.
Then, enter values for the Stepover and Machining angle. Unlike scallop
toolpaths, the Stepover is a 2D value measured parallel to the tool plane.
Enter a Machining angle that fits your part geometry.
Figure 7-20: Machining angle for raster toolpaths
The picture on the left shows a toolpath created with a machining angle of 0 degrees.
The picture on the right shows the same toolpath recreated with a machining angle of
25 degrees. You can see that the cutting passes are better aligned with the geometry
Waterline toolpaths
Waterline toolpaths are created from a set of profile curves along the cut surfaces. The
profiles are separated by a constant Z amount. They are similar to finish contour
toolpaths, but use Mastercam’s high speed toolpath techniques for a smoother, more
efficient tool motion. They are typically used for finishing and semi-finishing
operations.
Waterline toolpaths are best suited for surfaces whose angles are between 30 and 90
degrees. This is because the distance between passes is measured along the tool axis.
Where the surfaces are shallower, material typically won't be removed as efficiently.
However, you can configure the toolpath to generate extra cuts in shallow or flat areas.
You can see from the following picture that the passes are nicely spaced on vertical
surfaces, but there are two problem areas where the surface gets shallower. One is at
the neck of the bottle. Here, the toolpath overlaps on two sides to create a
herringbone effect. The other is where the surface nears a horizontal aspect at the
bottom and the passes are too far apart. Both problems could be avoided, or at least
minimized, by limiting the waterline passes to contact angles between 30 and 90
degrees and using another, more suitable, strategy to machine the shallower areas.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 561
The Steep/Shallow page in the Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box lets you
control this.
Figure 7-21: Waterline toolpaths
Waterline passes produce best results on steep areas, like the wall of this
mold, but are less-well suited for flat areas. Use the Steep/Shallow page
to control the cutting area by surface angle.
Use the Cutting method options on the Cut parameters page to orient the cutting
passes. You can select either Climb milling, Conventional milling, or Zigzag. With
Zigzag, each pass is machined in the opposite direction to the previous pass. A short
linking motion connects the two ends.
Radial toolpaths 7
Use radial toolpaths to create cutting passes that radiate outwards from a central
point. This machining strategy is most effective on areas with shallow curved surfaces
and circular areas. Since the stepover between each pass is a 2D value calculated in
the XY plane only, the cuts might not be appropriate for steep areas. This is especially
true when the steep contour is perpendicular to the cutting direction. In such areas a
waterline or spiral toolpath might produce better results.
562 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To define the machining zone, you need to enter the radius of the circle to be
machined, and the coordinates of its center point. Mastercam will project this circle
onto your selected drive surfaces and calculate the toolpath within this area.
TIP: Right-click in a field to select the radius or center point coordinate based
on geometry in your part file.
Using start and end angles—You can also limit the machining zone by specifying a
starting and ending angle. The start and end angle are positive values measured from
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 563
the X-positive axis. The following pictures show some examples of toolpaths created
by different angle spans.
Start angle = 0
End angle = 90
Start angle = 80
End angle = 200
Start angle = 0
End angle = 360
Calculating stepover—You can specify the stepover between cutting passes in either
of two ways:
entering a 2D stepover distance
specifying a maximum scallop height
7
564 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The two fields are linked so that when you change one value, the other automatically
updates. The stepover is calculated at the outer radius of the machining zone as
entered in the Cut parameters dialog box.
IMPORTANT: The stepover and scallop height are based on what the cutting
pass would be at the radius entered in the Cut parameters page in the Radii—
Outer field:
This is true even if the toolpath never actually extends to this radius—for
example, if the outer radius extends past the boundaries of your drive
surfaces.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 565
In these cases, you can restrict the tool motion by specifying an inner radius.
Mastercam will not calculate cutting passes for the area of the circle inside this radius.
Spiral toolpaths
7
Use a spiral toolpath to create cutting passes where the tool feeds into the part in a
continuous spiral instead of several discrete passes at a constant Z height. The
spacing between each pass is a 2D distance measured in the XY plane, so this toolpath
type works best on shallow parts whose features can be effectively machined with a
circular motion. The following picture shows an example of a spiral toolpath.
566 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To define the machining zone, you need to enter the outer radius of the spiral, and the
coordinates of its center point. Mastercam will project this circle onto your selected
drive surfaces and calculate the toolpath within this area. This is different from, say, a
waterline toolpath, in which each cutting pass represents the actual profile of the
drive surface at a particular Z depth. If the center point and radius of the spiral do not
match your drive surfaces, Mastercam will simply cut that portion of each spiral pass
that lies on the drive surface, as shown in the following picture.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 567
7
Orienting the spiral—Use the Cutting method together with the Spiral clockwise
option to orient the cutting passes. For most applications, the One way cutting
method will cut from the center point outwards, while the Other way cutting method
will cut from outside in.
Calculating stepover— You can specify the stepover between cutting passes in either
of two ways:
entering a 2D stepover distance
specifying a maximum scallop height
The two fields are linked so that when you change one value, the other automatically
updates.
568 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: This dialog box appears only if the following option is set in your .CONFIG
file (Settings, System Configuration, Toolpaths properties):
Also, check surfaces are supported for only waterline, raster, spiral, and radial
toolpaths.
Mastercam then displays the Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box as
shown in Figure 7-25 on page 570.
4 Select Roughing or Finishing. Then choose the desired toolpath type.
5 Use the Tool page to select the tool and to enter feeds and speeds.
6 Use the Holder page to select or create a tool holder. Mastercam can gouge-
check the toolpath with the tool holder, or display it while backplotting and
verifying.
7 Use the Cut parameters pages to define the cutting strategy and configure
the cutting passes. Cut parameters include all the settings for when the tool
actually comes in contact with the part.
8 Use the Linking parameters pages to configure the tool movements between
cutting passes. These pages generally affect tool moves through air.
7
9 Use the remaining pages to set other operation parameters. See “Setting
Other Parameters” on page 614 for a description of each of these parameters.
10 Click OK to create the toolpath and add it to the Toolpath Manager.
570 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Figure 7-25: Using the Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box
Toolpath
settings are
organized in
pages. Pages
with a green
check mark
have settings Edit or reselect toolpath geometry.
that have
been edited.
The Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box organizes all of your toolpath settings in
one place. When you select or change the toolpath type, Mastercam changes the list of
pages so that it displays only the relevant settings.
3 Use the Toolpath Type page to edit the set of drive surfaces or tool
containment boundary. For example, you might limit a finish pass to only
certain surfaces or areas of the part.
4 Select the desired type of toolpath or finish operation. Mastercam updates
the list of pages so that it shows only the settings relevant to the selected
toolpath type.
5 Use the Tool page to select the finishing tool. Mastercam updates the cutting
and linking parameters for the new tool.
6 Edit or update other operation parameters, as necessary.
7 Click OK to save the change.
8 Regenerate the operation.
TIP: The Machine group properties tell Mastercam where to get the default
7
values for many of the parameters.
To simplify the display, choose Filter to display only the tools from the library that
meet filtering criteria.
Use right-click menu options to customize the display. If the tools are displayed as a
list, click on column headers to sort the list. Reorder columns by dragging them.
572 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Double–click a tool to edit its tool definition, or use the right–click menu.
TIP: You can select a tool from the library just by entering its tool number if
you have the Search tool library option set in your Machine group properties.
Feeds and speeds—As soon as you select a tool, Mastercam inputs default feed rates
and spindle speed. You can get the defaults in either of two ways:
Read them directly from the tool definition.
Dynamically calculate them from the material, operation type, and tool
characteristics.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 573
Use the Machine group properties to tell Mastercam which type of default you prefer.
Choose the Feed/speed calculator from the right-click menu to calculate different
values by adjusting the tool and material characteristics. You can always override all
of the defaults by simply typing in the values you want. You can enter separate values
for plunging into the part or retracting from it, or you can choose to retract from the
part with a rapid move.
The feed rate and spindle speed that you enter here are typically in effect for the entire
operation. However, you can use the Change at Point function in the Chain Manager
right–click menu to change them for specific moves. (You will learn more about this in
“Editing Toolpath Chains” on page 395.)
More information on these features is available in the online help when you click the
Help button.
Configuring Automatic Tool Inspection
Use the Tool inspection/change options to force a retract move at set intervals so that
the machine operator can inspect the tool. You can specify the interval in either of two
ways:
the total distance that the tool has cut
the amount of time that the tool has been cutting
Mastercam looks only at the current operation when calculating when the tool should
be inspected.
When the tool reaches an inspection point, it will retract and rapid off the part to the
clearance plane according to the retract settings on the Linking parameters page.
Once the inspection has been completed, the Linking parameters page settings also
determine how the tool returns to the part.
Implementing tool inspection in the post—To support the tool inspection feature, a
new flag has been added to the rpd_typ$ variable, with the value of 70000. This
value will be used only to indicate a tool inspection stop. Mastercam will write this
value to the NCI file on the final move to the clearance plane.
7
574 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Click the Open library button and select a library of holders. Mastercam
replaces the entire list with the contents of the library.
Define new holders. Click New holder, or right–click in the window and
choose New special holder to create a holder of a pre-determined type.
When you select a holder, Mastercam displays a preview of its geometry. Each holder
consists of a stack of trapezoidal segments. Edit the selected holder by clicking on a
segment and changing its dimensions, or click New segment to add a new segment
to the bottom of the holder.
Using holders for gouge checking—Select Use holder for gouge checking to activate
the gouge checking feature. When Mastercam is calculating the toolpath while this
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 575
option is active, it will check to make sure that the holder as defined in the Holder
page does not come into contact with any part geometry.
Use the Holder clearance field to establish the minimum separation
between the holder and your surface model.
Select the Clearance on holder bottom option to also apply the clearance
value to the bottom of the holder.
When the gouge checking option is turned on, Mastercam displays the
approximate holder clearance zone in red.
If you are leaving unmachined stock on the walls of your part, the holder
clearance should be at least as large as your stock-to-leave value.
Mastercam displays a warning message if the toolpath was modified to
eliminate possible gouges from the holder. This alerts you that the toolpath
might not remove all the stock that you intend. If the toolpath does not need
to be modified, no message will be displayed.
Regardless of whether you use the holder for gouge checking, the holder is always
available for backplotting and verifying the toolpath.
Creating a tool holder
Follow these steps to create a new mill/router holder definition for a high speed
surface toolpath and, optionally, save it to a holder library.
7
Creating a tool holder
1 If it is not already displayed on your screen, open the Holder page in the
Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box.
2 If you want the new holder to be part of an existing library, click Open library
and select the desired library.
The Holders window lists all the holders from the selected library.
3 Click New holder. It is added to the list with a default name.
576 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: The asterisk at the end of the new holder name indicates that the holder
has not yet been saved to a library,
4 Right-click on the new holder in the list and choose Rename holder. Type in
the desired name for the holder.
5 Click New segment. Mastercam displays the topmost segment of the holder
profile, with default dimensions.
6 Edit the dimensions to the desired values.
7 Click New segment to add each additional segment. You can use up to 20
segments to define the holder.
8 If you want to save the new holder in the holder library, click Save Library. If
no library is currently open, you will be prompted to enter a name and
Mastercam will create the library.
If you do not save the holder to a library, it is saved only in the Mastercam
part file.
Stepdown (constant Z)
Min stepdown
7
Max profile stepover
Note: Use the Add cuts feature to add additional cuts in shallow areas of the
part.
578 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
• Use Max profile stepover to limit the horizontal spacing as the surface gets
flatter.
• Use the Min stepdown value to ensure that too many passes do not get created
with very small differences in Z depth.
Mastercam can maintain a constant stepdown between passes, or you can choose the
Add cuts option to configure adaptive stepdown strategies.
Core roughing, area clearance, and waterline toolpaths all use the Stepdown value on
the Cut parameters page to maintain a constant Z spacing between cutting passes.
However, in areas of your part where the profile is close to flat, maintaining a constant
Z spacing can result in an unacceptably broad distance between cutting passes. Use
the Add cuts feature to insert additional cutting passes in these areas.
Figure 7-27: Adding cuts with adaptive stepdown on page 577 shows how this works.
Each horizontal line is a cutting pass seen from the side, separated by the Stepdown.
The picture on the right shows the additional passes created by Add cuts. Use the Min
stepdown and Max profile stepover values to configure the added cuts. Mastercam
will add enough new cuts to maintain the maximum profile stepover, while spacing
them each by at least as much as the minimum stepdown.
The Add cuts option will also result in cuts being added to island faces and similar
flats, but the additional cuts are not guaranteed to be at the exact level of the island.
The amount of stock remaining on the island face could be as much as the minimum
step down amount.
Adjust… options approximate the effect of increasing or decreasing the size of the
tool used to rough the part.
7
580 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Choose Adjust remaining stock to ignore small cusps to simulate the effect of a
stock model created from a larger tool. Because the tool is larger, Mastercam thinks
that there is less stock remaining than there actually is, and so the rest roughing
operation is created only in areas where the tool encounters a relatively large amount
of stock. This decreases the area that is machined.
Choose Adjust remaining stock to mill small cusps to simulate the effect of a stock
model created from a smaller tool. This is a more specialized strategy than the
previous type of stock adjustment. In this case, because the tool is smaller, Mastercam
thinks that there is more stock remaining than there actually is, and Mastercam
creates cuts in areas that have already been machined. Even though this typically
results in increased air cutting, it can be a useful strategy for certain applications:
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 581
If you are rest roughing a small area, you can use this strategy to create more
room for an entry or exit move.
If the rest material boundary is very irregular, this strategy might result in a
smoother boundary.
Stock adjustment options are not available when you are using a CAD file as the stock
model.
Cutting methods for surface finish toolpaths
High speed scallop, pencil, and raster toolpaths let you select from several different
cutting methods. These determine the direction and orientation of the cutting passes.
One way—Select One way to machine all the passes in a single default direction.
Mastercam tries to maintain a climb milling orientation relative to the surface
boundaries.
The example below shows a scallop toolpath applied to a surface which has an outer
boundary plus an inner boundary around an island. Mastercam creates surface
profiles which represent the surface boundaries offset by the stepover amount. The
passes are linked so that they go in a one-way direction, to be climb-milled.
The inner, smaller circular arrow indicates the tool direction for passes near
the island boundary.
7
The outer, larger circular arrow indicates the tool direction for machining the
outer boundaries.
In this example, most machining occurs in a counterclockwise direction, as the tool
works outwards from the innermost profile to the outside boundary. It then machines
around the outer offset of the inner boundary, working inwards, in a clockwise
direction.
582 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The example below shows a typical pencil toolpath. Usually, the inner pass will be a
single (open) pass, and the outer passes will form loops.
Other way—This option organizes the cutting passes in the same basic manner as
One way, but simply reverses the direction, to maintain a conventional milling
orientation.
Zigzag—Each pass is machined in the opposite direction to the previous pass. A short
linking motion connects the two ends.
Down mill, Up mill—Select this option to break each pass into segments such that
each piece is machined in a downward or upward direction. This is especially useful
when you are using insert cutters that are restricted to a specific cutting direction. Flat
sections can be machined in either direction; the Cut parameters page lets you
specify a threshold angle to define which areas are considered flat. You can also
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 583
specify an overlap distance to ensure that no cusps or unwanted scallops are left in
the transition area where several passes begin in different directions.
Overlap
This picture shows how the overlap distance would be applied to down
milling cutting passes. After down milling Cutting pass 1, the tool
retracts to the start point for Cutting pass 2. When Mastercam
calculates the start point for the second pass, it overlaps the first pass by
the overlap distance.
Inside to out cutting for scallop toolpaths—Mastercam includes an option that lets
you cut scallop toolpaths from inside to out, instead of just outside to in. This option
is available for the One Way, Other Way, and Zigzag cutting methods.
7
With the One Way cutting method, cuts from the inside to out are counter-clockwise.
This will mimic climb cutting in most (but not all) cases. With Other Way, the cuts are
reversed to mimic conventional milling—again, in most, but not all cases.
Overthickness
Overthickness applies only to pencil toolpaths. Typically, Mastercam will create a
pencil pass only where the radius of the filleted material between two surfaces is less
than, or equal to, the radius of the tool. Use the Overthickness parameter to make the
tool seem bigger than it really is and “force” a cutting pass where Mastercam
otherwise would not create one.
584 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Overthickness is often used when the tool is the same radius (or nearly the same) as
the fillets between the surfaces. In these cases, you can get a certain amount of chatter
in the toolpath, because at any given point the tool might be seen as slightly larger or
smaller than the fillet, depending on the cut tolerance. Using an overthickness value
in these situations can eliminate this effect and result in a smooth toolpath along the
entire region. For this type of application, we suggest an overthickness value of 10
times the cut tolerance.
The pictures below show how overthickness is applied to your toolpath. Note that it
does not result in either gouging or extra material being left on the part.
Figure 7-29: Applying overthickness
An overthickness amount is
applied to the tool,
increasing its corner radius
to larger than the surface
fillet.
Profile/offset tolerance
Max radius
7
– Original toolpath – Smoothed toolpath
To use toolpath smoothing, select Smoothing in the Cut parameters page. Then, tell
Mastercam how much smoothing you want. The amount of smoothing is constrained
by the maximum radius that you enter, and the profile/offset tolerances, which
determine the variance between the smoothed toolpath and the original toolpath.
Use the Max radius to limit the size of the arcs Mastercam will create to
round the corners. A larger value will result in a smoother toolpath but with
greater deviation from the unsmoothed version.
Use the Profile tolerance to determine the maximum deviation between the
smoothed and unsmoothed toolpaths. The Profile tolerance is applied only
on the outermost profile or cutting pass. The lower the value entered here,
the less material will be missed by the smoothed toolpath.
Use the Offset tolerance in the same way as the Profile tolerance, but it is
applied to all the inner passes. Unlike the Profile tolerance, changing the size
of this value does not result in material being missed. (This value is not used
for waterline toolpaths, since only a single offset profile is created.)
Because Mastercam first calculates the unsmoothed cutting pass, you need to make
sure that the offset tolerance is less than the minimum XY Stepover on the Cut
parameters page. Otherwise, the smoothed profile of one cutting pass could overlap
the unsmoothed cutting pass at the next profile, and no further material would be cut.
Turning on toolpath smoothing often results in more cutting passes being created, so
the actual stepover between each pass will tend to be smaller.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 587
TIP: In addition to the smoothing function on this page, use the Arc Filter/
Tolerance page to eliminate or consolidate multiple, very small moves for even
greater optimization. When activated, Mastercam's 3D Advanced Toolpath
Refinement feature adds a Refine Toolpath button to the Arc Filter/Tolerance
page. Use this button to access advanced filtering and smoothing parameters
that refine toolpath motion within the specified total toolpath tolerance. For
more information, refer to the Mastercam Help.
Tool containment
Use tool containment boundaries to control the tool’s position around the boundary
of your part or the area being machined. Tool containment gives you an additional
measure of control by restricting the tool inside a set of curves.
The tool containment boundary is a closed set of wireframe curves. The curves do not
have to be part of the surfaces that are machined. For example, you can create custom
guide geometry to precisely limit the tool movements.
You can select tool containment boundaries in either of two ways:
When you are selecting the surfaces to be machined.
From the Toolpath type page.
Use the tool containment options on the Cut parameters page to tell Mastercam how
the tool behaves at the tool containment boundary.
7
You can choose to limit the tool to the outside of the boundary, or inside it. The
following pictures show how the different containment options restrict the toolpath.
Finally, for inside or outside containment, you can choose to adjust the tool position
by entering an additional offset distance.
Enter a negative value to ensure that the edge of the tool overlaps the
boundary by a small amount.
Enter a positive number to ensure that the tool is completely clear of the
boundary.
The default option is to Add offset distance to tool radius. If you deselect this option,
the distance from the center of the tool to the containment boundary will be the
Offset distance that is entered here, regardless of the tool size. Figure 7-31 shows the
difference.
Offset distance
Offset distance = Total offset distance
Total offset distance
You can offset the tool from the containment boundary in either of two ways.
You can enter an offset distance as an absolute number (left picture), or add it to
the tool radius (right picture).
XY stepover
Each Z level in a toolpath consists of a surface profile, which is the slice of curves
created by the intersection of the drive surfaces and the tool plane, plus a series of
concentric offset profiles that let the tool gradually approach the surfaces. Use the XY
stepover parameters to configure the spacing between the passes. 7
The spacing between each profile is determined by the minimum and maximum XY
stepover values. Mastercam will use the largest value possible (up to the maximum XY
590 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
stepover) that does not leave unwanted upstands of material between the passes.
However, it will not separate the passes by less than the minimum stepover.
Generally, if each profile is offset by no more than the tool radius, then the whole area
will be cleared. In certain cases where the profile is very smooth, it is possible to offset
the profiles by as much as the tool diameter and still clear the area. Obviously, spacing
the profiles by more than the tool diameter will leave many upstands between the
passes, looking somewhat like a maze. Between these two extremes—the radius and
the diameter—there is an ideal stepover where the area will be cleared leaving no
upstands. Mastercam uses an advanced algorithm to find this ideal value.
IMPORTANT: If you are using toolpath smoothing, make sure that the
minimum stepover is greater than the Offset Tolerance value and less than the
radius of the tool shaft. The maximum stepover should be less than twice the
minimum stepover.
TIP: The XY stepover is a 2D value measured parallel to the tool plane. If you
wish, you can use a scallop toolpath to maintain a constant stepover
measured along the surface.
For surfaces that are not exactly horizontal or vertical, Mastercam will interpolate
between the wall and floor values. When calculating the toolpath, Mastercam adds
the stock to leave amounts to the tool radius in each direction. The following diagram
shows how this is calculated for a part with 3mm stock left on the wall, and 1mm on
the floor.
Figure 7-32: Calculating stock to leave for non-flat, non-vertical
surfaces
Actual tool
Calculated Leftover
toolpath stock
Mastercam calculates stock to leave by creating a virtual tool. It does this by adding
the stock to leave amounts to the actual tool, and then calculating a toolpath. When
you cut the part with the actual tool, it will leave the stock shown above.
For toolpath types that support check surfaces, the stock left on the check surface will
be the larger of the Stock to leave amount for the walls or floors. 7
Minimizing tool burial
Mastercam’s high speed surface toolpaths have been specially designed for high
speed machining and hard milling applications. Because of this, it is important to
detect and avoid circumstances where the tool is fully buried or is engaging too much
material for the high speed strategies to be safely employed. Select Minimize burial
on the Trochoidal motion page to have Mastercam automatically insert trochoidal
loops in your toolpath in areas where the tool might be fully buried. This option is
available for the following toolpath types:
Core roughing
Area clearance
Horizontal area
592 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
With Minimize tool burial turned off, the tool moves straight
through the area with greater than expected tool burial
For example, in the part shown at right, you can see the loops that Mastercam inserts
as the tool approaches the area between the two bosses. As the tool is forced to engage
more material because of the part geometry, Mastercam calculates smaller loops.
Hold your mouse over the picture to see the same toolpath with Minimize tool burial
turned off. You can see that the tool will be fully buried as it passes between the
bosses.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 593
Note: Inserting the loops typically results in increased machining time. If you are
confident that a fully buried tool does not pose a problem for your application, you
can de-select the Minimize burial option. For most applications, however, this should
be turned on by default, since Mastercam only inserts the loops if it detects problem
areas in the toolpath.
Configuring trochoidal loops—Use the options on the Trochoidal motion page to
control how Mastercam minimizes tool burial.
Use the Initial loop radius to determine how large the loops are. Specify the
size of the radius as a percentage of the tool diameter.
Expected material
engagement
Stepover adjustment
594 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
If Mastercam does not have enough room to create loops at the initial size, it
will create successively smaller loops. The Retry loop radius specifies how
large each new loop will be as a percentage of the previous loop.
For example, if your Initial loop radius is 16mm, and the Retry loop radius is
50, Mastercam will create an 8mm loop if the 16mm loop is too large. If the
8mm loop is too large, it will then create a 4mm loop.
Use the Minimum loop radius to specify the smallest loop that Mastercam
will create. This is also set as a percentage of the tool diameter.
If the Minimum loop radius is still too large to fit, Mastercam will continue
the toolpath with no loops. For these segments, you can specify a Feedrate
adjustment to slow down the tool. Use the slower feedrate to compensate for
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 595
the greater tool burial in those portions of the toolpath. This is specified as a
percentage of the value on the Tool page.
Feedrate adjustment
Ramp entry—For entry ramps, Mastercam creates an entry move that parallels the
profile that is being machined, instead of a simple straight line. Enter a Minimum
profile distance that tells Mastercam how large the profile needs to be for the entry
ramp to fit. Mastercam will not create an entry ramp if the length of the profile to be
cut is less than the Minimum profile value. Mastercam will always create a ramp move
so that the ramp length is at least as long as the radius of the tool.
The ramp starts at the Z clearance distance above the level of the previous cut, so that
the tool transitions smoothly from the rapid approach into the stock. The Plunge
angle that you enter is a maximum value; Mastercam will calculate an appropriate
angle that will be no larger than the value you enter.
Figure 7-34: Entry ramp for roughing toolpath
Plunge angle
Minimum profile
Depth of next
programmed cut
Entry helix—You can also choose to create a helical entry to each cutting level. Enter
the desired Radius of the helix; if the profile is too small to create a helix of this size,
Mastercam will create a ramp move instead. Like an entry ramp, the helix starts at the
Z clearance distance above the level of the previous cut.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 597
Radius
If your control does not support helical arcs, deselect the Output arc moves option.
Mastercam will instead approximate the helix with many small linear moves.
Entry and transition moves for finishing toolpaths
Use the Transitions page to configure the entry move that the tool will make as it
transitions to new Z levels. The difference between these moves and the approach/
retract moves on the Linking parameters page is that the linking moves connect
multiple cuts on the same Z level, while these moves control the transition to a new
set of cuts on a different Z level. This section applies to all finish toolpath types except
raster and horizontal area toolpaths.
Select Tangential ramp to create a true high speed transition between the
cutting passes. Mastercam inserts arcs at the beginning and end of the ramp
for the smoothest tool motion into and out of the move. 7
Select Ramp to move between passes with a straight line at an angle that you
specify.
Use these controls to solve the problem where Mastercam thinks that a pocket is large
enough to accommodate the tool, but the entry move is so compressed that the tool is
effectively plunging into the part.
7
Use the Skip pockets smaller than field to specify the smallest pocket that
you want Mastercam to consider cutting. Pockets smaller than this value will
be skipped over. A typical value is 110% of the tool diameter.
Use the Preferred profile length to also define the smallest allowable pocket,
but as a function of the length of the entry ramp. The Preferred profile
length replaces the Minimum profile parameter from earlier versions of
Mastercam. Mastercam will try to maintain this preference, but this is not
guaranteed. In this case, the Skip pockets smaller than field serves as a
backup by letting you specify an absolute minimum size that Mastercam will
not violate.
600 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Smooth transition
Straight transition
The difference between these moves and the moves on the Linking parameters page
is that the linking moves control how the tool retracts from the part between cutting
passes. For example, when you have selected a one-way cutting method, and the tool
rapids across the part to begin each pass, Mastercam uses the moves in the Linking
parameters page. The moves shown in the pictures above would be useful for zigzag
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 601
cutting methods or down/up milling when the end of one pass is very close to the
beginning of the next one.
Note: The Angle options are not available for roughing or horizontal area
toolpaths.
In the following toolpath, the machining zone was limited to surface angles between
30 and 90 degrees:
Enter the desired range of angles on the Steep/Shallow page. Enter values between 0
and 90 only; Mastercam will automatically account for the direction of the surface.
For example, 30 degree and 150 degree angles are considered the same. The picture
below shows how the minimum and maximum angles are applied.
Figure 7-36: Using surface angle to limit cutting passes
Machining zone
Min angle
Max angle
Note: Surface angle limits are not available for roughing toolpaths or horizontal
area toolpaths.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 603
Cutting passes
Minimum
Z depth 7
Maximum
Z depth
You can use a maximum Z depth to prevent the tool from falling indefinitely if it
moves off the edges of the surface. In the example below, with a maximum Z depth
604 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
applied, when the tool moves off the surface, it continues at the maximum Z depth
and falls no further.
You can set your minimum Z depth higher than the highest point on your drive
surface to effectively add extra machining height. You can also set it below the top of
your surfaces; for example, when you want to cut a deep cavity using several separate
cutter paths.
To eliminate the passes along the outer boundary, select Contact areas only.
Mastercam limits the toolpath to the boss, where the tool is in contact with the
surface, and eliminates the air cutting passes.
Note: Mastercam will create linking moves only when the spacing between
cutting passes is greater than the Keep tool down within distance on the Cut
parameters page.
Retract methods
The Linking parameters page lets you select either of three retract methods.
These determine how the tool moves from the end of one cutting pass to the
beginning of the next one.
Minimum distance—Mastercam calculates a direct route from one pass to the next,
incorporating curves on/off the part and to/from the retract height to speed progress.
You can specify a minimum height that the tool must maintain above the part,
otherwise the height is determined by the size of the entry and exit arcs. The pictures
below show a toolpath that uses Minimum distance retract. The red moves show the
retract and linking moves. You can see how in a part with an irregular profile like the
one in the picture, this retract method provides for significantly more efficient tool
motion between each cut. To learn more about how to configure each retract
component for this method, see “Retracts and leads” on page 609.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 607
7
608 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Mastercam applies the Lead parameters from the Linking parameters page to the
cutting pass to calculate the base location for each approach and retract move. These
include entry/exit arcs and linear entry/exit extensions.
Figure 7-40: Parameters for minimal vertical retract
rapid move to start of next pass
Full vertical retract—The tool moves vertically to the clearance plane. It then moves
along this plane in a straight line, and drops down vertically to the start of the next
pass. The height of the move is set by the Clearance plane value.
Figure 7-41: Full vertical retract method
Mastercam applies the Lead parameters from the Linking parameters page to the
cutting pass to calculate the base location for each approach and retract move. These
include entry/exit arcs and linear entry/exit extensions.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 609
The Linking parameters page also includes an option to convert the rapid move
between passes to a feed rate move. You might wish to do this when the tool needs to
make many irregular moves per pass to jump between different areas of the part. This
option is also useful for older machines which create dogleg moves for rapids. Select
Output feed move and enter the desired feed rate.
Retracts and leads
Mastercam divides the moves that link cutting
passes into a number of discrete components so
that you can have the maximum degree of control
over them. These are available on the Linking
parameters page.
Figure 7-43 shows the relationship between the
different parameters when you select the
Minimum distance retract method. Mastercam
divides the move into two zones: to/from the
7
retract plane, and to/from the part. Each move is a
separate arc.
Curl down is the radius of the arc as the
tool moves away from the retract height.
Vertical arc entry is the radius of the arc
as the tool moves toward the part.
Vertical arc exit is the radius of the arc as
the tool comes off the part.
The Linear entry/exit distance extends
the entry and exit vectors.
610 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Curl up is the radius of the arc as the tool moves to the retract height.
Use the Fitting parameters on the Linking parameters page to modify how the entry
and exit arcs are actually applied to the cutting pass. (See “Fitting and trimming high
speed toolpaths” on page 611.)
Figure 7-43: Parameters for minimum distance retracts
Typically, the height of the retract move is determined by the size of the arcs that you
enter. Use the Part clearance to define the minimum height that the tool needs to
maintain over the part. Mastercam will automatically extend the linear entry/exit
moves if necessary to maintain the skim distance.
Note: Waterline and horizontal area finish toolpaths also include options to
create horizontal entry/exit arcs, to ensure that the tool remains clear of
sidewalls or other part geometry.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 611
Machine entire pass—The path of the tool will match the surface, including vertical
surfaces and the corners. An arc will be inserted only at the end of the pass, and then
only if it can be done safely without hitting the part.
Fully trim pass—In cases where it is important to prevent over-machining, select the
Fully trim strategy. The pass is trimmed back so the entire arc fits into it, but no nearer
than a full machine pass link would be.
7
Trimming distance
612 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Minimize trimming—The path of the retract will be as close to the surface as possible,
maintaining a minimum distance from the surface to fit the arc.
Minimum spacing
Using the maximum trimming distance—Use the Max trimming distance parameter
to limit the amount of trimming applied to non-horizontal passes. When a lead arc is
added to a horizontal machining pass, the length of pass trimmed off will be at most
the radius of the arc. However, when adding an arc to a steep finishing pass, the total
length of pass trimmed—that is, the trimming distance—can be much greater, as
shown in the picture below. To avoid this, the Max trimming distance limits the
trimming distance; if the amount trimmed would exceed this value, then no arc is
used. Instead, the whole pass is machined, and a straight vertical motion is added.
Figure 7-44: Applying maximum trimming distance
Trimmed
toolpath
Original
toolpath
Amount trimmed
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 613
Home position
Reference pt – Retract
Reference pt – Approach
Type the coordinate positions directly in the dialog box fields. Use the X-Y-Z
check boxes to activate each axis. For example, if X and Y are cleared and only
Z is selected, the tool will rapid straight up to the specified Z height at the
end of the toolpath with no change in X or Y.
Choose From machine to read the home position from the machine
definition. Reference points are stored as part of the axis combination
properties. Each axis combination can have a different set of reference
points associated with it that you can load here.
Use this button to open the Refine Toolpaths dialog box where you can refine the
toolpath to reduce machining time and improve the machined surface quality.
7
616 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Mastercam uses the values you enter here to convert the toolpath originally created
using G1, G2, G3 motions to a refined set of “smoothed” G1 motions wherever
possible, and within the tolerances you specify. Smoothing redistributes a toolpath’s
node points, avoiding the clustering and grouping of points that can cause marks and
other imperfections. It does this through shifting, removing, and/or adding node
points along an already generated toolpath.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 617
7
618 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You can apply the same maximum line and arc tolerance value to lines and arcs, or
choose to tighten the tolerance more for lines or arcs as required by your application.
Line/arc filtering significantly reduces the number of NC-blocks in the post, and may
improve the machined precision of the part as well as its surface quality.
Smoothing Precautions
Increased NC program length, especially when Use Fixed Segment
Length is activated.
Filter settings—Toolpath filtering lets you replace multiple very small linear moves—
within the filter tolerance—with single arc moves to simplify the toolpath.
Select the planes in which your control is capable of creating arcs.
Enter minimum and maximum arc radius values to control the size of the
arcs Mastercam creates in the filtered toolpath.
Toolpath fillets—Select the Toolpath fillet option to have Mastercam insert an arc of
the specified radius in the toolpath at sharp corners. The radius value that you enter
here should be at least as large as the radius of the finish tool.
Note: The fillets are created as tool motions only. They are not saved as part of
your surface model, and they have no effect on your part geometry.
Filleting toolpaths
Use toolpath fillets to create a toolpath that automatically leaves fillets at the corners
between the surfaces. The fillets are created entirely by the programmed tool motion,
and have no effect at all on your surface model or part geometry. For many parts, this
can be much easier and faster than actually creating the surface fillets in your part
geometry. This feature is available for all surface high speed toolpaths.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 621
These two pictures show how you can use toolpath fillets to help create the smooth,
free-flowing tool motions needed for high speed machining. The picture on the left
shows the original toolpath with no toolpath fillets. You can see the sharp corners as the
tool transitions between part features. The picture on the right shows the same part with
toolpath fillets applied. When creating the fillets, make sure that the fillet radius is larger
than the tool radius.
Note that the fillets are created not only along the direction of the tool motion, but
across it as well. For example, consider a toolpath that machined the inside corner
shown here with a series of waterline passes down the walls:
7
622 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
With filleting turned off, the cutting passes would look like this:
Top view
Side view
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 623
With toolpath filleting turned on, Mastercam would create fillets in both the vertical
corner and along the bottom edges. The cutting passes would then look like this:
Top view
Side view
Toolpath filleting can seem similar to toolpath smoothing, but there is an important
difference. Toolpath filleting looks at your part model to calculate the fillets, while
toolpath smoothing looks directly at the calculated tool motion. For example, if you
cut a 6mm fillet with a 12mm ball mill, the toolpath will still have a sharp corner.
Toolpath smoothing, on the other hand, would identify and apply an arc to that
corner.
To create the fillets, select the Toolpath fillet option on the Arc Filter/Tolerance page
7
and enter the desired radius of the fillets. The radius that you enter here should be
larger than the radius of the tool.
Canned Text page
Use this page to insert canned text commands in your NC program. Canned text
commands selected here will be inserted at the tool change block for the operation.
You can choose to insert the commands either immediately before or after the tool
change block, or as part of it.
624 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: The canned text commands that are available to you depend on the
current control definition.
Note: Depending on how the coolant settings for your control and post are
defined, you might also see coolant options included in the list of available
canned text options. If this is the case, selecting a canned text coolant option
here has the same effect as choosing it in the Coolant page.
TIP: Use the Change at point dialog box to insert canned text at specific
points in the toolpath, other than the tool change block.
Coolant page
Use this page to turn coolant on or off. The coolant options that are available to you
are defined in the active machine definition. For each type of coolant, you can set a
maximum of two states:
Turn the coolant on, off, or maintain the current state (as set by a previous
operation or point).
Apply the change at the current location/block, before it, or after it.
Your machine definition might not allow all possible states. For example, you might
be limited to a simple On/Off toggle. You can also turn on several different coolant
options at the same time, if your machine definition allows it.
Generally, you will be able to turn different coolant options off individually. However,
for some machines, the first coolant off code will turn off all coolant. The coolant
section of the machine definition contains this setting.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 625
Note: Each tool definition can include a default coolant selection; this will be
automatically used for an operation if the Use tool’s step, peck, coolant
option is turned on in the Tool Settings tab of the Machine Group Properties
dialog box.
If you wish, you can also enter a work offset code that will be output with the
operation when you post it.
TIP: You can display the work offset number with the operation in the
Toolpath Manager.
Click the Help button in this page to learn more about planes, WCS, or using work
offsets.
Axis combination page
Use this page to view the axis combinations for the current operation.
Before you can create rotary axis motion, you need to properly configure the rotary
axis components in your machine definition. You will only be able to select rotary axis
options which are supported by your machine definition.
Note: Mastercam can simulate the rotary axis performance while backplotting
the toolpath. To enable this feature, go to the Backplot Options dialog box and
select Simulate Axis Substitution or Simulate Rotary Axis.
Multiaxis Toolpaths
In this section, you will learn about:
Standard Multiaxis Toolpaths (page 628)
Advanced Multiaxis Toolpaths (page 639)
Multiaxis toolpaths require the machine definition to have one rotary axis for 4-axis
output, and two rotary axes for 5-axis output. To enable the multiaxis toolpath menu
selections and toolbar, select a multiaxis machine as the current machine definition.
In this section, you will learn to create multiaxis toolpaths using functions in the
Toolpaths, Multiaxis menu.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 629
These toolpath functions provide you with enhanced flexibility in the generation of
tool axis vectors, the flow of tool movement over surfaces and solids, and the
projection of curves, points, or surfaces onto surfaces or solids.
Note: Generating multiaxis toolpaths for a machine tool usually requires post
processor customization. For more information on customizing the post
processor for a multiaxis machine tool and control, contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
Follow these general guidelines when selecting geometry for a 5-axis toolpath
(not all options may apply, based on the selected toolpath type):
1 The Output Format determines which options are available for geometry
selection.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 631
3-axis: Limits the tool positions to a single vector (direction) and does not
provide additional tool axis control.
4-axis: Provides one plane of axis rotation that is perpendicular to the 4th
(rotary) axis. Choose the 4 Axis button in the Geometry selection dialog
box to select the axis about which the 4th axis rotates, or make the 4th
axis selection on the Multiaxis parameters tab.
5-axis: Provides tool axis rotation in any plane.
2 Select the Curve Type or Entity Type, and then select the geometry for the
tool to follow.
3 Select the method for Tool Axis Control. Mastercam aligns the tool axis to
the selected geometry or a plane.
4 Choose a Tip Control method to set tool tip compensation.
5 Select the Surfaces to be cut, either the cut pattern or the part surfaces
(Comp to surfaces).
6 Select Check Surfaces (the areas in the part to be aware of but stay away
from).
Note: To edit the geometry selection after creating the toolpath, double–click the
toolpath’s Geometry icon in the Toolpath Manager.
To begin creating this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, Curve 5 axis.
632 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To begin creating this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, Drill 5 axis.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 633
Swarf 5-axis toolpath parameters include an optional fanning option to allow the tool
to be as vertical as possible. The fan distance determines the minimum distance that
the tool travels between the corner position and a position where the tool is
perpendicular to the cut direction. A larger fan distance creates a wider fan.
To begin creating this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, Swarf 5 axis.
634 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
In the example below, a box cut pattern was used to generate the flow of motion and
tool axis vectors. Then the tool tip was compensated to the part surfaces.
7
636 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To begin creating this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, Flowline 5 axis.
TIP: Use the edge blend options in the Edges tab to reduce or eliminate
blending problems, particularly where toolpaths meet along surface edge
boundaries
TIP: Use the edge blend options in the Edges tab to reduce or eliminate
blending problems, particularly where toolpaths meet along surface edge
boundaries
Based on the geometry and parameters you choose in the Port 5-axis dialog box and
the toolpath parameters you specify, Mastercam applies the following “order of
operations” to create the 5-axis port toolpath:
Calculates tool positions on the pattern surface
Compensates to the port surfaces
Applies point generators
Modifies the tool vectors
Applies axis limits
Applies check surfaces
Checks for gouges
7
638 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
to a line. Selecting Points/Lines for the entity type will automatically set the tool axis
parallel to the line as shown below.
These are organized in several tabbed pages as shown in the following picture.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 641
Or, you can choose from a number of simplified interfaces that have been customized
for specific applications and machining strategies.
7
642 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
When you choose a pre-defined interface, Mastercam shows you only a small subset
of the options, organized in a custom, easy-to-use tab.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 643
All hidden options are preset to values appropriate for the selected application.
7
644 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: The customized interface displays only a subset of the advanced multiaxis
options, with most of the others preset and hidden to simplify the setup.
The remaining steps in this procedure assume that you have selected the full
user interface option.
3 In the Toolpath parameters tab, select a tool and set feeds and speeds.
4 Use the Surface paths tab to select drive surfaces, set the general flow of tool
motion (Pattern), corner handling, whether you need the surfaces trimmed
or extended, where to start cutting, and set tolerances for surface finish.
Some pattern types require additional geometry. The geometry selections
display when you select a pattern. The following picture shows geometry
selection controls.
5 Use the Tool axis control tab to set the direction of the tool axis and the
method used to tilt the tool axis, and to specify the tool contact point on the
surfaces.
7
6 Use the Gouge check tab to set up gouge checking on the flute (tool tip), tool
shaft, arbor, and holder. Up to four gouge checking strategies can be set up
for each operation. Also, you can select different sets of check surfaces (one
set per strategy) and perform gouge checking against the drive surfaces as
well.
7 Use the Link tab to set up tool motion between cutting passes and to set up
entry and exit moves.
8 Use the Roughing tab to:
define stock
set up plunge moves
646 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: In the Toolpath Manager, you can open the Advanced Multiaxis dialog
box by clicking either the Geometry icon or Parameters icon for a multiaxis
toolpath.
For new Mastercam users, choose the Help button to learn more about selecting a tool
and setting feeds and speeds for a Mastercam toolpath.
to machine the back side of a surface, change the surface normal. To do this, choose
Change normal from the Edit menu in the main Mastercam window.
Selecting a cut pattern—The Pattern option sets the general tool movement for the
drive surface. Choose the Drive surface button to select the toolpath surfaces. Use the
Drive surfaces offset option to leave stock on the surfaces for finishing toolpaths.
Each pattern type is described in the following sections. Some of the pattern types
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 649
require additional geometry. The geometry selections appear when you choose the
pattern.
Parallel cuts—This option creates a toolpath where the cuts are parallel. The
direction of the cuts is defined by the two angles. The angles in X, Y and in Z
determine the direction of the parallel cuts of the toolpath. Imagine slicing
an apple: parallel slices from top to bottom or from left to right. The pictures
below show parallel cuts at 0 and 30 degrees in XY, and 90 degrees in Z.
7
Cuts along curve—This option generates motion that is 90 degrees to a
leading curve so the cuts do not have to be parallel to each other. Use the
650 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Lead button to select the curve. The chain direction defines the cut order or
step direction.
Note: If the cuts cross over one another, you may need to change the shape of the
curve.
Morph between two curves—This option creates cuts that change shape
from one curve to a second curve. This option is suitable for machining steep
areas in moldmaking. The more accurate the leading curves are to the real
surface edges, the more accurate the results.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 651
Parallel to curve—This option aligns the cut direction along a leading curve.
Advanced Multiaxis can handle convex surfaces, which are common in
injection molds and forging dies. Click Single Edge and select the curve.
drive and check surface must share the same edge. The check surfaces must
enclose the drive surfaces.
To compensate the tool to both the drive and check surfaces in the left and
right corners of the workpiece, you will need to enter the tool radius as a
margin. The Margins option is available only when the cutting area type is
set to Full, start and end at exact surface edges. After setting this cutting
area type, choose the Margins button in the Area Type section of the tab.
Enter the tool radius for both the start and end margins, and other settings as
necessary. The start margin is applied to the first check surface and the end
margin is applied to the second check surface.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 653
Parallel to surface—This option creates cuts on the drive surface that are
parallel to a check surface. This option is useful for creating tool motion that
is patterned after an irregular or wavy check surface.
Choose the Single edge button to select the check surface you want to make
the parallel cuts from. Be sure to activate gouge-checking to make certain
that the tool will not cut into the check surface. The selected Single edge
surface becomes the check surface used in gouge-checking.
To add surface margins, be sure that a ball (sphere) endmill is selected as the
tool, and select Calc based on tool center in the Utility tab (page 688).
Cutting area—The Area section of the Surface paths tab controls the following
options:
Type – Controls how Mastercam handles surface edges.
Round corners – Finds and removes small radius areas and inside corners in
a surface model. Inside corners can cause “fish tails” in a toolpath. Round
corners can also be considered as a fillet generator. The surface model is
rounded (filleted) in the direction of toolpath slices with a radius to avoid
small radii and inner sharp corners. The applied radius is the main tool
radius plus the current stock to leave value. The fillet generation is
independent of tool type and shape. In most cases, this option is used with a
ball cutter, lollipop cutter, or a conical cutter with ball tip. If you are swarf
machining (side cutting), you can also use cylinder or torus cutters with this
7
option.
Extend/trim – Extends or trims the drive surface. A positive value extends
the surface tangentially to the geometry. A negative value trims the surface.
Angle range – Defines the shallow and steep areas of the surface to be
machined above the surface normal angles. In mold-making and 3-axis
toolpaths, the definition of shallow and steep areas is fairly straight-forward.
With 5-axis machining, parts with undercuts and complex topology make
the definition of shallow and steep areas more abstract.
654 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: A distinction is drawn by the steep areas and shallow areas. The shallow
and steep areas are defined by a view direction and two angles describing an
angle interval. This allows you to machine everything inside or outside of this
angle interval.
requested surface tolerances. The first and last cut is parallel to the
surface edge shape.
Note: Due to the projection, the calculation time for spiral machining is higher
as compared to the other cutting methods.
Cut tolerance – Controls the accuracy of the toolpath. This value is the
chordal deviation of the toolpath against the surfaces to be machined. A
small cut tolerance gives you more tool positions on the drive surface, is
more precise to the surface, and results in better surface quality. However,
the toolpath will take longer to calculate.
Distance – Sets the spacing between tool positions. This option is useful for
flat surfaces. Although the cut tolerance also generates the spacing between
tool positions, using Distance generates more tool positions on flat surfaces.
Setting a small value results in more tool positions.
Surface Edge handling—Opens the Parameters for Surface Edge Handling dialog
box where you define the merge distance, either as a set value or as percentage tool
diameter. Surface paths are created on individual surfaces. Afterwards, they are
merged together to create longer surface paths based on the specified merge distance.
If all surface paths on a toolpath slice are merged, Mastercam checks to see if a closed
surface path can be built by connecting the start to the end. The same merge distance
value is used for deciding this. All surface paths that are within the merge distance you
define are merged together.
Advanced—Opens the Advanced options for Surface Quality dialog box where you
can set the Chaining tolerance for the toolpath. The chaining tolerance is an internal
value for the toolpath generation and should be 1 to 10 times the value of the cut
tolerance. If you have untrimmed simple surfaces, then this value can be set to 100
times the cut tolerance which would increase the calculation speed drastically.
You can also choose the option Slow and safe path creation. The creation of surface
contact paths is done by analyzing the surface patches and slicing it. If the toolpath
topology becomes very complex due to slicing (for example, a parallel to curve
toolpath pattern and surface patches that are very large), there are cases where the
surface contact paths cannot be constructed safely. If you select Slow and safe path
creation, then a finer grid (based on the ax. stepover value) is applied for the initial
analyzing of surface patches, which delivers slower but safer results for surface
contact points.
Stepover—Use this section of the Surface paths tab to define the toolpath’s Maximum
stepover distance. Stepover is the distance between two neighboring cuts. It is
measured differently depending on the toolpath pattern used.
Parallel cuts – Sets the distance between the parallel planes.
Cuts along curve – Sets the distance along the curve perpendicular to the
cutting planes.
Morph between 2 curves and Morph between 2 surfaces – The lanes are
distributed so that at the maximum distance (along the drive surface)
between the curves or surfaces, the distance between two consecutive lanes
is the maximum stepover you define here.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 657
Parallel to curve and Parallel to surface – Sets the 3D distance between two
consecutive lanes.
Project curve – Only one cut is done, so this parameter is not available.
Note: The stepover steps can be smaller or larger than your set value depending
on the pattern you are using. The stepover varies especially when Morph
between 2 curves and Morph between 2 surfaces are used
Cusp height—This field does not have a parameter directly associated with it, but it is
a tool you can use to easily calculate the Maximum stepover, which is the distance
between adjacent cuts. When you enter a Cusp height, Mastercam updates the
Maximum stepover based on the current tool geometry (assuming parallel passes of
a vertical tool over a horizontal plane). If the cusp height cannot be achieved by the
selected cutter, the maximum stepover is set to zero.
Note: The Cusp height field is for information only. It is the Maximum stepover
value, not the cusp height, that is used in toolpath creation.
7
658 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
For 4-axis output, select the Rotary Axis button and choose a rotary axis to
be about the X, Y or Z axis.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 659
Maximum angle step—The Maximum angle step is the maximum angle value
between two toolpath points. Depending on the surface curvature and this angle,
Mastercam may generate more or fewer tool positions. A smaller angle generates
more tool positions while a larger angle generates fewer.
Tilting strategies—Advanced multiaxis provides numerous strategies for tilting the
tool axis. Some strategies require additional geometry, such as lines, points, or curves.
You can keep the tool normal to the surface or tilt it relative to the cutting direction.
Select the tool tilting strategy from the Tool axis will... list:
Not be tilted and stays normal to surface – This option aligns the tool axis
to the surface normal.
7
Be tilted relative to cutting direction – This strategy lets you set a Lead
angle which tilts the tool into the cutting direction.
660 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The Tilt angle tilts the tool toward the side of the cutting direction.
Side tilt definition defines the direction when tilting the tool axis relative
to the cutting direction. Side tilt definition is used for side milling to
ensure contact between the tool and the surface.
Tilted with the angle – The tool axis is tilted away from the surface normal
direction toward the tilt axis. The tilt axis can be the X,Y, and Z axis, or any
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 661
line created in the geometry. Imagine that the tilt axis and surface normal
define a vector plane. The tool can tilt only on this plane.
Tilted with fixed angle to axis – The tool axis is tilted from the tilt axis
toward the surface normal. The tilt axis can be the X,Y, and Z axis, or any line
created in the geometry. Imagine that tilt axis and surface normal define a
cone. The tool can tilt only on the cone.
Tilted around axis – The tool axis has the same direction as the surface
7
normal, but is tilted around an axis. This axis can be the X, Y, Z or any line
created in your geometry. In the following picture, the tool axis direction is
662 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
the same as the surface normal but tilted with a 45-degree angle around the
Z axis.
Tilted through point – The tool axis is always pointing to a geometry point.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 663
Tilted through curve – The tool axis is aligned to a curve that you create, or
that Mastercam creates for you (the Automatic curve option under Curve
Tilt Type). Click on Tilt curve and select the curve in the graphics window.
Tilted through lines – The tool axis is approximated to the lines you create in
your geometry. In the following picture are four lines and the generated
toolpath. When the tool axis passes near the lines, the tilt matches the
direction of the line and gradually changes until the tool axis aligns with the
next line it encounters in the toolpath.
7
664 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Tilted from point away – The tool axis is always pointing away from a point
in the geometry. This strategy is the opposite of tilting through a point.
Tilted from curve away – During machining on your drive surface, the tool
points away from the tilt curve. Depending on your curve tilt type, the tool
orientation and alignment to the curve changes.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 665
Run tool
This parameter defines the contact point of tool to the drive surfaces. Mastercam
If the tool axis orientation is changed due to tilting options, the tool will be
tilted around the tool tip center point. In this case, the tool and surface are
no longer tangential and the tool will gouge the surface. To avoid this
666 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
At front – The option At front, similar to At Center, forces the tool touch
point to be a fixed point on the tool. This point is the beginning of the bull
nose tool radius in the direction of the tool motion. All changes to tool
orientation are made around this pivot point, and this can gouge the drive
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 667
At user given point – Use this setting to select the contact point on the tool.
You enter this point as an offset from the front and side of the tool. The
following picture shows a front offset of the touch point.
Limits—Use the Limits option to set a range of tool motion for a rotary axis that limits
the amount of head tilt relative to the tool position.
668 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Tool angle allowed on XZ plane between – Select XZ to limit the tool on the
XZ plane between angle b1 and b2.
Tool angle allowed on YZ plane between – Select YZ to limit the tool on the
YZ plane between angle a1 and a2.
Tool angle allowed on XY plane between – Select XY to limit the tool on the
XY plane between angle c1 and c2.
Contain tool within conical angles – Use this option to limit the tool
between two angles starting from the toolpath slice normal vector. Imagine
two cones with different opening angles w1 and w2. The tool axis direction is
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 669
forced between these two cones. The orientation of the cones depends on
the cone axis settings. You can set the orientation to X, Y or Z, or to a user-
defined direction.
Note: If you selected Cuts along curve as the Cut pattern in the Surface Paths
tab, you can set the cone axis to Dynamically using leading curve and limit the
tool axis along the curve and its toolpath.
7
670 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Check—Each gouge-checking strategy can check against any or all of four tool
components. The following picture identifies the tool components used in gouge-
checking.
Strategy—The Strategy option tells Mastercam what action to take when a gouge is
encountered in the toolpath.
7
Retracting tool along tool axis – The gouge is avoided by retracting the tool.
In some cases, this strategy may cause material being left that should be
machined. You can have Mastercam report these areas by selecting Report
remaining collisions on the Advanced dialog box. Mastercam will show the
672 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
tool positions before retractions and surface points used to calculate the next
position as points. A line is drawn between the two points.
Moving tool away – Assigns the direction in which the tool has to move
away from the check surface. While retracting the tool, Mastercam uses the
smallest distance to avoid the check surface, but only moves in the selected
direction.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 673
Tilting tool away with max angle – Avoids a gouge by tilting the tool. In the
picture below, the tool tilts horizontally with a 65-degree angle (side angle)
orthogonal to the surface normal.
Leaving out gouge points – Trims the toolpath when a gouge is detected.
7
674 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
IMPORTANT: If you select more than one gouge check strategy, you must
choose Report remaining collisions in the last active gouge check set.
Link tab
Use this tab to set gap motion and to set entry and exit moves for the toolpath.
Frequently, surfaces that define the part can have gaps and holes. The options on this
tab define the tool motion when these gaps are encountered. For example, small gaps
7
676 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
can be ignored and milled without retracting the tool, while larger gaps cause the tool
to retract to the rapid plane to avoid the gap.
First entry—Controls the initial approach of the tool toward the part. You can specify
the distance from which the tool will enter the part and whether or not there will be a
simple move or a lead in / lead out move. Lead in/ Lead out moves refer to a complex
motion that you can configure in detail; see “Lead in / Lead Out” on page 680 to learn
more.
Approach from clearance area is the default setting. The tool moves from
the clearance area, to the rapid distance, then to the feed distance before
entering the part.
Choosing Approach from rapid distance or Approach from feed distance
moves the start point closer to the part.
Last Exit —Defines how the tool will exit the part when the toolpath is finished, and
where the part should move to. You also define whether or not there will be a simple
move or a lead in / lead out move. Lead in / Lead out moves refer to a complex motion
that you can configure in detail; see “Lead in / Lead Out” on page 680 to learn more.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 677
Retract to clearance area is the default setting. The tool moves from the
drive surface to the feed distance, then to the rapid distance and finally to
the clearance area.
To end the machining Retract to Feed distance or Retract to Rapid
distance, the machining ends with this distances.
Retract to clearance area button to define the area where the tool can travel
in the air without hitting the workpiece.
7
678 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Direct – The tool uses the shortest path, a straight line, to the other side of
the gap without retracting and at the machining feed rate.
Retract to feed distance – The tool retracts along the tool axis to the feed
distance. The tool leaves the surface at the rapid speed and moves to the next
toolpath point at the machining feed rate.
Retract to rapid distance – The tool retracts along the tool axis to the rapid
distance. The tool leaves the surface at the rapid speed and moves to the next
toolpath point at the machining feed rate.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 679
Retract to clearance area – The tool moves to the clearance area at the rapid
speed and returns to the drive surface at the machining feed rate.
Follow surfaces – The tool follows the geometry and generates motion that
matches the surface as it crosses the gap. In the following picture, the green
surfaces are the drive surfaces and the red surface is a check surface. The tool
follows the check surface as it passes the gap.
Blend spline – The blend spline connects the drive surfaces with a toolpath
which leaves and enters the drive surfaces tangentially. The result is a very
smooth connecting motion even on edgy gaps.
Lead in / Lead out moves – Customize the gap motion by creating lead in or
lead out moves. See “Lead in / Lead Out” on page 680 to learn more.
Links between slice—This option defines how Mastercam moves the tool between
cuts. Like Gaps along cut, you can specify the size that defines a small movement as a
680 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
percent of tool motion, and have Mastercam make different movements between
small and large links.
Mastercam calculates the size difference as a percentage of the maximum stepover set
on the Surface paths tab.
For example, if this value is set to 150% and the maximum stepover value is 0.1mm the
gap threshold is 0.15mm. Mastercam checks all stepover moves from one toolpath
slice to the next slice 0.15 mm and determines whether the gap is smaller or larger
than this value.
As an alternative, you can select As value to have Mastercam define a small move as
the amount you enter, rather than as a percentage of the maximum stepover.
Links between passes—Select either the Multipasses or Depth Cuts option on the
Roughing tab to enable the Link between passes options. Select the type of tool
movement between passes, or use a lead in or lead out move.
Lead in / Lead Out—Use the Lead in / Lead out parameters to define the tool entry
into or exit from the drive surface. These settings provide additional motion to the
link strategies you have selected for the toolpath. When you select a lead in / our
move, click the [...] button to access options shown in the following picture.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 681
Clearance area—Clearance area is the place where the tool can travel through air
without hitting the workpiece. This can be a plane at a given height, a cylinder, or a
sphere. The tool travels at the rapid speed from the clearance area to the rapid
distance, and the head turns to its final orientation. Once the tool reaches the rapid
distance, it is in the correct orientation for the first cut.
The options available for clearance area depend on the drive surface and machining
strategy.
Distances—Defines parameters for the feed and rapid distances when approaching
the part and retracting from it.
When the tool comes from the clearance area to the Rapid distance, the
head turns to the orientation for the first cut. The tool maintains this
orientation from the rapid to the Feed distance. The feed rate from rapid
distance to feed distance is rapid speed.
The Feed distance is usually close to the drive surface. Once the tool reaches
the Feed distance, the speed changes to the machining feed rate.
7
682 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The Air move safety distance is a minimum distance between the tool
clearance area and the drive and check surface.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 683
Roughing tab
Use this tab to define stock and to set up multipasses and depth cuts.
Stock definition—All tool moves in the air that do not remove material will be
trimmed using the stock definition. Click this button to choose whether to select
surfaces from the part geometry to define the stock, or use the stock setup you have
7
set up in the Machine Group Properties.
684 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Choose the Stock def. parameters button to access parameters you use to enter a
stock definition tolerance and further define stock settings.
Plunge—Select the Plunge option to move the tool along the tool axis to the drive
surface using a plunging motion. Step length sets the offset between the plunged
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 685
holes. Side length sets the depth of the plunged holes. Plunge height is the depth of
the plunge measured from the tool position on the surface.
Slices Passes
The Use Ramp option changes the slices into one spiral slice. The tool starts
and stops on the same position with or without the ramp option selected.
Area roughing—This function is only for impeller floor machining. The result is
similar to Morph between 2 Surfaces but in the area roughing dialog box, you can
define a splitter blade, where the tool works around.
Transform / Rotate—This option lets you choose a direction vector for the axis around
which to rotate the toolpath. Use additional parameters to:
Choose a base point of rotation and axis direction.
Set the number of rotations to be applied (steps).
Define the starting angle for the first rotated toolpath, relative to the non-
rotated toolpath position.
Set the rotation angle for each rotation step.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 687
Select a sorting type. You can choose to rotate the whole toolpath
completely, by passes, or by slices. You can also choose to rotate only a
portion of the toolpath, based on a percentage you specify.
Apply linking. The linking can be applied before or after rotation.
Apply stock. The stock can be applied before or after rotation.
Sorting—The Sorting option applies to Depth cuts and Multipasses.
Connect slices by shortest distance—When you select Connect slices by shortest
distance, Mastercam will use the shortest distance to the next cut. The result is a
zigzag machining within each slice.
7
688 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Utility tab
This tab contains special functions for custom applications.
Feed rates—Select Feed rates to use the feed rate optimizer. This optimizer uses the
machining feed rate that you supplied on the Toolpath parameters tab and modifies it
based on the surface curvature. The surface curvature is calculated at each toolpath
position where the surface contact point of the tool is known.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 689
Calculation based on tool center—With Calc based on tool center disabled, the tool
touch points (yellow dots) and the drive surface are on the same level.
When you select Calc based on tool center, the tool centers (red dots) are on the
same level.
7
690 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Axial shift—Axial shift adds an offset to the tool along its axis. This offset can be
positive or negative.
TIP: For engraving applications, use this parameter to set the depth of cut.
7
692 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Misc tab
Use this tab to enter the following types of information for the toolpath:
Simulation —Select Save toolpath as geometry (delete: undo) to save the toolpath
as geometry in your part file. Click the […] button to open the Options to create
geometry dialog box.
Tip comp—Controls whether the locations that are output to the NCI file will be the
tool center or tool tip coordinates. This setting is different than the Calc based on
tool center option on the Utility tab (page 688). The Tip comp setting does not
change how the toolpath is calculated, only how the calculated positions are output.
For example, if you select Calc based on tool center in the Utility tab, and Tip comp:
Center in the Misc tab, the tool coordinates output to the NCI file will be the same as
the calculated tool positions. If you select Tip comp: Tip in the Misc tab, Mastercam
will output the coordinates of the tool tip at the calculated tool positions. The
toolpath is the same in either case, it is just expressed in terms of the tool tip or tool
center.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 693
Output surface change comments in NC file—Select this option to insert a line of text
into the NC file that indicates when the machining surface changes and identifies the
new surface. The surface title entered in the Levels Manager appears in parentheses at
the end of the line.
Support file—Select the Save button to create a binary support file (*.BIN) or the Load
button to load operations from a binary support file.
Lathe Toolpaths
With Mastercam Lathe, you can create many different toolpaths for turning machines,
from roughing and finishing inside and outside diameters to C-axis (mill/turn)
programming. Mastercam Lathe also includes grooving, threading, drilling, facing,
and cutoff toolpaths for all your lathe machining needs.
When you choose a Lathe machine definition from the Machine Type menu, the
Toolpaths menu displays the lathe toolpath types you can create. This includes a
number of mill toolpaths you choose from the Toolpaths, Mill submenu.
Note: For more information on using Mill toolpath functions, see “Mill and
Router Toolpaths” on page 475.
In this section, you will learn about the different toolpath types you can create with
Mastercam Lathe, including:
7
General Turning Toolpaths (page 694)
Mill/Turn Toolpaths (page 709)
Miscellaneous Operations (page 715)
694 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You do not chain geometry to create the toolpath. Instead, choose Face from the
Toolpaths menu and use the Face Parameters tab to specify how much stock to
remove.
Note: If you use the stock model for the start and end positions of each pass and
the stock changes, the positions of each pass are automatically updated when
you regenerate the toolpath.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 695
Note: Compared to other types of lathe roughing toolpaths, this tab offers you
the most complete set of roughing options.
Use the pictures as a guide for entering the different toolpath dimensions. Options on
the right side of the tab allow you to select the type of cutter compensation and
complete the toolpath by adding advanced features such as a semi-finish pass, lead
in/out moves, and toolpath filtering.
7
696 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To create this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Finish. After chaining geometry or
selecting points, select a tool. Then use the Finish parameters tab to define the
toolpath.
Figure 7-64: Example: Lathe Finish toolpath,
Finish parameters tab
types of grooves based on the location of just a corner point or points; this lets you
create groove toolpaths without having to create or chain geometry. You can also use
chained geometry to specify complicated or intricate groove contours.
You can machine several grooves in a single operation, even if their geometry never
connects. Mastercam also integrates roughing and finishing passes, each with
separate parameters, in a single operation.
Note: For more information on configuring the toolpath manager, see “Toolpath
Manager” on page 869.
4 In the Grooving Options dialog box choose a method for defining the
grooves (1 or 2 points, 3 lines, chain, or Multiple chains) and another for
selecting points (manual or window).
5 When prompted, select points in the graphics window using the specified
point selection method.
6 Then, use the Lathe Groove Properties dialog box tabs to define the
toolpath, as follows:
a Select and define a tool in the Toolpath parameters tab. (For more
information, see “Selecting Tools” on page 403.)
b Choose the Groove shape parameters tab to define the shape, angle,
and orientation (for example, ID, OD, face) of the grooves in the toolpath,
including automatic chamfers/radii on corners. You also use the options
in this tab to specify the groove boundaries. Groove shape parameters
apply to all the grooves in the toolpath.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 699
c To create roughing cuts for the groove toolpath and set options for
pecking and depth cuts, choose the Groove rough parameters tab and
select Rough the groove to enable the options in this tab. To create only a
finish operation, make sure this option is deselected.
d To create finishing cuts for the groove toolpath, choose the Groove finish
parameters tab and select Finish groove to enable the options in this
tab. To omit the finishing pass and create only a roughing groove
operation, deselect this option.
7 Click OK to accept the toolpath parameters and close the dialog box.
In addition to the standard groove toolpaths, which include all the grooving
capabilities described above, Mastercam also includes quick groove and canned
groove toolpath types for less-demanding applications. For more information, see
“Quick and Canned Toolpaths” on page 706.
You do not select geometry or drill points in the graphics window to create a Lathe
drill toolpath. Mastercam creates the toolpath entirely from parameters you set in the
Lathe Drill dialog box tabs.
7
Mastercam offers the following standard drill cycles:
Tap
The exact list of cycles varies, depending on the active control definition. You can
customize both the drill cycles and how they are displayed using the Control
Definition Manager, Machine Cycles properties page. You can also use the Control
700 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Definition Manager to define and name custom drill cycles which are added to the list
you can choose from when creating a drill toolpath. Any custom drill parameters you
define for the control definition display in the Lathe Drill dialog box Custom
parameters tab. The post processor used with the control must also be configured to
support canned cycles.
Note: For more information on setting up drill cycles for the control, see
“Machine Cycles” on page 798.
To create a drill toolpath, choose Drill from the Toolpaths menu to access the Lathe
Drill Cycle parameters tab (the exact name of this tab changes depending on the
selected drill cycle).
When you create a drill toolpath, there are three Z-axis dimensions you must enter in
addition to the drill point (the location of the hole).
Depth: How deep to drill the hole.
Clearance: A safe point along the drilling axis to which the tool rapids before
approaching the part.
Retract: The position the tool rapids to from the clearance point, then feeds
into the part.
You can enter these distances as absolute or incremental values.
Clearance
Depth
Retract
Clearance
Retract
Depth
Absolute Incremental
When using absolute, each distance is calculated from the construction
origin.
When using incremental, each distance is calculated from the drill point, or,
optionally, from the stock face.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 701
Manual Entry
Use this toolpath function and dialog box to create an operation which does nothing
except insert a block of text, comments, or Gcodes into an NC program when you post
it. You can store text directly with the operation, or you can reference an external text
file that Mastercam will read when posting. You can either insert the literal text as
Gcode commands or have them formatted as comments.
Figure 7-65: Manual Entry dialog box
To create the operation, first tell Mastercam where to read the text from. Choose Enter
text to type the text right into the dialog box, or choose Use text file to select an
702 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
external file which contains plain ASCII text. If you wish, you can choose one of the
Edit buttons to open the original file or a copy to review it or make changes.
If you have selected a file, you next need to tell Mastercam how you want to include it.
Choose Save in MCX file to save the text with your part file, or choose Read only
when posting if you want to be able to edit the text without going into your
Mastercam file, or if the same file will be used many times.
Finally, choose how you want the text formatted. You can choose to format it as
comments in your program, or as code to be executed.
de
mo
ed ith
M ve
Fe d w
ge
up
mo
Ra d
ov
ck
pi
pi
d
Re
Ad
Ra
Ba
When you begin creating the toolpath, you are prompted to select the first point to
which the tool will rapid from the home position. To add additional points, click the
locations in the graphics window. Use the G0 (interpolated rapid / rapid with break),
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 703
or G1 (feed rate) buttons to define the type of move before selecting points, or to edit
them afterwards.
For each point in the toolpath, you can program the following types of tool
movement:
Rapid: The tool rapids to the new point in a straight line (interpolated in
multiple axes).
Rapid break: The tool rapids to the new point, but each axis is interpolated
separately; in other words, first the Z-axis component of the move is
performed, then the X-axis move (the actual order of the axes depends on the
tool orientation and the direction of movement).
Feed rate: The tool moves to the new points at the programmed feed rate
(G1).
Change mode: Changes the type of motion to a particular point when
editing a point toolpath. First select the button for the desired type of motion
(Rapid, Rapid break). Then choose Change mode and click on the point to
change. You can select more than one point. Press [Enter] when you have
finished selecting points.
Use the Back up button to delete points and back up to the previous point. Click OK
when you finish selecting the points.
Use the Toolpath parameters tab to select a tool, coolant, and set other toolpath
options. To achieve the desired tool motion, try disabling the reference points feature
(deselect the Ref points check box).
In the Thread shape parameters tab, there are three main parts to the parameters
you define:
Thread form geometry: Select the dimensions from a thread form table;
compute them from a formula, or just enter the values directly into the fields.
Thread orientation: Program threads on the ID, OD, or face/back. You can
also enter a taper value, or cut threads from the other side of the X-axis by
selecting the proper options. The guide pictures update as you make
different selections.
Thread allowance values: Choose these from a table, or enter the values
directly.
TIP: To preview the thread geometry in the graphics window, choose Draw
geometry. You can also use the picture in the tab to verify your selections.
Use the Thread cut parameters tab to enter toolpath and cutting parameters for a
thread toolpath.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 705
Cutoff Toolpaths
Cutoff toolpaths vertically cut off pieces of the part, such as sections of bar stock.
When you choose Toolpaths, Cutoff, you do not chain any geometry for the cutoff
toolpath. Instead, you select the point where the part is cut off. Then select a tool and
use the Cutoff Parameters tab to define the toolpath.
7
706 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
In the following example of a cutoff toolpath, the dotted line shows the toolpath. The
boundary is marked with a circle.
Notes:
• Canned toolpaths are machine- and control-dependent. To create canned
toolpaths, the control definition used with the selected Lathe machine type
must allow the corresponding canned cycles. You set these parameters in the
Control Definition Manager, Machine Cycles properties page. For more
information, see “Machine Cycles” on page 798.
• The post processor used with the control must also be configured to support
canned cycles.
Quick toolpaths—The Toolpaths, Quick menu includes quick rough, finish, and
groove toolpaths, which let you create simple toolpaths by entering only a few
parameters.
Quick rough toolpaths: Coarsely cuts the part geometry in preparation of a
finish toolpath. Choose this toolpath type to quickly create a simple
roughing operation and do not need Mastercam's more advanced roughing
features.
Quick finish toolpaths: Useful for placing finish passes on an uncomplicated
part where you do not need all of Mastercam's more advanced finishing
options. You can chain geometry for this toolpath or simply select an existing
roughing operation. Quick finish toolpaths are also associative.
Quick groove toolpaths: Creates simple, symmetrical grooves. Quick groove
toolpaths offer you a subset of Mastercam's grooving options.
Canned toolpaths—Use functions in the Toolpaths, Canned menu to create very
efficient NC programs using your CNC machine controller’s canned cycle programs.
Another benefit of creating canned toolpaths is that you can change the toolpath by
editing canned cycle parameters at the control level using the Control Definition
Manager, instead of recreating the NC program. Mastercam Lathe canned toolpath
types include:
Canned rough toolpaths: Creates a roughing toolpath based on your
7
machine tool control's canned cycles. For example, a Fanuc-compatible post
would typically output a G71.
Canned finish toolpaths: Creates a finish pass for a canned rough or pattern
repeat toolpath which is based on your machine tool control's canned
cycles. For example, a Fanuc-compatible post would typically output a G70
for this toolpath.
Canned groove toolpaths: Use canned groove toolpaths to machine a groove
using your machine tool control's canned cycles. For example, a Fanuc-
compatible post would typically output a G75.
Canned pattern repeat: Creates a roughing toolpath in which the cutting
passes follow the part contour. Each cutting pass offsets the contour by a
708 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
stepover percentage which you control. Use this toolpath type when the
stock to be removed is similar to the shape of the part contour and a regular
roughing pass would cut mostly air. The code produced by this toolpath is
based on your machine tool control's canned cycles. For example, a Fanuc-
compatible post would typically output a G73.
Notes:
• Using canned toolpath types results in a very compact NC program, but you do
not have access to all of Mastercam's features for the selected toolpath type
(roughing, finishing, grooving, and pattern repeat).
• The canned toolpath dialog boxes display only those parameters that are
supported by your machine controller’s canned cycle programs.
• Use the Lathe canned cycles section in the control definition to configure which
canned cycles will be available and which toolpath features will generate
canned cycle output.
• If canned cycle output is not enabled, Mastercam will generate “long-hand”
output; in other words, individual Gcodes for every positioning and cutting
move.
Note: In the Groove Shape Parameters tab, the Adjust end / start of contour
options are available only when the groove is defined from chained geometry.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 709
Mill/Turn Toolpaths
Mill/turn toolpaths use “live” tooling in which the tool rotates in its own spindle. The
part can be stationary in the chuck or the part spindle can be programmed as a rotary
axis (C-axis). You use tool planes (Tplanes) to specify how the tool is oriented with
respect to the part.
Mill/turn machines come in two styles: C-axis and Y-axis.
The C-axis machine, which is more common, provides linear motion in the X
and Z axes and rotary motion around the C axis.
Y-axis machines support the C-axis motion and have an additional linear
axis that allows the milling tool to move above and below the spindle's center
line.
In this section, you will learn how to create the following mill/turn toolpath types.
C-axis Contour Toolpaths Creates a rotary toolpath that wraps around the
(page 710): spindle axis.
C-axis Cross-contour Cuts parallel to the spindle axis, for example, to cut a
Toolpaths (page 710): slot lengthwise on the part.
C-axis Cross Drill Drills from the side towards the centerline or off-center.
Toolpaths
(page 712):
C-axis Face Drill Drills on the face of the part parallel to the centerline, but
Toolpaths not necessarily on the centerline.
(page 713):
710 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Mastercam
creating a C-axis
contour toolpath
C-axis contour toolpaths automatically set the rotation type to Axis substitution
around the Z axis. This gives you the choice of chaining either flat geometry which will
be rolled around the cylinder, or geometry which is already properly positioned in 3D
space.
Use the Rotary Axis Control property page of the C-Axis Contour dialog box to to
configure rotary axis motion for mill/turn applications. Select one of three types of
rotary motion:
Choose C-axis for linear motion in the X and Z axes and you need rotary
motion around the C axis.
Choose Y-axis if you need the milling tool to move above or below the
spindle's center line.
Use Axis substitution to wrap a toolpath around a cylinder. The geometry
can be either flat or already properly oriented in 3D space.
If the geometry is already properly positioned, select the Unroll option. If the
geometry is flat, deselect this option. Flat geometry should be in the Top Cplane at a Z-
depth of 0 (zero).
C-axis Cross-contour Toolpaths
Use cross-contour toolpaths to cut parallel to the axis of rotation. These toolpaths are
most often used to cut slots. Mastercam sets the tool plane (Tplane) and construction
plane (Cplane) so that the tool is placed perpendicular to the axis of rotation
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 711
(typically, the part spindle). To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis,
Cross Contour.
The following picture shows a cross contour toolpath which cuts slots along the
outside of the cylinder. The tool cuts the slot by following the single straight line in the
middle of each slot.
Note: Choosing this toolpath type also sets the default cutter compensation to
Off so that the center of the tool follows the chained geometry.
Set the rotation type to C-axis in the the Rotary Axis Control property page of the C-
Axis Contour dialog box to produce polar-conversion output for a C-axis lathe, or
select Y-axis rotation to produce X-Y-Z coordinate output.
Note: C-axis drill toolpaths are similar to C-axis cross drill toolpaths. The
difference is how they produce the rotary motion. For more information, see
“Comparing C-axis Drill and Cross-drill Toolpaths” on page 712.
When creating a C-axis drill toolpath, create the toolpath in the top Tplane
and use Axis substitution. This gives you the flexibility to select either points
that are properly positioned in 3D space around the rotation axis, or point
that lie in the top plane. Select the Unroll option if the drill points are already
properly oriented, or deselect it if the points are in the top plane.
C-axis Face Drill Toolpaths
Face drill toolpaths allow you to drill holes in the face of the part. Because this
toolpath uses live tooling on a stationary part, you can drill holes that are not on the
centerline.
Depending on how the post processor is configured, this toolpath typically outputs a
mill drill cycle such as G81, whereas a regular lathe drill toolpath outputs a lathe drill
cycle such as G99. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis, Face Drill.
When selected, Mastercam sets the Tplane and Cplane to the side so that the tool is
placed perpendicular to the face of the part.
7
714 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
3 In the Cview dialog box, use the following procedure to define the toolpath
orientation:
a In the C-axis Milling Type section, set the general orientation of the
toolpath. This selection determines the Tplane.
Choose Cross if the toolpath will move along the side or along the
length of the part.
Choose Axis substitution to wrap the toolpath around the part.
b In the Construction Plane (Relative to Tplane) section, define how the
Cplane will be oriented relative to the Tplane:
Choose Parallel to set the Cplane equal to the Tplane.
Choose Perpendicular or Swiss to set the Cplane to either of the two
planes perpendicular to the Tplane. For example, for Cross milling—
which sets the Tplane to Back—the Perpendicular option would set
the Cplane to Top. Swiss would set it to Left, which is the other
perpendicular plane.
c Choose an Initial Angle Adjustment to rotate the part so that a particular
section or face is aligned to the Tplane/Cplane that you have selected.
Choose the Select button to return to the graphics window and select an
entity.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 715
Select a point to rotate the part so that the tool plane is normal to an
imaginary line drawn from the point perpendicular to the X-axis.
Select a line to rotate the part so that the Tplane is normal to an
imaginary line drawn from a point along the selected line to the X axis.
The imaginary line is perpendicular to selected line and the X axis.
Select an arc to set the Initial Angle normal to the arc's plane.
TIP: Choose Display to temporarily close the dialog box and view a
representation of these settings in the graphics window. The tool displays its
orientation in the Tplane; the white rectangle represents the Cplane. Press
Enter to exit the display and return to the Cview dialog box.
IMPORTANT: The Tplane and Cplane orientation you set with the CView
utility function remains in effect until you change it, either by using the Planes
function in the Status bar, or by choosing a toolpath type from the Toolpaths,
C-axis menu. These toolpath types have a pre-defined orientation that is
automatically set.
Miscellaneous Operations
You use miscellaneous operations to manipulate the stock and program the
7
movements of peripherals like tailstocks, chucks, and steady rests. These toolpaths
might output M-codes or G-codes. You can program miscellaneous operations only
for peripherals that are supported by the active machine definition.
Lathe Stock Transfer Lets you program operations on the opposite side or
operation: back of a lathe part in the same Mastercam file.
Lathe Stock Advance Creates an operation that repositions the stock in the
operation: spindle or controls a bar feeder.
Lathe Stock Flip Outputs a comment and program stop in the NC code,
operation: which lets the operator manually remove the stock and
reposition (flip) it in the chuck. You can program stock
flip operations on the opposite side and back of a lathe
part in the same Mastercam file.
716 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Lathe Steady Rest Creates an operation that repositions the steady rest.
operation:
Choose from the following operation types:
To create a stock transfer operation, choose Toolpaths, Misc Ops, Stock Transfer. In
the Lathe stock transfer tab, use the following process to create an operation which
transfers the stock to a chuck on the other spindle.
Transfer the geometry—Choose the Transfer geometry option. This creates a copy of
your part geometry aligned with the repositioned stock. (The original geometry is left
unchanged.) Choose the Select button to return to the graphics window and select
the specific entities or chains that you want to copy. You can specify a different level
for the new geometry, as necessary.
Locate the stock—Enter the original and new positions for the stock. You can select
the locations, or choose From stock back face to automatically use the back face of
the stock as currently calculated by Mastercam. The point you choose does not have
to be on the face of the stock. You can choose any convenient reference point.
Control the chucks—Use the Main Spindle Position section to enter the location of a
reference point on the chuck which is currently holding the stock. Enter the current
location and the location to which the chuck will move after the stock has been
picked-off or Select the locations.
Then, enter the coordinates of a reference point of a chuck on the sub-spindle which
will be receiving the stock. Enter its current location, and the location where it will
pick-off the part. The relationship between this Z-coordinate and the current stock
location determines how much of the stock will be clamped. If you choose the Get
dia. from stock option, Mastercam automatically calculates the current stock
diameter at the Z coordinate you enter for the pick-off position.
7
The final location of the chuck after it picks off the part is determined by the
Transferred Position you specify for the stock.
Move the coordinate system—Choose Construction Origin or Tool Origins to relocate
the coordinate system to the new spindle. Select the desired “Move...” option and Z
position of the source and destination locations.
TIP: If the current bar feeder is not capable of measuring how far it has
advanced the stock, use the Toolpath parameters tab in this dialog box to
select a tool used to stop the stock from advancing or to pull the stock to its
new position.
Chuck Operations
Use this operation to clamp, unclamp, or reposition the chuck. This lets you take
advantage of the automatic clamping and unclamping features on your machine.
Mastercam’s collision avoidance features prevent the tool from making a move into
the chuck.
IMPORTANT: To create a chuck operation, you must first define the chuck in
the Toolpath Manager Stock Setup tab. Also, the machine and control
definition must support the operation.
7
To create a chuck toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Misc Ops, Chuck. Use the Lathe chuck
tab to enter parameters for the new operation.
720 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
If your machine has two spindles, select the active spindle for the operation.
Select the type of operation. You can create operations to clamp, unclamp, or
move the chuck.
Enter the original and final positions of the chuck, or choose the Select
button to select the locations from the graphics window.
To restrict the chuck's movement to X-axis moves only, choose the Diameter
only option. This is especially useful for Swiss machines where the chuck
moves in Z instead of the tool.
Tailstock Operations
Use this operation to reposition the tailstock.
To access the Lathe Tailstock Properties tab and define the operation, choose
Toolpaths, Misc Ops, Tailstock.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 721
In the Operation section, select Advance or Retract to indicate whether the operation
is moving the tailstock towards the part or pulling it away. Mastercam automatically
advances or retracts the quill based on your selection.
Then, enter the original and destination positions of a reference point on the
tailstock, or choose the Select button to select the locations from the graphics
7
window. If you have created a stock model and drilled a 60-degree center hole in the
face, choose the Auto option to automatically position the tailstock in the hole.
IMPORTANT: To create a steady rest operation, you must first define a steady
rest in the Toolpath Manager Stock Setup tab. Also, the machine and control
definition must support this type of operation.
To create an operation that repositions the steady rest, choose Toolpaths, Misc Ops,
Steady Rest use the Lathe steady rest tab to define the operation.
Figure 7-75: Lathe Steady Rest Properties dialog box
Enter the original and destination positions for a reference point on the steady rest.
You can choose Select to return to the graphics window and select the locations if you
wish. The point you choose can be any convenient reference point on the steady rest.
Nesting Toolpaths
Nesting is the process of fitting multiple copies of a part within a boundary (material
sheet) for best yield. Parts can be nested next to each other or even within each other
to provide the most efficient use of the material.
You can choose to nest geometry or toolpaths. You can bring in geometry from a file
or chain it in the graphics window. To use toolpaths for nesting, they must already be
defined in the current part file.
Nesting provides several methods for defining sheets of material. A sheet definition
consists of the sheet geometry, length and width dimensions, quantity of that sheet to
be used in the nesting session, position of the lower left corner (origin), and the grain
direction. Each material sheet you define can be used in the current nesting session.
You can also save the sheets to a nesting sheet library file (.NSL) for reuse.
Both geometry parts and toolpath parts can be added as clusters. A cluster is a
collection of parts that are nested as a single unit and maintain their spatial
relationship with each other.
The parts in a nesting session or operation can lie at different Z depths. Nesting
generates the session at the current Z (construction) depth.
The Nesting add-on to Mastercam provides two modes of operation: Rectangular and
TrueShape.
Rectangular nesting places a bounding box around the part and uses the box
as the part boundary for nesting. Rectangular nesting supports a subset of
the TrueShape nesting functionality.
Engraving Toolpaths
When creating Engraving toolpaths, you can define roughing, finishing, and
remachining operations. Engraving generates a contour-like finish pass as part of the
roughing operation.
TIP: Although engraving toolpaths do not require roughing, you can use
roughing to clean out cavities as an alternative to pocketing.
7
Use the following general steps to create an engraving toolpath:
1 Choose a router machine definition from the Machine Type menu.
2 Select Toolpaths, Engraving.
3 Select an appropriate tool, such as an engraving bit or chamfer bit, and set
tool parameters.
4 Choose the Engraving parameters tab to set the clearance, retract plane and
feed plane heights, machining depth and direction, top of stock, and the
amount of stock to leave for a finish pass. You can also set the toolpath to roll
around sharp corners, wrap a toolpath on a curved surface, filter points from
726 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
the toolpath for smoother motion, specify the number and type of depth
cuts, and remachine the toolpath.
Note: If you use a flat cutter to machine out a cavity and plan to remachine the
corners, you can enter an Angle for flat cutter offset that offsets the tip of the
straight (flat) bit to match the V-groove tip position. This ensures that the
roughing operation does not gouge the engraved edge.
Note: The rough cutting methods are unavailable when you create an engraving
remachining operation. Remachining toolpaths always use the zigzag cutting
pattern.
6 Click OK to accept the toolpath parameters and close the dialog box.
You can calculate the material to be removed either from the previous
operation or from the dimensions of the roughing tool.
Note: If you use a previous operation to calculate the remaining stock for an
engraving remachining operation, you cannot rearrange the operations later in
the Toolpath Manager.
7
728 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
chapter 8
Machine and Control Definitions
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Introducing Machine and Control Definitions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 729
Working with Machine Definitions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 739
Working with Control Definitions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 763
so that the .CONTROL file can be shared by multiple machines and can access
multiple post processors. Think of a .CONTROL file as a library of control
definitions. It works the same way as tool libraries, which store sets of tool
definitions so that individual tools can be accessed by different machines. If you
have multiple machines and post processors to support, you can use .CONTROL
files to determine which posts can be used with which machines.
Post processor—Stored in a .PST file. (Encrypted posts are stored in a .PSB file.)
Each control definition is linked to a specific post processor.
In Mastercam X, the .PST file also stores the post text and miscellaneous
values, so that the .TXT file used in earlier versions of Mastercam is no longer
used.
The most common arrangement for most installations will be to link a single machine
definition file, a single control definition in a .CONTROL file, and a single post
processor together. In this model, selecting a machine definition is similar to selecting
a post processor in earlier versions of Mastercam. For advanced users, the machine
definition and control definition architecture lets you configure a single post to be
used with multiple machine definitions, or single machine definitions that can use
several different posts.
When you select a machine, Mastercam creates a machine group in the Toolpath
Manager.
The machine group is where Mastercam stores all of your toolpaths for the selected
machine. The machine group and its properties contain most of the Job Setup
functions from earlier versions of Mastercam.
To create operations for another machine, select the new machine and Mastercam
automatically creates a new machine group for it.
For example, if your part requires both milling and turning operations, you can create
separate lathe and mill machine groups just by selecting the proper machines. You
can save them all in the same part. Each machine group stores a complete job setup
for the selected machine.
8
732 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
While you will work with machine definitions every time you create toolpaths, for
most day-to-day tasks, you will not need to explicitly work with .CONTROL files. Just
like in a real machine tool, the control is “bolted on” to a machine definition, so that
when you select the machine definition, the control gets selected with it.
When you select a machine from the Machine Type menu, several other things
happen:
A post processor is automatically selected. It is possible to configure a
machine definition with several available post processors. In this case, a
default post processor is automatically selected when you pick the machine,
but you can select any allowed post from the machine group properties (see
“Selecting a Different Post Processor” on page 756).
Mastercam loads a set of operation defaults (.DEFAULTS file).
Mastercam’s interface changes to match the selected machine. If you select a
lathe, for example, the Toolpaths menu lists only Mastercam Lathe
toolpaths. In addition, the set of toolbars that display change to match the
selected machine. For example, when you select a lathe machine definition,
toolbars for lathe toolpaths and functions are displayed instead of mill
functions.
TIP: You can choose which set of toolbars to load with a specific machine. For
example, you can choose to display the toolbars for multiaxis toolpaths when
a 5-axis mill is selected. Select the toolbar state in the Machine Definition
Manager:
Then select Toolbar States from the Settings menu to customize the selected
set of toolbars. For more information, see “Creating and Saving Toolbar
States” on page 828.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Introducing Machine and Control Definitions • 733
Second, there is a component model that tells Mastercam exactly what axes and
peripheral equipment are attached to the machine:
For each component, you can set properties such as travel/rotary motion limits and
the axis orientation with respect to the machine world coordinate system. Mastercam
Router users will use this section to define aggregate machining heads and drill
blocks. You can also define axis combinations for machines with multiple sets of axes,
such as multi-spindle lathes.
8
734 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Finally, there is the selection of a control definition file (.CONTROL) and a default post
processor (.PST/.PSB):
When creating a machine definition, first select the .CONTROL file. Mastercam then
displays the list of available post processors in the Post-processor list so you can
select one. (For most users, each machine definition will only list a single post
processor.)
For most users, who will only configure a single control definition and post for each
machine definition, this list will only contain a single post. You can use the Control
Definition Manager to add posts so that they are available in this list (see “Adding
Posts” on page 775). Operators will then be able to select any post that appears in this
list as part of the machine group properties, but the post that you select here will be
the default.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Introducing Machine and Control Definitions • 735
To create and edit machine definitions, select Machine Definition Manager from the
Settings menu:
See “Using the Machine Definition Manager” on page 740 to learn more.
Note: The same post can be used by more than one control definition, provided
the control definitions are stored in different .CONTROL files or used by
different types of machines.
TIP: Users familiar with earlier versions of Mastercam will notice that all of the
numbered post questions have been replaced by control definition settings.
Although each .CONTROL file can store several individual control definitions—each
corresponding to a different post processor or machine type—most users will store a
single control definition in each .CONTROL file, so that each .CONTROL file
corresponds to a single post processor.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Introducing Machine and Control Definitions • 737
Use the Control Definition Manager in the Settings menu to create and edit control
definitions. Mastercam organizes all of the control settings in properties pages.
If the .CONTROL file contains more than one control definition, select the post
processor which identifies the desired control definition:
encrypted posts, .PSB files. In general, references to .PST files in this document apply
equally well to .PSB files.)
Your post processor has two main sections:
The first section has the post blocks, processing logic, variable declarations,
and formatting statements similar to pervious versions of Mastercam.
The second section is the post text section, It contains separate copies of
post text for every control definition that references the post processor. This
lets you customize the post text for specific controls or machines. For
example, you could have a generic mill post that serviced two machines in
your shop. The .PST file would have two complete post text sections, one for
each machine.
See “Editing Post Text” on page 768 and “Editing Miscellaneous Values” on page 775
to learn more.
Access the Machine Definition Manager from the Machine Group Properties dialog
box to make job-specific edits to the local copies of the machine and control
definitions saved in the machine group.
To edit the master copies stored on your hard drive (or create new machine and
control definitions), choose Machine Definition Manager and Control Definition
Manager from the Settings menu.
This message is for your information only; click OK to clear it and continue.
By default, Mastercam loads the machine from the active machine group, but you can
work on any machine definition you choose. Once the Machine Definition Manager
is loaded, select the Open button and select the desired machine.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Machine Definitions • 741
The following diagram provides an overview of how to use the Machine Definition
Manager to build a machine.
Figure 8-1: Working with the Machine Definition Manager
General Machine Parameters has settings that affect the entire machine.
Some buttons are only used Open the Control Definition Manager to edit the selected .control file.
for simulation and event-
driven programming functions. Create axis combinations for machines with multiple axes sets, like multiple spindle lathes.
Lock your machine definition with passwords.
A D
B
8
742 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
1 In the Toolpath Manager, click the Files icon in the machine group.
5 Click OK to close the Machine Definition Manager. Since the changes that
you have just made were saved to the disk (master) copy of the machine
definition, not to the machine group (local) copy, Mastercam asks if you
want to replace the machine group copy with the new version.
6 Click Yes or No when prompted. If you click No, your active machine groups
will not include your changes.
8
746 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You must select a control definition and post processor. All of your control
definition pages should be completed and reviewed, since many post
variables are initialized directly from their values.
For each component, you only need to complete the Parameters tab for the
component properties:
Most of the General Machine Parameters are optional. Some of the tabs let you set
useful defaults, such as tool libraries and construction planes, while other settings
such as travel and motion limits are available to your post processor as parameter
values.
Mill users who want to use the highfeed machining features need to complete the
Machine dynamics tab:
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Machine Definitions • 747
Lathe users who want to use a VTL need to set this up on the Cplane, WCS, HTC/VTL
tab:
8
748 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
3 Choose the default machine definitions you want to use for each machine
type.
a start-up machine definition” on page 747. To make this change, select the Apply last
machine definition option in the Settings, Configuration, Files properties page.
The command line switches are simply the first letter of each product name:
Mill /m
Lathe /l
Router /r
Wire /w
If you wish, you can attach the command line switch to your desktop shortcut. Simply
right-click on your Mastercam icon and choose Properties. Add the command line
switch to the Target field:
If you need to, you can replace the current machine definition with a different one.
You might need to do this for a couple of reasons:
You originally created the toolpaths for one machine, but need to run the job
on a different machine.
You want to use a different post processor, and the new post processor is
attached to a different machine definition.
When you replace the machine definition, Mastercam validates the existing
operations and informs you of any incompatibilities—for example, if a toolpath uses a
rotary axis that is not present on the new machine. Mastercam also adjusts feeds and
speeds that exceed the limits of the new machine definition and informs you of any
changes.
Note: Changing the machine definition does not affect the tooling that has been
selected for operations that have already been created. It is your responsibility to
ensure that the selected tools and holders are available on the new machine.
Click the Details button to learn more. In this case, the spindle speed of
an existing operation was greater than the maximum spindle speed of the
new machine, so Mastercam adjusted it downward.
8
754 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Click the Details button to learn more. In this case, an operation used a
rotary axis that was not present on the new machine.
4 Click OK to close any messages, and then click OK to close the Machine
Group Properties dialog box.
If your part file already has at least one machine group in the Toolpath
Manager, Mastercam will alert you that it is loading that machine
definition; click OK to clear the message from the screen.
Note: Because this procedure affects the disk copy of the machine definition, you
cannot perform it from the Machine Group Properties.
8
756 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
2 Select the new control from the Control Definition drop-down. In this
example, the current Fanuc control is being replaced by a Fadal control.
3 Select the default post processor from the Post Processor drop-down.
See “Adding Posts” on page 775 to learn how to add post processors to this
list.
4 Save the machine definition.
directly, you need to select the machine definition that has been configured for the
post processor. You can do this before creating your toolpaths:
or after your toolpaths have been created, through the machine group properties in
the Toolpath Manager:
Note: Some shops might be configured so that each machine definition has
multiple posts. In this case, the procedure is slightly different. See “Selecting a
different post processor—machines with multiple post processors” on page 758
to learn more.
8
758 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
3 Select the machine definition that contains the desired post. Mastercam
displays the name of the new machine definition with the post processor.
The list displays all of the post processors in the .CONTROL file that have
been configured for this machine type. If the post that you want to use is not
listed here, it needs to be added to the list. “Adding Posts” on page 775 tells
you how to do this.
4 Click Yes when Mastercam asks you if you want to replace the existing
control definition.
5 Click OK to close the Machine Definition Manager. Mastercam should then
display the name of the new post:
8
760 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
If your part file already has at least one machine group in the Toolpath
Manager, Mastercam will alert you that it is loading that machine definition;
click OK to clear the message from the screen.
2 If necessary, open the desired machine definition.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Machine Definitions • 761
The list displays all of the post processors in the .CONTROL file that have
been configured for this machine type. If the post that you want to use is not
listed here, it needs to be added to the list. “Adding Posts” on page 775 tells
you how to do this.
4 Save the machine definition and click OK to close the Machine Definition
Manager.
Note: If the machine definition that you edited is currently being used in a
machine group, Mastercam will ask you if you want to update the machine
group with the new definition.
the current file is not password-protected. Click the button and enter a password to
protect it.
762 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
the file is protected from changes. Click the button and enter the password to unlock
it for editing.
The protection applies only to the master copy of the machine definition or
.CONTROL file stored on your workstation’s hard drive. The machine group copy
stored in your part file can still be edited and the changes will be saved with your part
file.
When you try to open a protected file, Mastercam will prompt you for the password. If
you do not know the password, click OK to open the file for viewing. You can look at
all of the parameter pages, but cannot edit any values.
IMPORTANT: Locking the .CONTROL file does not affect the .PST files for any
post processors referenced by its control definitions. Locking or encrypting
post processors is a separate process.
Note: Because this procedure affects the disk copy of the machine definition or
.CONTROL file, you cannot perform it from the Machine Group Properties.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 763
Pages that have not been opened in the current session have a question mark next to
them:
Pages that have been already viewed in the current editing session have a green check
mark next to them:
Note: Switching to a new page does NOT save any changes that were made to the
page you were on. The green check mark does NOT mean that the changes on
that page have been saved.
The list of pages that are available, as well as the specific options on each, varies
depending on the kind of machine you are creating a control for—for example, mills,
lathes, routers, or wire EDM machines. Controls for mill/turn machines let you access
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 765
both mill and lathe options. See “Control Definition Properties” on page 783 to learn
more about each page, or click the Help button on each page.
TIP: See the Mastercam X4 NCI & Parameter Reference (installed as a PDF file
in your \Documentation folder) to learn more about how each control
definition field corresponds to a post variable or parameter.
Most of the data that you enter with the Control Definition Manager is saved with the
control definition in the .CONTROL file, but there are two major exceptions:
Settings from the Operation Defaults page are stored in the .DEFAULTS file.
See “Operation Defaults” on page 803 to learn more.
Settings from the Text pages and Misc Int/Real page are stored in the .PST
file. For more information, see “Editing Post Text” on page 768.
8
766 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: When you are working from the machine group, you cannot edit post text
or miscellaneous values.
5 Click the Save button to save the changes back to the machine group
properties.
2 If necessary, click the Open button to select a .CONTROL file to work on.
Figure 8-3: How post text is organized inside the .PST file
Control definition #1: Fanuc.control (Mill)
IMPORTANT: Because of header structure in the .PST file, when you work on
post text, your changes only affect a single control definition. To make
changes that apply to several control definitions, use the Import function (see
page 772) to copy your changes to the post text sections in the .PST file.
Use the following procedures to edit and import post text. Because these procedure
affects the .PST file, you cannot perform them from the Machine Group Properties
Files tab.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 771
2 If necessary, click the Open button to select the desired .CONTROL file.
3 If necessary, select the specific control definition to work on. You only need
to do this if your .CONTROL file has been set up to support multiple posts. If
so, click Existing definitions to select the control definition linked to the post
processor you want to edit.
8
4 Select Text in the Control topics list. The set of post text entries is organized
into different subpages that are specific to each machine type. Open
individual pages and make changes as desired.
Each page is organized like a spreadsheet into rows and columns. The
columns indicate different categories.
772 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Click a cell to select it. Double-click to edit it. Right–click for more editing
options and to import text from other sources.
Press [Tab] or [Shift+Tab] to move between data cells in data entry mode.
Refer to the online help for detailed information about how Mastercam
interprets different types of entries and where the entries are used within
Mastercam.
5 Click the Save button to save the changes to the .PST file.
TIP: You can also use this feature to copy post text values from a pre-
Mastercam X .TXT file to a Mastercam X .PST file.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 773
2 If necessary, click the Open button to select the desired .CONTROL file.
a single cell
6 Right-click in a data cell. Select Import from the menu and the desired
amount of text to import.
b Select the header to import, and then click OK. Continue with Step 9.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 775
8 Select From text to import post text from a pre-Mastercam X .TXT file.
Mastercam displays the following dialog box.
Adding Posts
Follow these steps to make additional post processors available to a machine
definition. Completing these steps will let operators select a different post processor
776 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
without changing the machine definition. This lets them select and use different post
processors just like in earlier versions of Mastercam, with the added security that they
will only be allowed to select posts that are appropriate for their current machine.
When you select a post processor in the Machine Definition Manager, Mastercam
actually reads the list of posts from the .CONTROL file:
Therefore, you will use the Control Definition Manager to build and configure this
list.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 777
a If your current part file has one or more machine groups in the Toolpath
Manager, Mastercam will alert you that it is loading the machine
definition used by the active group. Click OK to clear the message.
Note: Because this procedure affects the disk copy of the machine definition, you
cannot perform it from the Machine Group Properties:
8
778 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: Mastercam will warn you if the selected post processors have not been
updated to Mastercam X.
The “plus sign” icon will be replaced by a green check mark. This indicates
that the new post is OK and can be selected in the machine definition.
10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 for each post that you wish to add.
What Mastercam does behind the scenes
When you clicked Save in step 9 above, Mastercam created a new copy of the control
definition settings in the .CONTROL file. A .CONTROL file configured for use with
several posts actually contains many individual control definitions—each control
definition corresponds to a single post processor. This lets you customize each
control definition for a single post processor.
When you add a control definition for a new post processor to the .CONTROL file—
like you just did in the previous procedure—Mastercam populates the control
definition pages with default values. Where do these values come from? These are the
8
780 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
values that you see when Default setting for control type is selected in the Post
processor list.
Edit the values for the new control definition by typing new data directly in the pages,
or you can import settings from another control definition used by a different post. To
do this, right-click in any page:
You can choose to import data for a specific page, or all the pages.
TIP: Read the topic “Organizing control definition defaults” in the online help
to learn more.
Post text and miscellaneous values—Because Mastercam X lets you customize post
text and miscellaneous values for each machine or control, a post that has just been
added to the .CONTROL file has default values for these as well. Since these are stored
directly in the .PST file, not in the .CONTROL file, if you want to use text or
miscellaneous values from another post, you need to import them separately.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 781
Go to the Text page and choose Import from the right-click menu:
You can choose how much text to import, from a single cell to all the sheets. Choose
From post to import the text from another Mastercam X post, or From text to import
from a pre-Mastercam X post text file (.TXT). See “Editing Post Text” on page 768 to
learn more.
Post processor status indicators
Each post processor that appears in the Post processors list includes a status icon:
These icons indicate whether it is OK to use the post processor for posting, or if
Mastercam detects a problem. For example, problems can occur if the control
definition has not been properly saved, or if the .PST file is missing or has been
moved. A properly configured post processor file meets the following criteria:
8
A control definition that associates the post processor with a specific control
type has been created and saved to a .CONTROL file.
Using the information in the control, Mastercam has verified the location of
the .PST file that is stored on your system and has verified that it is actually
there.
782 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
A header exists in the .PST file with the control type and name of the
.CONTROL file followed by the post text for the control. This header is
automatically created when you create and save the control definition. The
format of the header is:
[Product key | Control Key]
where
Product key = CTRL_MILL, CTRL_MT_MILL,
CTRL_LATHE, CTRL_MT_LATHE, or
CTRL_ROUTER
The .PST file exists and the post processor has been properly
configured in the control definition. Status is OK for posting.
This is the only status that is approved for posting!
Mastercam cannot find the .PST file and the post processor
has not been configured in the Control Definition Manager
properties pages.
The .PST file exists and the post processor has been added.
You see this icon when you first add a post processor to the list
and have not yet saved the control definition. Save the control
definition to the .CONTROL file to change its status to OK.
The .PST file exists but has not been configured for use with a
control definition. Select the post processor and create a
control definition with it. You can use it after you save the
control definition to the .CONTROL file.
IMPORTANT: The post status icons do not indicate that a post has been
properly customized for a particular machine or application. Creating a control
definition and configuring the post as described here is not a substitute for
writing, editing, and properly testing the .PST file to make sure that its output
is compatible with a particular machine. That must be done in addition to any
steps described here, and is outside the scope of this documentation. For
more information, contact your Mastercam Reseller or see the Mastercam X4
NCI & Parameter Reference PDF in the \Documentation folder of your
Mastercam install.
Note: For Wire-specific Control Definition information, please see the Wire
Getting Started Guide in the \Documentation folder of your Mastercam install.
784 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Tolerances
The properties you define in this page are used to set pre-defined post processing
variables. You can also record the control’s minimum tolerance requirements for
creating surfaces, splines, and other geometry. The minimum and maximum arc
radius values may be used by the toolpath filtering functions.
Figure 8-4: Tolerances properties page (Control Definition Manager)
Note: Only Mastercam CAM functions use the tolerances you define here. To set
tolerances for CAD functions, use the Settings, System Configuration function
and dialog box. For more information, see “Setting Configuration Defaults and
Preferences” on page 836.
Communications
Use the Communications page to configure the serial communications settings
between the control and the computer running Mastercam.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 785
Files
Use this page to specify the location of the files needed by the control definition and
to establish default settings for saving different types of files. You can change the
default operations file (.DEFAULTS) or the operations library (.OPERATIONS) for a
particular machine group, assign a default setup sheet template, and set post and C-
Hook/NET-Hook program .DLLs.
Use the other option groups in this page to configure the posting process, including
8
how to log post processing errors and messages, setting up Post Processing dialog box
defaults.
786 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The File usage and Data paths fields list the different types of items for which
defaults can be set. Select an item to see the current default displayed in the field next
to it. Choose the Folder or File cabinet icons to select a new value.
Other options allow you to define how Mastercam logs errors and display messages
when using the control.
Notes:
• When creating a new control definition, the default names and paths of the
toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) files are read from the Settings,
Configuration, Files properties page settings. For more information, see “Files”
on page 853.
• Use the Control Definition Manager, Tool properties page to edit and create
new toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) files. For more information, see page 791.
NC Dialog
Use this page to enable different options in the Toolpath parameters tab. Deselect any
features that are not supported by the control.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 787
Notes:
• The Rotary axis button is enabled through the Machine Definition Manager.
• All control types use this page, but not all options appear for each type.
NC Output
You can set a number of options that affect how the NC code is formatted and
presented, including:
Absolute/incremental, Comments in NC (page 788)
Sequence numbers (page 788)
8
Spaces and end-of-block characters (page 788)
788 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: This section centralizes information that was set in several locations in
previous Mastercam versions.
Spaces and end-of-block characters—The values you set in this section are read
directly by the post processor.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 789
8
For each active field, you can enter a new or different default value. When you save the
current control definition, the new values will be written to the text section of the
active post.
The values that you enter here will normally be the defaults for all operations created
with this control definition. You can choose to override this behavior with the
Initialize toolpath operation options.
790 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
To create different default values for each operation type, select From default
operation. Then use the Operations Defaults page to enter the desired values
for each operation type and save them to a .DEFAULTS file.
For mill/turn controls, Mastercam will let you store two sets of miscellaneous
variables, one for milling and one for lathe operations. To create the second page,
choose the Use separate mill and lathe text and values option. In the Control topics
list, you will then see separate topics created for each set of values which you can then
edit independently.
For mill/turn controls, you can define two sets of miscellaneous variables, one for
milling and one for lathe operations. To enable this feature, choose the Use separate
mill and lathe text and values option. Separate mill and lathe Misc. Int/Real topics
display under Text in the Control topics list.
Notes:
• Use the NC Dialog page to enable or disable the Misc values button that
displays in the Toolpath parameters tab. You can use post text to change the
label that appears on the button.
• You can also configure Mastercam to run a C-Hook when the Misc values
button is pressed. Use the Settings, System Configuration function Files tab
to specify the C-Hook. You can specify a different C-Hook for each Mastercam
product (Mill, Lathe, Router and Wire). For more information, see “Files” on
page 853.
Work System
The Work system page lets you select the work coordinate system used by the control:
Other Custom
Use the Tplane field to assign work offsets to all Tplanes or just those which are being
transformed.
Tool
Use the Tool subpages to set the defaults for tool offsets, numbering, and home
positions that apply to mill, lathe, router, and mill/turn control types. (Some of the
field labels are slightly different for lathe.) For mill/turn machines, you can access
separate subpages for mill and lathe tools.
8
792 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Tool offsets—Choose one of the following methods used to transmit tool offset
information to the post processor:
Read tool offsets directly from the tool definition
Create an offset number based on the tool number plus the number you
enter here
Tool numbers—Select the options that describe how the post processor handles tool
numbers and head/station numbers.
Home position—The home position is where the tool goes for tool changes. You can
set the home position in several different places, including:
Machine Definition
Tool Definition (Lathe)
Toolpath Parameters for an individual operation
Use this section to set the default source of the home position. You can always
override the home position default on an operation-specific basis.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 793
Linear
Use these options to define how the control interpolates 3D linear motion. (Only
Lathe and Wire machines have corner rounding options.)
Note: For Mill/Turn controls, separate linear subpages for Mill and Lathe are
provided so you can configure these settings separately.
TIP: To link duplicate fields in each plane control section and make them
easier to maintain, select the option to Automatically set duplicate dialog
items the same. This allows you to change only one field and update all
duplicate fields in this page.
IMPORTANT: Plane definitions apply to the tool direction, not the linear axis
direction.
After setting the linear motion for each plane, use the Corner rounding/Exact stop
fields to define how the control handles corner rounding. Before selecting the exact
stop mode for corner rounding, verify that this mode is supported by the post
processor.
Arc
This page allows you to define how the control supports arcs and helixes.
Figure 8-13: Arc properties page (Control Definition Manager)
Lathe controls share the same page with Mill/Router controls, except that for Lathe,
there is only one plane available and no options for helix support. For Mill/Turn
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 795
controls, you will see separate subpages for Mill and Lathe settings. Mastercam uses
this information when filtering toolpaths.
Rotary
Use the settings in this page to further customize the rotary axis parameters from the
machine definition. You can choose to break rapid rotary moves when they exceed the
rotary axis limits set in the machine definition. You can also allow Mastercam to
calculate bi-stable solutions for rotary axis positions. This allows the post processor to
attempt the second solution in order to stay within limits or reduce machine motion.
Depending on conditions and the post processor, this may cause a tool retract and
reposition.
Figure 8-14: Rotary properties page (Control Definition Manager)
Select the planes in which the control can create arcs. Settings in this page
8
are disabled for unselected planes. For mills, indicate whether helixes are
supported and, if so, in what planes.
For each plane in which arcs are supported, choose how the control defines
the centerpoint. Select a method from the drop-down list.
Indicate whether the control allows 360-degree arcs. If it does not, define
whether to break the arcs at quadrants or 180-degree increments.
796 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Feed
The options in this page allow you to define how Mastercam interprets the feed rate
values that are entered for each toolpath operation created using the control.
Figure 8-15: Feed properties page (Control Definition Manager)
Set feed and rotary options for each axis group that applies to the control: 3-
axis, 4-axis, and 5-axis.
Define how the units for the feed rate are dimensioned. Set the dimensions
separately for linear and rotary feed rates.
You can also choose to output rapid moves as linear moves at the maximum feed rate
and, if necessary, adjust feed rates for arc moves.
Notes:
• Make sure that the control has the internal logic to support the options you
select.
• To set maximum and minimum feed rates, use the Machine Definition
Manager.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 797
Cutter Compensation
Use this page to tell Mastercam how your control implements cutter compensation
and which compensation options will be available to the user.
Figure 8-16: Cutter Compensation properties page (Control Definition
Manager)
The first check box determines if the control supports cutter compensation at all. If
this option is not selected, users will not be able to select Control as the
compensation type, but they will be able to select Computer to have Mastercam
calculate compensated toolpaths. If this option is selected, the other options are
enabled.
If your control allows you to activate cutter compensation on arc moves,
select that option here.
8
798 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
If appropriate, select the option to tell Mastercam that this control turns
cutter comp on/off above the part. This setting does not change the toolpath
or NCI file, but is available to the post and needs to be implemented there.
Typically, this option is used together with the options to Plunge after first
move and Retract before last move options in the Lead In/Out properties
page or dialog box.
Select Optimize Toolpath to enable this option as the default for new toolpaths. It
causes Mastercam to eliminate arcs from the toolpath if, in the compensated
toolpath, they would be smaller than the radius of the selected tool.
Machine Cycles
Use the subpages of machine cycle properties to define how the control implements
different machining cycles.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 799
For mill/turn machines, an additional option is added to this page: Use separate mill
and lathe drill cycle enable options. When selected, this option creates separate
subpages for mill and lathe drill cycles, allowing you to independently set and
maintain their options.
All control types use the same version of this page. In the following section, you will
learn to use additional detail pages to set more specific options for drill cycles and
lathe canned cycles, including:
Drill Cycles (page 799)
Lathe Canned Cycles (page 801)
Drill Cycles
8
Select all drill cycles that produce canned cycle output. The drill cycles that you do
not select in this page can still be used in the toolpaths you create with this control.
However, using them results in long-hand NC code.
800 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
For mill/turn machines, you can maintain separate versions of this page for mill and
lathe drilling operations. There is a separate page for activating and configuring lathe
canned cycles.
The options you set in this page affect the following lathe toolpath tabs:
Lathe drill cycle parameters tab
Mill/Router Cut parameters page or drill cycle parameters tab
Note: To edit the name/label of each cycle, and to specify parameters for each
cycle, use the Control Definition Manager, Text page. For more information, see
page 804.
8
Lathe Canned Cycles
You can also define how the control supports other canned cycles besides drilling. To
enable each toolpath type supported by the control, select the corresponding check
box.
802 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Groove and thread toolpaths also have a number of secondary options for supporting
specific features. These correspond directly to options and fields that appear in the
parameters tabs when using the control with the selected machine type to create
toolpaths. Options that are not enabled in this properties page are disabled or hidden.
The options you set in this page affect the following lathe toolpath tabs:
Canned groove shape parameters tab
Canned groove rough parameters tab
Thread cut parameters tab
Subprograms
Mastercam uses subprograms in two ways:
Transform subprograms are created by toolpath transform operations.
Non-transform subprograms are created by depth cuts and drilling
operations. Non-transform subprograms are available only with Mastercam
Mill and Router.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 803
In the Subprograms properties page, you define how the control supports both types
of subprograms.
Figure 8-21: Subprograms properties page (Control Definition Manager)
Operation Defaults
Use this page to create and edit sets of toolpath operation defaults (.DEFAULTS files).
This page does the same thing as the Edit Operation Defaults dialog box, which you
typically access from the Machine Group Properties. It is provided in the Control
8
Definition Manager as a convenience, so you can access toolpath and operation
defaults while working with the control settings. Separate Inch and Metric pages let
you work with the default files for inch and metric operations.
804 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: Use the Settings, Configuration function to define whether inch or metric
mode is the preferred Mastercam default. This preference is not defined in the
control definition. See “Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences” on
page 836 for details.
IMPORTANT: Settings on this page are saved to the .DEFAULTS file, not the
.CONTROL file. If you change operation defaults settings, you must click the
Save default settings button to save your changes to the .DEFAULTS file.
Mastercam prompts you to do this when you leave this page.
Text
Use the individual subpages under the Text heading in the Control topics pane to
create, view, and edit post processor text entries in a number of categories.
Prior to Mastercam X, posts were divided into two files:
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 805
A .PST file, which contained post variables, questions, and other processing
logic.
A .TXT file, which contained text data used by the post processor and which
was frequently used to customize the Mastercam interface with machine- or
control-specific parameters.
In Mastercam X, all of the post controlled text in the .TXT file has been brought into
the control definition, and its text strings are now part of the .PST file. Instead of
editing the .TXT file directly, you now use the Text page in the Control Definition
Manager to access the text data in the .PST file. See “Editing Post Text” on page 768
and “Editing Miscellaneous Values” on page 775 to learn more.
Mastercam’s control definition architecture means that each .PST file can have several
sections of post text. Every time you configure a post processor for use with a specific
control definition, Mastercam writes a new post text record and appends it to the .PST
file. The records are separated by headers which contain the name of the control and
type of machine. For example, the header:
[CTRL_MILL|BPT-DX32]
refers to a Mill control definition which is stored in a control file named
BPT-DX32.CONTROL. This means that in a single .PST file, you can store different sets
of post text with unique values for different controls.
In addition, there is a section in the .PST file that contains default post text. Use the
right–click menu in any of the Text subpages to import post text sections from other
control definitions in the same .PST file or from completely different .PST files, or to
restore values from the defaults.
8
806 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Choose a topic from the list to view its text entries in a spreadsheet-like interface. To
enter or edit a value, double–click in a field and type the new value.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Working with Control Definitions • 807
Note: For misc. ints/reals, the default values are embedded in the text string. For
more information, see “Miscellaneous Integer/Real Values” on page 789.
Right–click Menu Options—For more editing options and to import text from other
sources, use the following options that display when you right–click in the Text
properties page.
Import: Import to an entire sheet, a category, a single cell, or all text pages
from another post processor, or import an entire sheet from a .TXT file
8
created with a prior version of Mastercam.
Default: Choose the source of the default values for the current sheet,
category, cell, or all text pages, either system-wide default values, or the post
processor default. The post processor default is the generic text originally
found in the post text file.
Restore: Replace the contents of a sheet, category, cell, or all text pages with
the system default values.
808 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: Use the Settings, Macro Manager function to reduce the number of
keystrokes you type and ensure consistency when performing repeated tasks.
A macro is a series of Mastercam functions, commands, keystrokes, and other
actions that you can record, save, and play back at any time. Macros can make
detail work flow more quickly and easily.
CAM-related
toolbars hidden
Vertically docked
Sketcher toolbar
Vertically docked
Toolpaths toolbars
9
812 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Mastercam provides a number of standard toolbar files. They are located in the
Mastercam \CONFIG directory.
Note: When you start Mastercam, it opens the default toolbar file specified in the
configuration file. You set the toolbar and other startup parameters in the
Settings, Configuration, Start/Exit properties page. You will learn more about
configuring Mastercam defaults in “Setting Configuration Defaults and
Preferences” on page 836.
To access the Customize dialog box, choose Settings, Customize from the Mastercam
menu. Fields and options in the Customize dialog box are organized and displayed in
two tabs: Toolbars (default) and Drop-downs/Right-mouse button menu.
Figure 9-3: Toolbars tab (Customize dialog box)
Delete toolbars
Note: Use the Toolbar States button to access the Toolbar States dialog box. You
can also access this dialog box directly from the Mastercam Settings menu. For
more information on working with toolbar states, see “Creating and Saving
Toolbar States” on page 828.
To create or modify drop-down menus, including the right-mouse button menu, click
the Drop-downs/Right-mouse button menu tab.
Figure 9-4: Drop-downs/Right-mouse button menu tab (Customize dialog
box)
9
814 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: As you work with options in the Settings, Customize dialog box, toolbars
in the Mastercam window are updated so you immediately see the results of
changing the current toolbar file. All Customize dialog box options interact
with the Mastercam window in this manner.
When you choose a category from the list, a group of function icons for the selected
category displays in the Commands section of the tab:
Figure 9-7: Example: Edit category functions (Customize dialog box)
Selected
category
Selected
function
9
816 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: When you hover the mouse over the function icon, a brief description
(tool tip) of the function displays below the function list. You can also display
tool tips in the Mastercam window by moving the cursor over toolbar icons, or
buttons and fields in ribbon bars or dialog boxes.
Use “drag and drop” methods to quickly add, delete, or rearrange the functions in a
toolbar.
Add function: If you drop the dragged icon to this location, the
function is added either to a selected toolbar or to a new toolbar. If
you do not drop the icon on an existing toolbar, Mastercam
automatically creates the new toolbar.
TIP: If you drop a function in the wrong position, select it again, and then drag
and drop it in a new position.
5 To create a new toolbar for the function, drag and drop the function
anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not occupied by a toolbar.
Mastercam automatically creates a toolbar named New Toolbar and adds the
function to it.
6 To add additional functions to the new toolbar, repeat Step 2-Step 4, as
necessary. To rename the new toolbar, continue with “Renaming and
Deleting Toolbars” on page 817.
To delete a toolbar:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, select the toolbar to
delete from the Toolbars list.
2 Press Delete or right–click and choose Delete Toolbar from the menu. The
toolbar is deleted from the current toolbar file and no longer appears in the
toolbar list or the Mastercam window. If you delete a standard toolbar,
Mastercam displays a warning message on startup informing you that it
cannot find the toolbar.
TIPS:
• To add the deleted toolbar back to the toolbar file, you must recreate it
using the procedure for “Adding Functions and Toolbars” on page 816.
• To remove the toolbar from the Mastercam window without deleting it from
the toolbar file, deselect the check box that appears next to the toolbar
name in the Toolbars list.
Drop-down menus are collections of functions you add as a group to toolbars and
other drop-down menus. When added, they appear in the toolbar or menu as a single
function icon with an arrow indicating that it can be expanded.
Figure 9-9: Example: Expanded drop-down menus
9
820 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: You can configure Mastercam to always show the icon of the most
recently used function as the drop-down menu icon in the toolbar. Or you can
fix the positions of drop-down and submenu functions. For more information
on setting this and other screen parameters in the Settings, Configuration
function, see “Screen” on page 858.
Note: Renaming the drop-down menu is associative. When viewing the Menus
list, all references to the renamed menu are also updated, (for example, the
renamed drop-down menu is used as a submenu in other drop-down menus).
However, this is not reflected in the current Mastercam session and occurs only
after you exit and restart Mastercam.
TIP: If you drop a function in the wrong position, select it again, then drag and
drop it in a new position.
Notes:
• Adding or removing drop-down menu functions is associative. When you add,
remove, or rearrange functions in the “parent” drop-down menu, all of its
submenus immediately change.
• When you modify drop-down menus, you immediately see the results in the
current Mastercam session.
TIP: To create a new toolbar for the drop-down menu, drop the menu
anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not occupied by a toolbar.
Mastercam automatically creates a toolbar (New Toolbar) and adds the drop-
down menu to it. For more information on configuring toolbars, see
“Customizing Toolbar Settings” on page 810.
Here are a few things to keep in mind when working with submenus:
Creating a submenu item does not move or otherwise change the drop-down
menu on which it is based; it creates only an associative link, using the name
of the submenu.
When you add, remove, or rearrange functions in the “parent” drop-down
menu, all of its submenus immediately change.
To create multiple levels of submenus, begin with the last drop-down menu
in the series and work your way to the highest menu level. For example, to
create a three-level drop-down menu, first create all three drop-down
menus. Then, drag and drop the third level menu to the second level menu.
9
Next, drag the second level menu (which now includes a submenu link to the
third level menu) to the first menu.
826 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: You cannot delete or rename the right-mouse button menu from
Mastercam. To disable it, remove all of its functions.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Customizing Your Workspace • 827
Horizontal and
vertical separators
In the Customize dialog box, the Separator button displays in the upper
right section of each tab.
TIP: To reposition a separator, drag and drop it to a new position in the toolbar
or drop-down menu.
TIP: In the Settings, Machine Definition Manager dialog box, you can assign
a toolbar state to a machine definition. When you open the machine in a
machine group (for example, to create toolpaths for it), the assigned toolbar
state automatically loads in the Mastercam window.
Use the Settings, Toolbar States function to access the Toolbar States dialog box
where you can view, create, save, load, or delete toolbar states that are stored in the
current toolbar file.
Note: You can also access this dialog box by choosing Settings, Customize and
clicking the Toolbar States button in the Toolbar tab.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Customizing Your Workspace • 829
TIP: To set a default toolbar state that loads whenever you open the toolbar
file or start up Mastercam, select a toolbar state from the list. Then select the
Default check box. An asterisk displays next to the toolbar state name,
indicating that it is the default.
Although you use a separate function to work with them, toolbar states are stored in
binary format within a section of the current toolbar file (.MTB). To open and load a
toolbar file, use the Settings, Customize function, and then click the Open file
button, located in the lower left corner.
Hiding/Showing Toolbars
Mastercam provides standard toolbars you can modify, rename, or delete. You can
also create an unlimited number of your own toolbars.
Use the Show these toolbars portion of the Toolbar States dialog box to view all
standard and custom toolbars that have been configured for your Mastercam
installation, and to modify display status settings. Only toolbars with a display status
of “show” appear in the Mastercam interface.
9
830 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Show
Hide
When creating or modifying a toolbar state, use the following methods to set each
toolbar’s display status (show/hide):
To show a toolbar in the Mastercam window, select the check box next to the
toolbar name (selected toolbars are indicated with a check mark).
To hide a toolbar from display, clear the check mark next to the toolbar name
by deselecting it.
As you select/deselect toolbars, they display in, or are removed from, the Mastercam
window.
TIP: To restore deleted toolbar states, click Reset before exiting this dialog
box.
9
832 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
You can map any Mastercam function to a key sequence you define. Rather than
selecting a function from a menu or toolbar with the mouse, use your custom
keyboard shortcut to open the function.
Key map files have a .KMP file extension and reside in the \CONFIG directory of the
Mastercam installation location. You can load a new key mapping file at any time
during the Mastercam session. Key mapping files are also portable. You can copy and
use them on other Mastercam workstations, provided you save them in the correct
directory (\CONFIG).
The combinations of key sequences you can use to create keyboard shortcuts are
listed below (where Key is the alphanumeric character or keyboard function keys F1-
F12, and # is an entry from the numeric keypad).
[Alt]+[Key or #] [Ctrl]+[Key or #]
[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Key or #]
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[Key or #]
[Shift]+[Alt]+[Key or #]
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Key or #]
9
[F1]-[F12]
834 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: When mapping shortcut keys, you cannot use a single alphanumeric key
or one in combination with a [Shift] key. These shortcuts are reserved and used
by Mastercam for data entry shortcuts, AutoCursor power keys, and ribbon bar
and dialog box options.
Current Key
Reset map filename
Open Save as
2 In the Key mapping dialog box, click the Category drop-down arrow, and
choose a category from the list to display its functions.
3 In the Commands section, select the icon of the function to map. If a
keyboard shortcut is already assigned, it displays in the Current keys text
field.
4 To assign a new shortcut, position the cursor in the Press new shortcut key
field and type the key sequence. If Mastercam can assign the shortcut, the
entered sequence displays in the Press new shortcut key field (for example,
[Alt+Shift+D]).
5 To accept the new shortcut, choose Assign.
6 If the shortcut you entered is already assigned to another function, a
message displays, similar to the example below:
Configuring Mastercam X
Mastercam default settings are stored as files with a .CONFIG extension in the
Mastercam \CONFIG directory. Mastercam uses settings from the configuration file as
default values when you restart or initialize operations, for example, when creating a
new part, or opening and importing existing parts.
Mastercam provides standard configuration files with your initial installation, in both
inch and metric units. You can customize them, create your own, and even merge
configuration files. If multiple users share a single Mastercam installation, each
unique user can automatically load a customized default configuration file when
logging in to the workstation and running Mastercam.
Mastercam uses only one configuration file at a time. However, when running
Mastercam, you can change the configuration file as often as necessary.
Use the Settings, Configuration function and System Configuration dialog box to
review and set Mastercam default values, and to manage the configuration files that
store these values.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 837
Open: Opens the Open dialog box so that you can access .CONFIG files from
anywhere on your system.
Save As: Opens the Save As dialog box, which lets you save the current
configuration file using the same or a different file name. You can also use
the File Name drop-down list to select an existing configuration file to
overwrite.
Note: CONFIG files may be stored and accessed from any directory you choose,
even on a network. However, multiple Mastercam installations can share a
configuration file only if the paths stored in the .CONFIG file are valid for each
installation.
Merge: Opens the Configuration File Merge dialog box that lets you merge
configuration files and select which defaults you want to retain in the
resulting file.
Current: Displays the name of the configuration file currently in effect and to
which the defaults defined on all System Configuration pages will be saved.
To select a different configuration file as the current file, click the arrow and
choose a file from the list.
When you change a setting on a page, a check mark displays in front of it so that you
can track where you have made changes during an editing session. To save these
changes, you must save the configuration file. Otherwise, the changes are applied to
the current session and persist only until you close and restart Mastercam.
In this section, you will review some of the configuration settings in the following
properties pages:
Analyze
Use this page to set the default precision (the number of places after the decimal
point) with which the Analyze function displays values. You can also set the default
precision and measurement unit specifically for the Analyze distance dialog box. The
precision setting for the Analyze distance dialog box depends on whether the selected
measurement unit is decimal or fractional, as follows:
Decimal values can be displayed with 0 to 8 decimal placesfor example,
1.345.
Fractional values can be displayed with a fractional precision setting of 1/2,
1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, or 1/64for example, 2 3/4”. (Fractional values apply
only to the Feet Inches Fractional unit of measurement.) 9
840 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Backplot
Use this property page to set parameters that affect how a tool moves and appears on
the screen during a backplot operation. These parameters include:
General Settings (Tool Motion)
Step speed and increments
Screen cleanup on operation and/or tool change
Milling tool display options
Tool Appearance
Tool color and material
Holder color and material
Motion colors
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 841
The parameters you choose are for display purposes only and do not affect the part
when it is machined.
Although the General Settings display parameters are available for each Mastercam
toolpath type, the following options affect only the display of milling tools during
backplot:
Simulate Axis Substitution
Simulate Mill Cutter Compensation
Show move to/from Mill Home Position
Simulate Rotary Axis
Similarly, the following Tool Appearance options also apply only to the display of
milling tools during backplot.
Plain, Fluted, and Shaded tool options
Tool color and material
Show holder, holder color, and holder material
CAD Settings 9
The CAD Settings properties page is where you set design and drafting preferences,
including defaults for:
842 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: You can override many of these defaults using Status bar options and
when using functions to create, edit, and analyze geometric and drafting
entities.
Chaining
Use this page to define the way Mastercam chains entities, including:
Chaining mask options
Methods for sorting multiple, nested chains
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 843
TIP: You can override the defaults you set in the Settings,
Configuration, Chaining properties page by selecting the Chaining
options button in the Chaining dialog box.
Colors
You can set default colors for many different aspects of the Mastercam interface, such
as the graphics background (including gradients), geometry, construction origin, grid,
groups, and various Mill, Lathe, Solids, and Surfaces components.
9
844 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• To preserve changes to default color settings for subsequent Mastercam
sessions, you must save the configuration file.
• To temporarily change default colors for selected entities or new entities you
create during the current Mastercam session, use the Color function from the
Status Bar.
Communications
Use the fields on this page to configure the default serial communications settings
between the control and the computer running Mastercam. The settings you enter
here are default values that Mastercam loads when it starts. They can be changed
when you post the operations from the Post processing dialog box.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 845
Converters
When you open part files that are not in the current .MCX Mastercam format or when
you save them to an external file format, Mastercam automatically runs a conversion
program, based on the selected file type (for example, IGES, VDA, STEP, SAT,
Parasolid, DWG, or DXF.)
In the Converters properties page, you set defaults for file conversions, including:
How solids are imported and exported
How STL files are exported
The level used for untrimmable surfaces
How units are converted
The method used to convert solids:
Convert the solid to a Mastercam solid (without operation history). If
you do not have Mastercam Solids installed, you can still machine the
imported solid. However, Mastercam Solids must be installed to
modify a solid, or create additional solids.
Convert each face to a trimmed surface. With either of these options,
9
you can elect to convert edges to curve geometry (line, arc, or spline).
846 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
With the Solids option, you can also attempt to repair broken solids
during import.
Figure 9-25: Converters properties page (System Configuration)
TIP: When converting files, use the File, Open function and choose Options to
override or set additional conversion parameters.
Default Machines
Use this property page to set default machine definitions for Mastercam Mill,
Mastercam Lathe, Mastercam Router, and Mastercam Wire. Once you make these
selections, you can create a machine group from the default machine by choosing the
Default command in the Machine Type submenus.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 847
For example, suppose you want to make the GENERIC HAAS 4X MILL machine
definition the default for the mill machine type. In the Default Machines property
page, select the GENERIC HAAS 4X MILL machine definition:
Now, to setup a machine group with the default mill, choose Machine Type, Mill,
Default:
9
848 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
In the Operations Manager, Mastercam creates a machine group using the GENERIC
HAAS 4X MILL machine definition:
Notes:
• To change default settings for other types of files, use the Files property page.
• To select a machine definition for Mastercam to load at startup, use the Default
machine option in the Start/Exit property page.
TIPS:
• As you modify options in the drafting dimension properties pages, you
immediately see their effect in the preview diagram area of each page. Use
the preview to verify your selections.
• To temporarily change drafting default parameters for the current
Mastercam session, choose Drafting Options from the Create, Drafting
submenu.
Dimension Attributes
You define the following defaults in the Dimension Attributes properties page:
Display format and scale
Text centering
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 849
Dimension Text
The default text properties you can set for drafting dimensions in this page include:
Text height, width, and spacing
Text path or direction
Point dimension text display
Ordinate dimension: display negative sign
Line and borders
Font
Text alignment/orientation
Slant and rotation
9
850 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
If you select the Factors option, dimension text height also determines tolerance text
height, dimension arrowhead height and width, and witness line gap and extension,
based on factors you enter in the Factors of Dimension Text Height dialog box.
If you do not select the Factors option, you can set these parameters directly on the
Dimension Text properties page (tolerance text height) or the Leaders/Witness
properties page (witness line and arrow head parameters).
Dimension Settings
The Dimension Settings properties page lets you associate dimensions, labels,
leaders, and witness lines with entities as the entities are created. You can set the
method Mastercam uses to regenerate associated drafting entities. You can limit the
views in which entities can be displayed, and define increments used for baseline
dimensions.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 851
Use the Save/Get functions on this tab to save drafting parameters to a .CAD file, get
drafting parameters from a selected entity, load parameters previously saved in a
.CAD file, or get original, system-defined default parameters.
Note Text
Drafting notes and labels are blocks of text (one or more lines) that you insert into a
drawing.
Notes are standalone blocks of text, whereas labels have one or more leader lines used
as pointers.
When you create note and label drafting entities, Mastercam uses the following
settings in the Note Text properties page to format the text.
If you select the Factors option, note text height also determines note/label
arrowhead height and width, based on factors you can enter in the Factors of Note
Text Height dialog box. If you do not select the Factors option, you can set the note/
label arrowhead height and width parameters directly in the Leaders/Witness
properties page.
Leaders/Witness
In Mastercam, leader lines (drafting lines with single arrowheads that function as
pointers) most often point from a dimension’s text to its witness lines.
Witness lines are lines that project from a dimensioned object to indicate the extent of
the leader lines.
Use this page to set the default properties for:
Leader lines: Style, visibility, and arrow direction
Witness lines: Visibility, gap, and extension
Arrows: style, Height, and width
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 853
Files
Use the Files properties page to select the files you want Mastercam to use as defaults,
define the default data paths for saving different file types, configure Most Recently
Used (MRU) drop-down menu settings, and define options for opening and saving
files.
9
854 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
The Data Paths column lists files formats you can save out from Mastercam and
allows you to set a default data path for saving each type, for example,
C:\Metric\MCX\.
The Files Usage column lists all the file types for which you can open a default file
during Mastercam processing, for example, libraries, control and machine
definitions, and post processors. Mastercam opens the default files you set in this list,
when necessary.
In the Data Paths and File Usage lists, first select an item in the list. Then use the
Selected item field, located below the list, to specify the default value.
In the Files Usage section, you specify a default machine definition for each
Mastercam product (Mill, Lathe, Router, or Wire). When you convert a part file created
prior to Mastercam X, or you choose to create a new Mastercam X file, the default
machine definition for the product type is assigned. If the default machine definition
is incompatible with the part, a special Mastercam read-only default machine
definition is used instead.
The Apply last machine definition check box in the Files properties page allows you
to change this behavior. When you select this option, Mastercam applies the most
recently used machine definition in the current Mastercam session, for each product
type. If one has not been used, or if it is incompatible with the part, the default
machine definition you specified in the Files Usage list is used. If this default is
incompatible, the read-only default machine definition is applied.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 855
AutoSave/Backup
Use this page to activate Mastercam’s AutoSave and Incremental backup functions.
AutoSave lets you save the current geometry and operations automatically at specific
time intervals (for example, every 10 minutes). Use these options to define the
AutoSave and backup behaviors that can reduce data loss in the event of a hardware
or power failure.
Figure 9-33: AutoSave/Backup properties page (System Configuration)
Incremental Backup
When you activate the MCX Backup Files option (located in the Files page of the
Configuration dialog box), Mastercam stores not only the current version of your MCX
9
856 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
file, but also previous versions. You can then easily return your project to a previously
saved state.
Specifically, when you save an MCX file with MCX Backup Files active, Mastercam
creates a backup using the values specified in the MCX Backup Files options. For
example, suppose you have a file named Test.MCX. Suppose also that you have
Delimiter set to a hyphen, Start set to 100, Increment set to 1, and Max Limit set to 3.
Here is what Mastercam does with your MCX saves:
The first time you save Test.MCX, Mastercam creates the backup file Test-
100.MCX. You now have two copies of the file, Test.MCX and the first backup,
Test-100.MCX.
The second time you save Test.MCX, Mastercam renames Test-100.MCX to
Test-101.MCX and creates a new Test-100.MCX from Test.MCX. Now you
have three files, which are the original and two backups.
The third time you save, Mastercam renames Test-101.MCX to Test-
102.MCX, renames Test-100.MCX to Test-101.MCX, and creates a new Test-
100.MCX from Test.MCX. Now you have four files: the original and three
backups. Note that, in this example, three backups is the currently set Max
Limit.
The fourth time you save, Mastercam deletes Test-102.MCX (because
Mastercam has reached the Max Limit number of backups), renames Test-
101.MCX to Test-102.MCX, Test-100.MCX to Test-101.MCX, and creates a
new Test-100.MCX from Test.MCX. Now you still have four files: the original
and the most current three backups.
Note that the most current backup version has the Start number. That is, the higher
the version number appended to the file, the older the file.
These settings include, for example, whether to save the NCI and/or NC file or to edit
the existing file. For each file save, you can choose to overwrite the existing file
automatically, or have Mastercam ask you whether to overwrite it. You can set up
Mastercam to create an ASCII NCI file (called an Operation file), and specify the NC
file extension. You can also send the NC program to the machine automatically.
Figure 9-34: Post Dialog Defaults properties page (System Configu-
ration)
Printing
Use this page to set initial, default parameters for printing part drawings, including
line width, color printing, header name, and date.
9
858 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
When you choose File, Print to print entities in the graphics window, you can use
options in the Print dialog box to temporarily override the settings you define here.
Notes:
• When printing, use the Print dialog box to preview, modify default settings,
and to set other options, such as orientation, page margins, image scaling, and
line widths.
• To change printer driver properties, choose Property from the Print dialog box,
and then choose Properties from the Page Setup dialog box.
Screen
Use the Screen properties page to set the graphics parameters that control how
Mastercam looks and operates, and to define your personal display and selection
preferences. Here, you can also specify how Mastercam handles error messages
generated during toolpath operations.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 859
Notes:
• To set default colors for Mastercam screen and entity display, use the Colors
properties page.
• To turn off the ability to pre-select entities before choosing a function, deselect
the Allow Pre-selection check box.
• To set default shading parameters for Mastercam geometry, use the Shading
properties page.
Grid Settings
Use this page to configure the default settings for Mastercam’s grid function. By
setting up a grid in the graphics window, you can force entities to “snap” to specific
positions. For example, to draw entities whose locations and dimensions are always
multiples of a half inch, set your grid X and Y values to 0.5.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 861
Specifically, the selection grid is a matrix of reference points that the cursor snaps to
when you sketch a point. Snapping to the selection grid provides a finer level of
precision than sketching points freehand.
The following picture shows a set of rectangles drawn on a 1/2-inch grid. The dashed
lines represent the X and Y axes. The dots mark each 1/2-inch location in the grid.
9
862 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Note: To modify the grid settings for the current drawing, choose Screen,
Screen Grid Settings from the Mastercam menu. The changes you make from
the menu override the initial configuration parameters for the remainder of the
current session.
Shading
Shading values determine how surfaces and solids appear when shaded. Use this page
to set default shading parameters such as color, ambient lighting, spot lighting,
hidden edges, and other properties.
Figure 9-38: Shading properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
• To temporarily override default shading parameters during the current
Mastercam session, choose Shade Settings from the Screen menu or Shading
toolbar. This opens the Shading Settings dialog box.
• To make permanent changes to shading parameter defaults, use the Settings,
Configuration function and Shading properties page. Then save the changes to
your .CONFIG file.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 863
Solids
Options in this page allow you to pre-define how Mastercam creates and displays
solids, including:
Where to add new solids operations in the Solids Manager: ahead of toolpath
operations or in the order in which they are performed.
Enable/disable the Auto-Highlight for Solids Manager.
Specify a radial display curve angle for circular faces.
Set defaults for stitching surfaces into solids.
Figure 9-39: Solids properties page (System Configuration)
9
864 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• You can also enable or disable Auto-Highlight from the Solids Manager right-
click menu.
• To change default shading parameters for solids display during the current
Mastercam session, choose Shade Settings from the Screen menu or Shading
toolbar to open the Shading Settings dialog box.
• To specify whether Auto-Highlight selects complete solids or just faces, use the
Configuration, Screen page.
• To set default shading parameters for Mastercam geometry, including solids,
use the Configuration, Shading page.
Start/Exit
This page is where you set the default values to use during Mastercam startup and to
automate certain functions when you exit Mastercam. You can select the default
editor that launches when you edit NC files after post processing and specify the add-
on programs that run when you start or exit Mastercam.
Figure 9-40: Start/Exit properties page (System Configuration)
Note: Mastercam provides two default configuration files that display in the
drop-list as mcamx.config <English> and mcamx.config <Metric>. The
configuration files cannot be deleted.
Default toolbar and key map files: Set a default Mastercam toolbar (.MTB)
file to load stored toolbar settings and a default key mapping (.KMP) file
containing stored key mappings. Custom key mapping files are created using
the Settings, Key mapping function. You can select any key map file that is
saved to the Mastercam \CONFIG subdirectory.
Default startup product: From the drop-down list, select the product to load
at startup, such as Design, Mill, Lathe, Router, or Wire.
Default construction plane (2D or 3D mode): Select the default construction
plane (Cplane) where geometry is created. The list options include: Top,
Front, Right, Bottom, Back, and Left. The +XZ, -XZ, +DZ and -DZ planes are
used only in Mastercam Lathe. You can also select a 2D (XY) or 3D (XYZ)
default Cplane.
Default file editor: Indicates the default editor that Mastercam uses when
you open external application files. To change this setting, select another
editor from the drop-down list. File editors included with your Mastercam
installation are:
Mastercam Editor (default) - A full-featured, proprietary text editor
that offers menu, toolbar, and key mapping customization tools,
intelligent full-text editing—including support for specialized NC
functions, flexible serial communications built on portable XML
machine configuration files, and faster performance when working
with large NC files.
Cimco - A special version of Cimco Edit, licensed for use with
Mastercam.
PFE32 - Programmer’s File Editor (32-bit Edition).
MCEDIT - An editor that provides utilities for editing NC and NCI files
along with optional transmission capabilities.
Notepad - The default editor for Mastercam’s Draft and Demo
products.
To use any other editing application that may be available to you, choose
9
Other, and use the Select an editor dialog box to navigate to and select the
executable file of the editor you want to use. The selected editor is added to
the Editor drop-down list and becomes your startup default editor.
866 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Default MCX part file name: Specify a default Mastercam part filename
prefix, such as MyPart. This filename appears as a default in Mastercam Save
and Save as dialog boxes. The default file extension is .MCX (MyPart.MCX).
Current configuration’s units: Indicates or lets you select default
configuration units, as follows:
Inch: When selected, indicates that the current configuration file units are
English (inches).
Metric: When selected, indicates that the current configuration file units
are metric (millimeters).
Note: These options are available only when a user-defined (not a DEFAULT)
configuration file is loaded.
Tolerances
The options you define in the Tolerances properties page control the precision with
which Mastercam performs certain operations, for example, how close entities must
be to be considered coincident or chained, and how smooth curves and surfaces will
be. Smaller tolerances produce more precise parts, but also generally create larger
files.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 867
Chaining Tolerance: Set the maximum distance that two endpoints can be
apart and still be chained. Mastercam stops chaining and prompts for the
next entity if the distance between two adjacent entities exceeds the
chaining tolerance.
Planar Chaining Tolerance: Specify the maximum distance an entity can be
separated from a plane and be considered to lie in that plane. Cplane
chaining uses this tolerance to determine which chained entities are planar.
Mastercam uses chained geometry to calculate toolpaths (contours or
pockets).
Minimum arc length: Define the smallest arc Mastercam can create. An
9
appropriate minimum arc length prevents creation of very small arcs, for
example, when pocketing or creating fillets.
868 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Curve minimum/maximum step size: Set the shortest and longest distance
Mastercam can step along a curve when creating toolpaths or breaking a
spline into arcs, and so on.
Curve chordal deviation: Define the maximum distance allowed between a
line segment or edge and a curve. It controls how precisely curves, surfaces,
and toolpaths fit underlying geometry. You can redefine this tolerance when
you create flowline curves, and also net and swept surfaces.
Maximum surface deviation: Specify the maximum distance by which a
surface can be separated from its generating curves.
Toolpath tolerance: Set the tolerance used to calculate toolpaths.
Toolpaths
Use this page to configure how toolpaths are created, maintained, and displayed, and
to define the setup sheet program to use.
Figure 9-42: Toolpaths properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
• To change tool display parameters for a selected operation, click Parameters in
the Toolpath Manager, and choose Tool Display in the Tool Parameters tab.
• Although tool display defaults are in effect when Mastercam starts, if you
change them, subsequent toolpaths of the same type that you create or import
(for example, contour) use the modified parameters for the duration of the
Mastercam session.
Toolpath Manager
Use this page to specify names for machine groups, toolpath groups, and NC files.
These names appear in the Toolpath Manager, using the options you select. For
machine and toolpath groups, you can enter a user-defined name, or choose to use
the MCX file name or the machine name (from the machine definition). You can
name NC files after the MCX file name, the machine name, the toolpath group name,
the last operation’s name, or a user-defined name. You can also have Mastercam
prompt for an NC file name only for the first operation you define or for every
operation you define.
9
870 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
TIP: To avoid duplicate entries in Toolpath Manager, use the Append Values
option to automatically add sequential numbers to the specified names.
Mastercam increments the numbers based on the values you choose. For
example, suppose you set the Machine Group Name to the user-defined value
“Machine Group.” Mastercam names the first machine group you create
“Machine Group-1,” the second “Machine Group-2,” and so on. (The actual
numbers depend on your Append Values settings.)
Notes:
• If you choose to use the MCX file name as the basis for names in Toolpath
Manager, save your MCX file before creating your machine groups, toolpaths,
and NC files. Otherwise, Mastercam uses the default MCX file name from the
Start/Exit page of the System Configuration dialog box.
• You cannot turn off the Append Values options for machine group or toolpath
names, but you can turn it off for NC file names.
The following figure shows machine group, toolpath, and NC file names as they
appear in Toolpath Manager.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Configuration Defaults and Preferences • 871
Parameters you can set for machine and toolpath groups include:
Prompt: Ask for a group name when you create a group.
MCX file name: Use your current MCX file name as the group name.
Machine name: Use the machine name as the group name.
User defined name: Enter a group name in the provided text box.
Delimiter: Specify the character that separates the appended number from
the group name.
Increment start: Specify the number to append to the first group created.
Increment value: Specify the increment between appended numbers. That
is, each appended number is the previous number plus the increment value.
Parameters you can set for NC files include:
Prompt: Ask for a file name when you create a toolpath operation. You can
choose to be prompted for every operation or for only the first operation.
MCX file name: Use your current MCX file name as the NC file name.
Machine name: Use the machine name as the NC file name.
Toolpath group name: Use the toolpath group name as the NC file name.
9
Last operation’s NC file: Use the last operation's name as the NC file name.
User defined name: Enter an NC file name in the provided text box.
872 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Verify Interface
Use this property page to customize the default settings Mastercam uses with the
Verify function. Mastercam loads these settings at startup. Then, when you use the
Verify function, Mastercam sets the Verify dialog box options to these defaults.
Note: Changes you make to settings in the Verify dialog box remain in effect for
the remainder of the session, unless you reset the configuration options in the
Verify Interface property page.
9
874 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Verify Settings
Use this property page in the System Configuration dialog box to define initial, default
configuration parameters for toolpath verification operations initiated from the
Toolpath Manager.
Figure 9-47: Verify Settings properties page (System Configuration)
Wire Backplot
If your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Wire, the settings in this property
page allow you to define how the wire moves and appears on the screen during a
backplot operation. You can define general settings such as the step speed/
increments, the screen cleanup, and the simulated wirepath display. You can also set
up the motion colors and color loop options.
Figure 9-48: Wire Backplot properties page (System Configuration)
9
876 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
Notes:
• The parameters you choose are for display purposes only and do not affect the
part when it is machined.
• Selections on this property page are established as system defaults. To change
Wire backplot settings during the current Mastercam session, backplot an
operation. Then, in the Backplot Options dialog box, choose the Options
button to open the Backplot options dialog box where you can make the
necessary changes.
In this dialog box, select the configuration settings you want to merge with the current
configuration file and specify which sections to merge.
TIP: To quickly select/deselect all options, select the All on/All off buttons,
located in the bottom leftmost section of the dialog box.
9
878 • MASTERCAM X4/ Reference Guide
879
Index
Numerics pocketing.........................................685
roughing ..........................................683
2D / 3D
stock definition ...............................683
working in ....................................... 105
surface selection .................... 647–648
2D high speed toolpaths ..................... 485
tilting strategies...................... 659–664
area mill .......................................... 490
tool axis control...............................658
blend mill........................................ 490
tool contact point............................665
core mill .......................................... 487
Utility tab ........................................688
dynamic mill ................................... 485
aggregate heads ...................................532
peel mill .......................................... 488
analyze
rest mill ........................................... 491
defaults............................................839
2D profile.....................................193, 195
entities.............................................263
3D Advanced Toolpath Refinement .. 534,
568, 587, 614, 615 arc entities
line ar/ filtering ............................... 617 creating ...........................................177
smoothing....................................... 618 creating points in center .................171
4-axis creating polar ..................................178
toolpaths ......................................... 628 arcs
5-axis control definition defaults ..............794
selecting geometry for toolpaths .... 629 area clearance toolpaths .....................550
toolpaths ......................................... 628 Art
Art Manager ............................. 14, 423
menu .......................................... 39, 50
A toolpaths .........................................475
about ..................................................... 65 associativity
advanced multiaxis toolpaths Solids ...............................................315
axial shift ......................................... 690 toolpath .............................................36
cut pattern ...................................... 644 attributes
depth cuts ....................................... 685 about .................................................99
entry and exit macros ..................... 680 assigning to transformed entities ...239
feed rate optimization .................... 688 changing..........................................103
feed rate optimizer ......................... 688 setting..................................... 100, 101
gap handling ................................... 677 AutoCursor
gouge-check.................................... 669 about .................................................78
limits ............................................... 667 Along mode .....................................168
linking moves.................................. 675 customizing.......................................82
Machine Definition tab .................. 690 power keys.........................................85
Misc tab........................................... 692 relative position ..............................167
multipasses ..................................... 684 using FastPoint mode .......................81
plunge roughing ............................. 684 using Overrides .................................84
using visual cues ...............................33
880 • MASTERCAM X4 / Reference Guide
start and exit defaults ..................... 864 local copy ............................... 738, 765
tolerance defaults ........................... 866 locking .............................................761
toolpath defaults............................. 868 master copy............................ 738, 765
Toolpath Manager defaults ............ 869 password protecting .......................761
verify interface defaults .................. 872 properties of ....................................783
verify settings defaults .................... 874 toolpath defaults ...................... 55, 413
configuration files (.CONFIG) control files (.CONTROL)
about ............................................... 836 selecting ..........................................754
managing ........................................ 837 converters
merging........................................... 876 converting files..................................40
construction planes defaults............................................845
about ............................................... 111 coordinate systems
contour toolpaths about (Lathe)...................................135
about ............................................... 492 about (Mill / Router) .......................112
chaining .......................................... 493 and machine definitions.................120
chamfer ........................................... 494 views and planes .............................112
creating tabs ................................... 497 coordinates
onion skin ....................................... 496 displaying ............................... 121–122
oscillating........................................ 496 entering in FastPoint mode ..............81
ramp................................................ 494 Cplanes
remachining.................................... 495 about ...............................................111
Control Definition Manager setting..............................................113
about ................................................. 36 setting in Lathe................................136
arc defaults...................................... 794 curves
canned cycle defaults ..................... 801 generating on surfaces and solids...212
communication defaults ................ 784 customizing
cutter comp defaults....................... 797 AutoCursor ........................................82
drill cycle defaults ........................... 799 drop-down menus ..........................818
feed defaults.................................... 796 Mastercam workspace ............. 53, 809
file type defaults.............................. 785 right-mouse button menu ..............826
helix defaults................................... 794 shortcut keys ...................................833
linear motion defaults .................... 793 toolbars ...........................................814
machine cycle defaults ................... 798 cutter compensation
misc integer / reals defaults ........... 789 control definition defaults ..............797
NC dialog box defaults.................... 786 in control.........................................797
NC output defaults ......................... 788 Cview
operation defaults (.DEFAULTS).... 803 utility ...............................................713
rotary defaults................................. 795
subprogram defaults ...................... 802
text defaults .................................... 804 D
tolerance defaults ........................... 784 defaults
tool defaults .................................... 791 configuration settings ............ 836, 837
using................................................ 763 high speed surface toolpaths . 416, 418
work system defaults ...................... 790 machine group properties ....... 55, 409
control definitions toolpath .................................... 55, 409
about .........................................53, 729 delete / undelete .................................139
and post processors ........................ 735 deleting................................................140
choosing.......................................... 360 depth cuts
editing ............................................. 763 advanced multiaxis toolpaths.........685
882 • MASTERCAM X4 / Reference Guide
Design
about................................................. 78
E
editors
editing............................................. 137
selecting a file editor ......................... 61
dialog boxes
engraving
working with ..................................... 21
toolpaths ......................................... 725
dimension attributes
entities ................................................. 140
defaults ........................................... 848
“live” editing ................................... 166
dimension text
analyzing ......................................... 263
defaults ........................................... 849
changing attributes......................... 103
documentation
creating ........................................... 164
post processor reference ................ 137
creating views from......................... 129
resources............................................. 7
deleting ........................................... 139
door
deleting duplicates.......................... 139
creating geometry........................... 202
editing ............................................. 227
drafting
live, fixed, phantom ........................ 166
default properties ........................... 848
selecting ............................................ 90
dimension attribute defaults.......... 848
setting color .................................... 104
dimension defaults ......................... 850
shading............................................ 862
dimension text defaults .................. 849
transforming (Xform)........................ 47
leaders / witness defaults ............... 852
undeleting ....................................... 141
note text defaults ............................ 851
entry and exit macros
drill cycles
advanced multiaxis toolpaths......... 680
choosing ......................................... 506
entry/exit moves
control definition defaults.............. 799
advanced multiaxis toolpaths......... 675
drill points
events
editing............................................. 510
undo and redo................................. 138
selecting.......................................... 508
extending entities................................ 227
sorting............................................. 509
drill toolpaths
automatic drilling ........................... 479 F
block drilling blind holes................ 529 FastPoint mode
creating ........................................... 505 using.................................................. 81
FBM Drill ........................................ 479 FBM ..................................................... 477
feature-based drilling ..................... 512 drilling ............................................. 479
drop-down menus milling ............................................. 482
adding functions............................. 823 requirements................................... 478
adding submenus ........................... 824 FBM Drill
adding to toolbars........................... 824 features page tips ............................ 481
creating ........................................... 821 hole mapping ..........................477, 479
customizing .................................... 818 hole mapping tips ........................... 480
deleting ........................................... 822 hole milling ..................................... 479
deleting functions........................... 823 FBM Mill
moving functions............................ 823 generated toolpath types ................ 483
renaming ........................................ 822 Slug cutting ..................................... 483
dynamic chaining ............................... 399 Feature Based Machining (FBM) ........ 477
dynamic mill ....................................... 485 FBM Drill......................................... 479
FBM Mill.......................................... 482
requirements................................... 478
883
W
waterline toolpaths ............................. 560
WCS
example .................................. 133, 134
Status bar options........................... 114
Tplanes ........................................... 132
views, planes, coordinate systems . 112
wire backplot defaults......................... 875
work offsets
renumbering................................... 448
work system
control definition defaults.............. 790
workspace orientation .......................... 11
X
Xform
assigning entity attributes .............. 239
transforming entities ........................ 47
using ............................................... 237
Z
Z depth
setting ............................................. 105
Zip2Go................................................... 52
sharing files....................................... 59
zoom / unzoom .................................. 107